SlideShare a Scribd company logo

Ww1.microchip.com downloads en_device_doc_39662b

Oai Vu Quoc, profile picture
Oai Vu Quoc

The document is a data sheet for the ENC28J60 Ethernet controller chip. It provides an overview of the chip's features which include an integrated MAC and PHY for 10BASE-T Ethernet, an SPI interface, packet buffering memory, DMA support, and more. It describes the chip's external connections, memory organization, initialization process, packet transmission and reception, filtering capabilities, duplex mode configuration, interrupts, and electrical specifications.

TechnologyBusiness
1 of 96
Download to read offline
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
ENC28J60 Data Sheet Stand-Alone Ethernet Controller with SPI Interface © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B
Note the following details of the code protection feature on Microchip devices: • Microchip products meet the specification contained in their particular Microchip Data Sheet. • Microchip believes that its family of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the market today, when used in the intended manner and under normal conditions. • There are dishonest and possibly illegal methods used to breach the code protection feature. All of these methods, to our knowledge, require using the Microchip products in a manner outside the operating specifications contained in Microchip’s Data Sheets. Most likely, the person doing so is engaged in theft of intellectual property. • Microchip is willing to work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of their code. • Neither Microchip nor any other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of their code. Code protection does not mean that we are guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.” Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Microchip are committed to continuously improving the code protection features of our products. Attempts to break Microchip’s code protection feature may be a violation of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. If such acts allow unauthorized access to your software or other copyrighted work, you may have a right to sue for relief under that Act. Information contained in this publication regarding device applications and the like is provided only for your convenience and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to ensure that your application meets with your specifications. MICROCHIP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, RELATED TO THE INFORMATION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ITS CONDITION, QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. Microchip disclaims all liability arising from this information and its use. Use of Microchip devices in life support and/or safety applications is entirely at the buyer’s risk, and the buyer agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Microchip from any and all damages, claims, suits, or expenses resulting from such use. No licenses are conveyed, implicitly or otherwise, under any Microchip intellectual property rights. Trademarks The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, Accuron, dsPIC, KEELOQ, microID, MPLAB, PIC, PICmicro, PICSTART, PRO MATE, PowerSmart, rfPIC and SmartShunt are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. AmpLab, FilterLab, Migratable Memory, MXDEV, MXLAB, SEEVAL, SmartSensor and The Embedded Control Solutions Company are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. Analog-for-the-Digital Age, Application Maestro, CodeGuard, dsPICDEM, dsPICDEM.net, dsPICworks, ECAN, ECONOMONITOR, FanSense, FlexROM, fuzzyLAB, In-Circuit Serial Programming, ICSP, ICEPIC, Linear Active Thermistor, Mindi, MiWi, MPASM, MPLIB, MPLINK, PICkit, PICDEM, PICDEM.net, PICLAB, PICtail, PowerCal, PowerInfo, PowerMate, PowerTool, REAL ICE, rfLAB, rfPICDEM, Select Mode, Smart Serial, SmartTel, Total Endurance, UNI/O, WiperLock and ZENA are trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. SQTP is a service mark of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. All other trademarks mentioned herein are property of their respective companies. © 2006, Microchip Technology Incorporated, Printed in the U.S.A., All Rights Reserved. Printed on recycled paper. Microchip received ISO/TS-16949:2002 certification for its worldwide headquarters, design and wafer fabrication facilities in Chandler and Tempe, Arizona, Gresham, Oregon and Mountain View, California. The Company’s quality system processes and procedures are for its PICmicro® 8-bit MCUs, KEELOQ® code hopping devices, Serial EEPROMs, microperipherals, nonvolatile memory and analog products. In addition, Microchip’s quality system for the design and manufacture of development systems is ISO 9001:2000 certified. DS39662B-page ii Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 Stand-Alone Ethernet Controller with SPI Interface Ethernet Controller Features Operational • IEEE 802.3 compatible Ethernet controller • Integrated MAC and 10BASE-T PHY • Supports one 10BASE-T port with automatic polarity detection and correction • Supports Full and Half-Duplex modes • Programmable automatic retransmit on collision • Programmable padding and CRC generation • Programmable automatic rejection of erroneous packets • SPI Interface with clock speeds up to 20 MHz • • • • • • Six interrupt sources and one interrupt output pin 25 MHz clock input requirement Clock out pin with programmable prescaler Operating voltage of 3.1V to 3.6V (3.3V typical) 5V tolerant inputs Temperature range: -40°C to +85°C Industrial, 0°C to +70°C Commercial (SSOP only) • 28-pin SPDIP, SSOP, SOIC, QFN packages Package Types 28-Pin SPDIP, SSOP, SOIC Medium Access Controller (MAC) Features VDD 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 ENC28J60 8-Kbyte transmit/receive packet dual port SRAM Configurable transmit/receive buffer size Hardware-managed circular receive FIFO Byte-wide random and sequential access with auto-increment • Internal DMA for fast data movement • Hardware assisted checksum calculation for various network protocols • Supports Unicast, Multicast and Broadcast packets • Programmable receive packet filtering and wake-up host on logical AND or OR of the following: - Unicast destination address - Multicast address - Broadcast address - Magic Packet™ - Group destination addresses as defined by 64-bit hash table - Programmable pattern matching of up to 64 bytes at user-defined offset 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 VCAP VSS CLKOUT INT NC* SO SI SCK CS RESET VSSRX TPINTPIN+ RBIAS • • • • LEDA LEDB VDDOSC OSC2 OSC1 VSSOSC VSSPLL VDDPLL VDDRX VSSTX TPOUT+ TPOUTVDDTX INT CLKOUT VSS VCAP VDD LEDA LEDB Buffer 28-pin QFN 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 NC* SO SI SCK CS RESET VSSRX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ENC28J60 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 VDDOSC OSC2 OSC1 VSSOSC VSSPLL VDDPLL VDDRX 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. TPOUTTPOUT+ VSSTX • Loopback mode • Two programmable LED outputs for LINK, TX, RX, collision and full/half-duplex status TPINTPIN+ RBIAS VDDTX Physical Layer (PHY) Features * Reserved pin; always leave disconnected. Preliminary DS39662B-page 1
ENC28J60 Table of Contents 1.0 Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3 2.0 External Connections ................................................................................................................................................................... 5 3.0 Memory Organization ................................................................................................................................................................. 11 4.0 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)................................................................................................................................................. 25 5.0 Ethernet Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................... 31 6.0 Initialization................................................................................................................................................................................. 33 7.0 Transmitting and Receiving Packets .......................................................................................................................................... 39 8.0 Receive Filters............................................................................................................................................................................ 47 9.0 Duplex Mode Configuration and Negotiation.............................................................................................................................. 53 10.0 Flow Control ............................................................................................................................................................................... 55 11.0 Reset .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 59 12.0 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................................................................... 63 13.0 Direct Memory Access Controller ............................................................................................................................................... 71 14.0 Power-Down ............................................................................................................................................................................... 73 15.0 Built-in Self-Test Controller ........................................................................................................................................................ 75 16.0 Electrical Characteristics ............................................................................................................................................................ 79 17.0 Packaging Information................................................................................................................................................................ 83 Index .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 89 The Microchip Web Site ....................................................................................................................................................................... 91 Customer Change Notification Service ................................................................................................................................................ 91 Customer Support ................................................................................................................................................................................ 91 Reader Response ................................................................................................................................................................................ 92 Product Identification System............................................................................................................................................................... 93 TO OUR VALUED CUSTOMERS It is our intention to provide our valued customers with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip products. To this end, we will continue to improve our publications to better suit your needs. Our publications will be refined and enhanced as new volumes and updates are introduced. If you have any questions or comments regarding this publication, please contact the Marketing Communications Department via E-mail at docerrors@microchip.com or fax the Reader Response Form in the back of this data sheet to (480) 792-4150. We welcome your feedback. Most Current Data Sheet To obtain the most up-to-date version of this data sheet, please register at our Worldwide Web site at: http://www.microchip.com You can determine the version of a data sheet by examining its literature number found on the bottom outside corner of any page. The last character of the literature number is the version number, (e.g., DS30000A is version A of document DS30000). Errata An errata sheet, describing minor operational differences from the data sheet and recommended workarounds, may exist for current devices. As device/documentation issues become known to us, we will publish an errata sheet. The errata will specify the revision of silicon and revision of document to which it applies. To determine if an errata sheet exists for a particular device, please check with one of the following: • Microchip’s Worldwide Web site; http://www.microchip.com • Your local Microchip sales office (see last page) When contacting a sales office, please specify which device, revision of silicon and data sheet (include literature number) you are using. Customer Notification System Register on our web site at www.microchip.com to receive the most current information on all of our products. DS39662B-page 2 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 1.0 OVERVIEW The ENC28J60 consists of seven major functional blocks: The ENC28J60 is a stand-alone Ethernet controller with an industry standard Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI). It is designed to serve as an Ethernet network interface for any controller equipped with SPI. The ENC28J60 meets all of the IEEE 802.3 specifications. It incorporates a number of packet filtering schemes to limit incoming packets. It also provides an internal DMA module for fast data throughput and hardware assisted checksum calculation, which is used in various network protocols. Communication with the host controller is implemented via an interrupt pin and the SPI, with clock rates of up to 20 MHz. Two dedicated pins are used for LED link and network activity indication. A simple block diagram of the ENC28J60 is shown in Figure 1-1. A typical application circuit using the device is shown in Figure 1-2. With the ENC28J60, two pulse transformers and a few passive components are all that is required to connect a microcontroller to an Ethernet network. FIGURE 1-1: 1. An SPI interface that serves as a communication channel between the host controller and the ENC28J60. Control Registers which are used to control and monitor the ENC28J60. A dual port RAM buffer for received and transmitted data packets. An arbiter to control the access to the RAM buffer when requests are made from DMA, transmit and receive blocks. The bus interface that interprets data and commands received via the SPI interface. The MAC (Medium Access Control) module that implements IEEE 802.3 compliant MAC logic. The PHY (Physical Layer) module that encodes and decodes the analog data that is present on the twisted pair interface. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. The device also contains other support blocks, such as the oscillator, on-chip voltage regulator, level translators to provide 5V tolerant I/Os and system control logic. ENC28J60 BLOCK DIAGRAM LEDA Buffer LEDB RX 8 Kbytes Dual Port RAM MAC RXBM TPOUT+ RXF (Filter) CLKOUT Control Registers TX MII Interface ch0 Arbiter ch0 ch1 DMA & Checksum PHY TPOUT- TPIN+ TX ch1 RX TXBM INT TPIN- Flow Control Bus Interface MIIM Interface RBIAS Host Interface CS(1) SI(1) SO OSC1 SPI System Control Power-on Reset Voltage Regulator 25 MHz Oscillator OSC2 SCK(1) VCAP RESET(1) Note 1: These pins are 5V tolerant. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 3
ENC28J60 FIGURE 1-2: TYPICAL ENC28J60-BASED INTERFACE MCU ENC28J60 TPIN+/- CS I/O SDO SO SDI SCK SCK RJ45 TPOUT+/- SI TX/RX Buffer MAC ETHERNET TRANSFORMER PHY LEDA INT INTX LEDB TABLE 1-1: PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS Pin Number SPDIP, SOIC, SSOP QFN Pin Type Buffer Type VCAP 1 25 P — 2.5V output from internal regulator. A low Equivalent Series Resistance (ESR) capacitor, with a typical value of 10 μF and a minimum value of 1 μF to ground, must be placed on this pin. VSS 2 26 P — Ground reference. CLKOUT 3 27 O — Programmable clock output pin.(1) INT 4 28 O — INT interrupt output pin.(2) NC 5 1 O — Reserved function; always leave unconnected. SO 6 2 O — Data out pin for SPI interface.(2) SI 7 3 I ST Data in pin for SPI interface.(3) SCK 8 4 I ST Clock in pin for SPI interface.(3) CS 9 5 I ST Chip select input pin for SPI interface.(3,4) RESET 10 6 I ST Active-low device Reset input.(3, 4) VSSRX 11 7 P — Ground reference for PHY RX. TPIN- 12 8 I ANA Differential signal input. TPIN+ 13 9 I ANA Differential signal input. RBIAS 14 10 I ANA Bias current pin for PHY. Must be tied to ground via a resistor (refer to Section 2.4 “Magnetics, Termination and Other External Components” for details). VDDTX 15 11 P — Positive supply for PHY TX. TPOUT- 16 12 O — Differential signal output. TPOUT+ 17 13 O — Differential signal output. VSSTX 18 14 P — Ground reference for PHY TX. VDDRX 19 15 P — Positive 3.3V supply for PHY RX. VDDPLL 20 16 P — Positive 3.3V supply for PHY PLL. VSSPLL 21 17 P — Ground reference for PHY PLL. VSSOSC 22 18 P — Ground reference for oscillator. OSC1 23 19 I ANA OSC2 24 20 O — Oscillator output. VDDOSC 25 21 P — Positive 3.3V supply for oscillator. LEDB 26 22 O — LEDB driver pin.(5) LEDA 27 23 O — LEDA driver pin.(5) 28 24 P — Positive 3.3V supply. Pin Name VDD Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: Description Oscillator input. I = Input, O = Output, P = Power, DIG = Digital input, ANA = Analog signal input, ST = Schmitt Trigger Pins have a maximum current capacity of 8 mA. Pins have a maximum current capacity of 4 mA. Pins are 5V tolerant. Pins have an internal weak pull-up to VDD. Pins have a maximum current capacity of 12 mA. DS39662B-page 4 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 2.0 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS 2.1 Oscillator 2.2 The ENC28J60 is designed to operate at 25 MHz with a crystal connected to the OSC1 and OSC2 pins. The ENC28J60 design requires the use of a parallel cut crystal. Use of a series cut crystal may give a frequency out of the crystal manufacturer specifications. A typical oscillator circuit is shown in Figure 2-1. The ENC28J60 may also be driven by an external clock source connected to the OSC1 pin as shown in Figure 2-2. FIGURE 2-1: CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR OPERATION The ENC28J60 contains an Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) to ensure that the oscillator and integrated PHY have stabilized before use. The OST does not expire until 7500 OSC1 clock cycles (300 μs) pass after Power-on Reset or wake-up from Power-Down mode occurs. During the delay, all Ethernet registers and buffer memory may still be read and written to through the SPI bus. However, software should not attempt to transmit any packets (set ECON1.TXRTS), enable reception of packets (set ECON1.RXEN) or access any MAC, MII or PHY registers during this period. When the OST expires, the CLKRDY bit in the ESTAT register will be set. The application software should poll this bit as necessary to determine when normal device operation can begin. Note: ENC28J60 OSC1 C1 Oscillator Start-up Timer To Internal Logic XTAL After a Power-on Reset, or the ENC28J60 is removed from Power-Down mode, the CLKRDY bit must be polled before transmitting packets, enabling packet reception or accessing any MAC, MII or PHY registers. RF(2) RS(1) OSC2 C2 Note 1: A series resistor, RS, may be required for AT strip cut crystals. 2: The feedback resistor, RF , is typically in the range of 2 to 10 MΩ. FIGURE 2-2: EXTERNAL CLOCK SOURCE(1) ENC28J60 3.3V Clock from External System Open(2) Note 1: 2: OSC1 OSC2 Duty cycle restrictions must be observed. A resistor to ground may be used to reduce system noise. This may increase system current. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 5
ENC28J60 2.3 CLKOUT Pin The clock out pin is provided to the system designer for use as the host controller clock or as a clock source for other devices in the system. The CLKOUT has an internal prescaler which can divide the output by 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8. The CLKOUT function is enabled and the prescaler is selected via the ECOCON register (Register 2-1). To create a clean clock signal, the CLKOUT pin is held low for a period when power is first applied. After the Power-on Reset ends, the OST will begin counting. When the OST expires, the CLKOUT pin will begin outputting its default frequency of 6.25 MHz (main clock divided by 4). At any future time that the ENC28J60 is reset by software or the RESET pin, the CLKOUT function will not be altered (ECOCON will not change FIGURE 2-3: value). Additionally, Power-Down mode may be entered and the CLKOUT function will continue to operate. When Power-Down mode is cancelled, the OST will be reset but the CLKOUT function will continue. When the CLKOUT function is disabled (ECOCON = 0), the CLKOUT pin is driven low. The CLKOUT function is designed to ensure that minimum timings are preserved when the CLKOUT pin function is enabled, disabled or the prescaler value is changed. No high or low pulses will be outputted which exceed the frequency specified by the ECOCON configuration. However, when switching frequencies, a delay between two and eight OSC1 clock periods will occur where no clock pulses will be produced (see Figure 2-3). During this period, CLKOUT will be held low. CLKOUT TRANSITION ECOCON Changed REGISTER 2-1: 80 ns to 320 ns Delay ECOCON: CLOCK OUTPUT CONTROL REGISTER U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — — — COCON2 COCON1 COCON0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2-0 COCON2:COCON0: Clock Output Configuration bits 11x = Reserved for factory test. Do not use. Glitch prevention not assured. 101 = CLKOUT outputs main clock divided by 8 (3.125 MHz) 100 = CLKOUT outputs main clock divided by 4 (6.25 MHz) 011 = CLKOUT outputs main clock divided by 3 (8.333333 MHz) 010 = CLKOUT outputs main clock divided by 2 (12.5 MHz) 001 = CLKOUT outputs main clock divided by 1 (25 MHz) 000 = CLKOUT is disabled. The pin is driven low. DS39662B-page 6 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 2.4 Magnetics, Termination and Other External Components To complete the Ethernet interface, the ENC28J60 requires several standard components to be installed externally. These components should be connected as shown in Figure 2-4. The internal analog circuitry in the PHY module requires that an external 2.32 kΩ, 1% resistor be attached from RBIAS to ground. The resistor influences the TPOUT+/signal amplitude. The resistor should be placed as close as possible to the chip with no immediately adjacent signal traces to prevent noise capacitively coupling into the pin and affecting the transmit behavior. It is recommended that the resistor be a surface mount type. Some of the device’s digital logic operates at a nominal 2.5V. An on-chip voltage regulator is incorporated to generate this voltage. The only external component required is an external filter capacitor, connected from VCAP to ground. The capacitor must have low equivalent-series resistance (ESR), with a typical value of 10 μF, and a minimum value of 1 μF. The internal regulator is not designed to drive external loads. On the TPIN+/TPIN- and TPOUT+/TPOUT- pins, 1:1 center-taped pulse transformers rated for Ethernet operations are required. When the Ethernet module is enabled, current is continually sunk through both TPOUT pins. When the PHY is actively transmitting, a differential voltage is created on the Ethernet cable by varying the relative current sunk by TPOUT+ compared to TPOUT-. FIGURE 2-4: A common-mode choke on the TPOUT interface, placed between the TPOUT pins and the Ethernet transformer (not shown), is not recommend. If a common-mode choke is used to reduce EMI emissions, it should be placed between the Ethernet transformer and pins 1 and 2 of the RJ-45 connector. Many Ethernet transformer modules include common-mode chokes inside the same device package. The transformers should have at least the isolation rating specified in Table 16-5 to protect against static voltages and meet IEEE 802.3 isolation requirements (see Section 16.0 “Electrical Characteristics” for specific transformer requirements). Both transmit and receive interfaces additionally require two resistors and a capacitor to properly terminate the transmission line, minimizing signal reflections. All power supply pins must be externally connected to the same power source. Similarly, all ground references must be externally connected to the same ground node. Each VDD and VSS pin pair should have a 0.1 μF ceramic bypass capacitor (not shown in the schematic) placed as close to the pins as possible. Since relatively high currents are necessary to operate the twisted-pair interface, all wires should be kept as short as possible. Reasonable wire widths should be used on power wires to reduce resistive loss. If the differential data lines cannot be kept short, they should be routed in such a way as to have a 100Ω characteristic impedance. ENC28J60 ETHERNET TERMINATION AND EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS 3.3V ENC28J60 MCU TPOUT+ I/O SCK SDO SDI 49.9Ω, 1% 0.1 μF(3) 2 TPOUT- 3 1:1 CT TPIN+ Level Shift Logic(2) 4 49.9Ω, 1% 5 49.9Ω, 1% INT0 1 Ferrite Bead(1,3) 49.9Ω, 1% CS SCK SI SO RJ-45 1 INT 0.1 μF 1:1 CT TPIN- 6 RBIAS VCAP LEDA 7 LEDB 8 2.32 kΩ, 1% 10 μF 75Ω(3) 75Ω(3) 75Ω(3) 75Ω(3) 1 nF, 2 kV(3) Note 1: Ferrite Bead should be rated for at least 80 mA. 2: Required only if the microcontroller is operating at 5V. See Section 2.5 “I/O Levels” for more information. 3: These components are installed for EMI reduction purposes. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 7
ENC28J60 2.5 I/O Levels 2.6 The ENC28J60 is a 3.3V part; however, it was designed to be easily integrated into 5V systems. The SPI CS, SCK and SI inputs, as well as the RESET pin, are all 5V tolerant. On the other hand, if the host controller is operated at 5V, it quite likely will not be within specifications when its SPI and interrupt inputs are driven by the 3.3V CMOS outputs on the ENC28J60. A unidirectional level translator would be necessary. An economical 74HCT08 (quad AND gate), 74ACT125 (quad 3-state buffer) or many other 5V CMOS chips with TTL level input buffers may be used to provide the necessary level shifting. The use of 3-state buffers permits easy integration into systems which share the SPI bus with other devices. Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6 show example translation schemes. FIGURE 2-5: MCU LEVEL SHIFTING USING AND GATES ENC28J60 I/O SCK LED Configuration The LEDA and LEDB pins support automatic polarity detection on Reset. The LEDs can be connected such that the pin must source current to turn the LED on, or alternately connected such that the pin must sink current to turn the LED on. Upon system Reset, the ENC28J60 will detect how the LED is connected and begin driving the LED to the default state configured by the PHLCON register. If the LED polarity is changed while the ENC28J60 is operating, the new polarity will not be detected until the next system Reset occurs. LEDB is unique in that the connection of the LED is automatically read on Reset and determines how to initialize the PHCON1.PDPXMD bit. If the pin sources current to illuminate the LED, the bit is cleared on Reset and the PHY defaults to half-duplex operation. If the pin sinks current to illuminate the LED, the bit is set on Reset and the PHY defaults to full-duplex operation. Figure 2-7 shows the two available options. If no LED is attached to the LEDB pin, the PDPXMD bit will reset to an indeterminate value. FIGURE 2-7: LEDB POLARITY AND RESET CONFIGURATION OPTIONS CS SCK SO SI SI SO OSC1 INT0 Full-Duplex Operation: PDPXMD = 1 CLKOUT +3.3V LEDB INT Half-Duplex Operation: PDPXMD = 0 FIGURE 2-6: LEVEL SHIFTING USING 3-STATE BUFFERS LEDB ENC28J60 MCU I/O SCK CS SCK SO SI SI SO OSC1 INT0 CLKOUT INT The LEDs can also be configured separately to control their operating polarity (on or off when active), blink rate and blink stretch interval. The options are controlled by the LACFG3:LACFG0 and LBCFG3:LBCFG0 bits. Typical values for blink stretch are listed in Table 2-1. TABLE 2-1: LED BLINK STRETCH LENGTH Stretch Length Typical Stretch (ms) TNSTRCH (normal) 70 TLSTRCH (long) DS39662B-page 8 40 TMSTRCH (medium) 140 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 REGISTER 2-2: PHLCON: PHY MODULE LED CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 r r r r LACFG3 LACFG2 LACFG1 LACFG0 bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-x LBCFG3 LBCFG2 LBCFG1 LBCFG0 LFRQ1 LFRQ0 STRCH r bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15-14 Reserved: Write as ‘0’ bit 13-12 Reserved: Write as ‘1’ bit 11-8 LACFG3:LACFG0: LEDA Configuration bits 1111 = Reserved 1110 = Display duplex status and collision activity (always stretched) 1101 = Display link status and transmit/receive activity (always stretched) 1100 = Display link status and receive activity (always stretched) 1011 = Blink slow 1010 = Blink fast 1001 = Off 1000 = On 0111 = Display transmit and receive activity (stretchable) 0110 = Reserved 0101 = Display duplex status 0100 = Display link status 0011 = Display collision activity (stretchable) 0010 = Display receive activity (stretchable) 0001 = Display transmit activity (stretchable) 0000 = Reserved bit 7-4 LBCFG3:LBCFG0: LEDB Configuration bits 1110 = Display duplex status and collision activity (always stretched) 1101 = Display link status and transmit/receive activity (always stretched) 1100 = Display link status and receive activity (always stretched) 1011 = Blink slow 1010 = Blink fast 1001 = Off 1000 = On 0111 = Display transmit and receive activity (stretchable) 0110 = Reserved 0101 = Display duplex status 0100 = Display link status 0011 = Display collision activity (stretchable) 0010 = Display receive activity (stretchable) 0001 = Display transmit activity (stretchable) 0000 = Reserved bit 3-2 LFRQ1:LFRQ0: LED Pulse Stretch Time Configuration bits (see Table 2-1) 11 = Reserved 10 = Stretch LED events by TLSTRCH 01 = Stretch LED events by TMSTRCH 00 = Stretch LED events by TNSTRCH bit 1 STRCH: LED Pulse Stretching Enable bit 1 = Stretchable LED events will cause lengthened LED pulses based on LFRQ1:LFRQ0 configuration 0 = Stretchable LED events will only be displayed while they are occurring bit 0 Reserved: Write as ‘0’ © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 9
ENC28J60 NOTES: DS39662B-page 10 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 3.0 MEMORY ORGANIZATION All memory in the ENC28J60 is implemented as static RAM. There are three types of memory in the ENC28J60: • Control Registers • Ethernet Buffer • PHY Registers The Control registers’ memory contains the registers that are used for configuration, control and status retrieval of the ENC28J60. The Control registers are directly read and written to by the SPI interface. The Ethernet buffer contains transmit and receive memory used by the Ethernet controller in a single memory space. The sizes of the memory areas are programmable by the host controller using the SPI interface. The Ethernet buffer memory can only be accessed via the read buffer memory and write buffer memory SPI commands (see Section 4.2.2 “Read Buffer Memory Command” and Section 4.2.4 “Write Buffer Memory Command”). The PHY registers are used for configuration, control and status retrieval of the PHY module. The registers are not directly accessible through the SPI interface; they can only be accessed through Media Independent Interface Management (MIIM) implemented in the MAC. Figure 3-1 shows the data memory organization for the ENC28J60. FIGURE 3-1: ENC28J60 MEMORY ORGANIZATION ECON1<1:0> Control Registers Ethernet Buffer 00h 0000h Buffer Pointers in Bank 0 = 00 Bank 0 19h 1Ah 1Fh 00h Common Registers = 01 Bank 1 19h 1Ah 1Fh 00h Common Registers = 10 Bank 2 19h 1Ah 1Fh 00h Common Registers = 11 Bank 3 19h 1Ah 1Fh Note: 1FFFh PHY Registers Common Registers 00h 1Fh Memory areas are not shown to scale. The size of the control memory space has been scaled to show detail. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 11
ENC28J60 3.1 Control Registers Some of the available addresses are unimplemented. Any attempts to write to these locations are ignored while reads return ‘0’s. The register at address 1Ah in each bank is reserved; read and write operations should not be performed on this register. All other reserved registers may be read, but their contents must not be changed. When reading and writing to registers which contain reserved bits, any rules stated in the register definition should be observed. The Control Registers provide the main interface between the host controller and the on-chip Ethernet controller logic. Writing to these registers controls the operation of the interface, while reading the registers allows the host controller to monitor operations. The Control Register memory is partitioned into four banks, selectable by the bank select bits BSEL1:BSEL0 in the ECON1 register. Each bank is 32 bytes long and addressed by a 5-bit address value. Control registers for the ENC28J60 are generically grouped as ETH, MAC and MII registers. Register names starting with “E” belong to the ETH group. Similarly, registers names starting with “MA” belong to the MAC group and registers prefixed with “MI” belong to the MII group. The last five locations (1Bh to 1Fh) of all banks point to a common set of registers: EIE, EIR, ESTAT, ECON2 and ECON1. These are key registers used in controlling and monitoring the operation of the device. Their common mapping allows easy access without switching the bank. The ECON1 and ECON2 registers are discussed later in this section. TABLE 3-1: Bank 0 Address 00h ENC28J60 CONTROL REGISTER MAP Name Bank 1 Address Name Bank 2 Address Name Bank 3 Address 00h Name ERDPTL 00h EHT0 00h MACON1 MAADR5 01h ERDPTH 01h EHT1 01h Reserved 01h MAADR6 02h EWRPTL 02h EHT2 02h MACON3 02h MAADR3 03h EWRPTH 03h EHT3 03h MACON4 03h MAADR4 04h ETXSTL 04h EHT4 04h MABBIPG 04h MAADR1 MAADR2 05h ETXSTH 05h EHT5 05h — 05h 06h ETXNDL 06h EHT6 06h MAIPGL 06h EBSTSD 07h ETXNDH 07h EHT7 07h MAIPGH 07h EBSTCON 08h ERXSTL 08h EPMM0 08h MACLCON1 08h EBSTCSL 09h ERXSTH 09h EPMM1 09h MACLCON2 09h EBSTCSH 0Ah ERXNDL 0Ah EPMM2 0Ah MAMXFLL 0Ah MISTAT 0Bh ERXNDH 0Bh EPMM3 0Bh MAMXFLH 0Bh — 0Ch ERXRDPTL 0Ch EPMM4 0Ch Reserved 0Ch — 0Dh ERXRDPTH 0Dh EPMM5 0Dh Reserved 0Dh — 0Eh ERXWRPTL 0Eh EPMM6 0Eh Reserved 0Eh — 0Fh ERXWRPTH 0Fh EPMM7 0Fh — 0Fh — 10h EDMASTL 10h EPMCSL 10h Reserved 10h — 11h EDMASTH 11h EPMCSH 11h Reserved 11h — 12h EDMANDL 12h — 12h MICMD 12h EREVID 13h EDMANDH 13h — 13h — 13h — 14h EDMADSTL 14h EPMOL 14h MIREGADR 14h — 15h EDMADSTH 15h EPMOH 15h Reserved 15h ECOCON 16h EDMACSL 16h Reserved 16h MIWRL 16h Reserved 17h EDMACSH 17h Reserved 17h MIWRH 17h EFLOCON 18h — 18h ERXFCON 18h MIRDL 18h EPAUSL 19h — 19h EPKTCNT 19h MIRDH 19h EPAUSH 1Ah Reserved 1Ah Reserved 1Ah Reserved 1Ah Reserved 1Bh EIE 1Bh EIE 1Bh EIE 1Bh EIE 1Ch EIR 1Ch EIR 1Ch EIR 1Ch EIR 1Dh ESTAT 1Dh ESTAT 1Dh ESTAT 1Dh ESTAT 1Eh ECON2 1Eh ECON2 1Eh ECON2 1Eh ECON2 1Fh ECON1 1Fh ECON1 1Fh ECON1 1Fh ECON1 DS39662B-page 12 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 TABLE 3-2: ENC28J60 CONTROL REGISTER SUMMARY Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on Reset Details on Page TXIE r TXERIE RXERIE 0000 0000 65 TXIF r TXERIF RXERIF -000 0000 66 — RXBUSY TXABRT CLKRDY(1) 0000 -000 64 Register Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 EIE INTIE PKTIE DMAIE LINKIE EIR — PKTIF DMAIF LINKIF ESTAT INT BUFER r LATECOL ECON2 AUTOINC PKTDEC PWRSV r VRPS — — — 1000 0--- 16 ECON1 TXRST RXRST DMAST CSUMEN TXRTS RXEN BSEL1 BSEL0 0000 0000 15 1111 1010 17 ERDPTL ERDPTH EWRPTL EWRPTH ETXSTL ETXSTH ETXNDL ETXNDH ERXSTL ERXSTH ERXNDL ERXNDH ERXRDPTL ERXRDPTH ERXWRPTL ERXWRPTH EDMASTL EDMASTH EDMANDL EDMANDH EDMADSTL EDMADSTH EDMACSL Read Pointer Low Byte ERDPT<7:0>) — — — Read Pointer High Byte (ERDPT<12:8>) — — — Write Pointer High Byte (EWRPT<12:8>) — — TX Start High Byte (ETXST<12:8>) — — TX End High Byte (ETXND<12:8>) — — RX Start High Byte (ERXST<12:8>) — — RX End High Byte (ERXND<12:8>) — — RX RD Pointer High Byte (ERXRDPT<12:8>) — — RX WR Pointer High Byte (ERXWRPT<12:8>) — — DMA Start High Byte (EDMAST<12:8>) — — DMA End High Byte (EDMAND<12:8>) — — 17 17 ---1 1111 17 17 ---0 0101 17 17 ---0 0000 17 71 ---0 0000 71 71 DMA Destination High Byte (EDMADST<12:8>) ---0 0000 71 0000 0000 DMA Destination Low Byte (EDMADST<7:0>) — ---0 0101 0000 0000 DMA End Low Byte (EDMAND<7:0>) — 17 17 0000 0000 DMA Start Low Byte (EDMAST<7:0>) — ---0 0000 0000 0000 RX WR Pointer Low Byte (ERXWRPT<7:0>) — 17 17 1111 1010 RX RD Pointer Low Byte (ERXRDPT<7:0>) — ---0 0000 1111 1111 RX End Low Byte (ERXND<7:0>) — 17 17 1111 1010 RX Start Low Byte (ERXST<7:0>) — ---0 0000 0000 0000 TX End Low Byte (ETXND<7:0>) — 17 0000 0000 TX Start Low Byte (ETXST<7:0>) — 17 0000 0000 Write Pointer Low Byte (EWRPT<7:0>) ---0 0101 71 ---0 0000 71 0000 0000 DMA Checksum Low Byte (EDMACS<7:0>) 72 EDMACSH DMA Checksum High Byte (EDMACS<15:8>) 0000 0000 72 EHT0 Hash Table Byte 0 (EHT<7:0>) 0000 0000 52 EHT1 Hash Table Byte 1 (EHT<15:8>) 0000 0000 52 EHT2 Hash Table Byte 2 (EHT<23:16>) 0000 0000 52 EHT3 Hash Table Byte 3 (EHT<31:24>) 0000 0000 52 EHT4 Hash Table Byte 4 (EHT<39:32>) 0000 0000 52 EHT5 Hash Table Byte 5 (EHT<47:40>) 0000 0000 52 EHT6 Hash Table Byte 6 (EHT<55:48>) 0000 0000 52 EHT7 Hash Table Byte 7 (EHT<63:56>) 0000 0000 52 EPMM0 Pattern Match Mask Byte 0 (EPMM<7:0>) 0000 0000 51 EPMM1 Pattern Match Mask Byte 1 (EPMM<15:8>) 0000 0000 51 EPMM2 Pattern Match Mask Byte 2 (EPMM<23:16>) 0000 0000 51 EPMM3 Pattern Match Mask Byte 3 (EPMM<31:24>) 0000 0000 51 EPMM4 Pattern Match Mask Byte 4 (EPMM<39:32>) 0000 0000 51 EPMM5 Pattern Match Mask Byte 5 (EPMM<47:40>) 0000 0000 51 EPMM6 Pattern Match Mask Byte 6 (EPMM<55:48>) 0000 0000 51 Pattern Match Mask Byte 7 (EPMM<63:56>) 0000 0000 51 EPMM7 Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: x = unknown, u = unchanged, — = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition, r = reserved, do not modify. CLKRDY resets to ‘0’ on Power-on Reset but is unaffected on all other Resets. EREVID is a read-only register. ECOCON resets to ‘---- -100’ on Power-on Reset and ‘---- -uuu’ on all other Resets. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 13
ENC28J60 TABLE 3-2: ENC28J60 CONTROL REGISTER SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Register Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on Reset Details on Page EPMCSL Pattern Match Checksum Low Byte (EPMCS<7:0>) 0000 0000 51 EPMCSH Pattern Match Checksum High Byte (EPMCS<15:0>) 0000 0000 51 EPMOL Pattern Match Offset Low Byte (EPMO<7:0>) EPMOH ERXFCON EPKTCNT — — — UCEN ANDOR CRCEN 0000 0000 PMEN MPEN HTEN MCEN BCEN 51 ---0 0000 Pattern Match Offset High Byte (EPMO<12:8>) 51 1010 0001 48 0000 0000 Ethernet Packet Count 43 MACON1 — — — r TXPAUS RXPAUS PASSALL MARXEN ---0 0000 34 MACON3 PADCFG2 PADCFG1 PADCFG0 TXCRCEN PHDREN HFRMEN FRMLNEN FULDPX 0000 0000 35 MACON4 — DEFER BPEN NOBKOFF — — r r -000 --00 36 MABBIPG — Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap (BBIPG<6:0>) -000 0000 36 MAIPGL — Non-Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap Low Byte (MAIPGL<6:0>) -000 0000 34 MAIPGH — Non-Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap High Byte (MAIPGH<6:0>) -000 0000 34 MACLCON1 — — ---- 1111 34 — — --11 0111 34 MACLCON2 — — Retransmission Maximum (RETMAX<3:0>) Collision Window (COLWIN<5:0>) MAMXFLL Maximum Frame Length Low Byte (MAMXFL<7:0>) 0000 0000 34 MAMXFLH Maximum Frame Length High Byte (MAMXFL<15:8>) 0000 0110 34 MICMD — — — MIREGADR — — — — — — MIISCAN MIIRD ---- --00 21 ---0 0000 MII Register Address (MIREGADR<4:0>) 19 MIWRL MII Write Data Low Byte (MIWR<7:0>) 0000 0000 19 MIWRH MII Write Data High Byte (MIWR<15:8>) 0000 0000 19 MIRDL MII Read Data Low Byte (MIRD<7:0>) 0000 0000 19 MIRDH MII Read Data High Byte(MIRD<15:8>) 0000 0000 19 MAADR5 MAC Address Byte 5 (MAADR<15:8>) 0000 0000 34 MAADR6 MAC Address Byte 6 (MAADR<7:0>) 0000 0000 34 34 MAADR3 MAC Address Byte 3 (MAADR<31:24>), OUI Byte 3 0000 0000 MAADR4 MAC Address Byte 4 (MAADR<23:16>) 0000 0000 34 MAADR1 MAC Address Byte 1 (MAADR<47:40>), OUI Byte 1 0000 0000 34 MAADR2 MAC Address Byte 2 (MAADR<39:32>), OUI Byte 2 0000 0000 34 EBSTSD Built-in Self-Test Fill Seed (EBSTSD<7:0>) 0000 0000 76 EBSTCON PSV2 PSV1 PSV0 PSEL EBSTCSL EBSTCSH TMSEL1 TMSEL0 TME BISTST Built-in Self-Test Checksum High Byte (EBSTCS<15:8>) 75 76 0000 0000 MISTAT — — — EREVID(2) — — — ECOCON(3) — — — — — EFLOCON — — — — — — 0000 0000 0000 0000 Built-in Self-Test Checksum Low Byte (EBSTCS<7:0>) r 76 SCAN BUSY ---- 0000 21 ---q qqqq 22 COCON2 COCON1 COCON0 ---- -100 6 FULDPXS FCEN1 FCEN0 ---- -000 56 NVALID Ethernet Revision ID (EREVID<4:0>) EPAUSL Pause Timer Value Low Byte (EPAUS<7:0>) 0000 0000 57 EPAUSH Pause Timer Value High Byte (EPAUS<15:8>) 0001 0000 57 Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: x = unknown, u = unchanged, — = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition, r = reserved, do not modify. CLKRDY resets to ‘0’ on Power-on Reset but is unaffected on all other Resets. EREVID is a read-only register. ECOCON resets to ‘---- -100’ on Power-on Reset and ‘---- -uuu’ on all other Resets. DS39662B-page 14 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 3.1.1 ECON1 REGISTER The ECON1 register, shown in Register 3-1, is used to control the main functions of the ENC28J60. Receive enable, transmit request, DMA control and bank select bits can all be found in ECON1. REGISTER 3-1: ECON1: ETHERNET CONTROL REGISTER 1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TXRST RXRST DMAST CSUMEN TXRTS RXEN BSEL1 BSEL0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 TXRST: Transmit Logic Reset bit 1 = Transmit logic is held in Reset 0 = Normal operation bit 6 RXRST: Receive Logic Reset bit 1 = Receive logic is held in Reset 0 = Normal operations bit 5 DMAST: DMA Start and Busy Status bit 1 = DMA copy or checksum operation is in progress 0 = DMA hardware is Idle bit 4 CSUMEN: DMA Checksum Enable bit 1 = DMA hardware calculates checksums 0 = DMA hardware copies buffer memory bit 3 TXRTS: Transmit Request to Send bit 1 = The transmit logic is attempting to transmit a packet 0 = The transmit logic is Idle bit 2 RXEN: Receive Enable bit 1 = Packets which pass the current filter configuration will be written into the receive buffer 0 = All packets received will be ignored bit 1-0 BSEL1:BSEL0: Bank Select bits 11 = SPI accesses registers in Bank 3 10 = SPI accesses registers in Bank 2 01 = SPI accesses registers in Bank 1 00 = SPI accesses registers in Bank 0 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 15
ENC28J60 3.1.2 ECON2 REGISTER The ECON2 register, shown in Register 3-2, is used to control other main functions of the ENC28J60. REGISTER 3-2: ECON2: ETHERNET CONTROL REGISTER 2 R/W-0(1) R/W-1 AUTOINC PKTDEC R/W-0 PWRSV R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 VRPS r U-0 — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 AUTOINC: Automatic Buffer Pointer Increment Enable bit 1 = Automatically increment ERDPT or EWRPT on reading from or writing to EDATA 0 = Do not automatically change ERDPT and EWRPT after the buffer is accessed bit 6 PKTDEC: Packet Decrement bit 1 = Decrement the EPKTCNT register by one 0 = Leave EPKTCNT unchanged bit 5 PWRSV: Power Save Enable bit 1 = MAC, PHY and control logic are in Low-Power Sleep mode 0 = Normal operation bit 4 Reserved: Maintain as ‘0’ bit 3 VRPS: Voltage Regulator Power Save Enable bit When PWRSV = 1: 1 = Internal voltage regulator is in Low-Current mode 0 = Internal voltage regulator is in Normal Current mode When PWRSV = 0: The bit is ignored; the regulator always outputs as much current as the device requires. bit 2-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ Note 1: This bit is automatically cleared once it is set. DS39662B-page 16 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 3.2 3.2.2 Ethernet Buffer The Ethernet buffer contains transmit and receive memory used by the Ethernet controller. The entire buffer is 8 Kbytes, divided into separate receive and transmit buffer spaces. The sizes and locations of transmit and receive memory are fully programmable by the host controller using the SPI interface. The relationship of the buffer spaces is shown in Figure 3-2. 3.2.1 RECEIVE BUFFER The receive buffer constitutes a circular FIFO buffer managed by hardware. The register pairs ERXSTH:ERXSTL and ERXNDH:ERXNDL serve as Pointers to define the buffer’s size and location within the memory. The byte pointed to by ERXST and the byte pointed to by ERXND are both included in the FIFO buffer. As bytes of data are received from the Ethernet interface, they are written into the receive buffer sequentially. However, after the memory pointed to by ERXND is written to, the hardware will automatically write the next byte of received data to the memory pointed to by ERXST. As a result, the receive hardware will never write outside the boundaries of the FIFO. The host controller may program the ERXST and ERXND Pointers when the receive logic is not enabled. The Pointers must not be modified while the receive logic is enabled (ECON1.RXEN is set). If desired, the Pointers may span the 1FFFh to 0000h memory boundary; the hardware will still operate as a FIFO. The ERXWRPTH:ERXWRPTL registers define a location within the FIFO where the hardware will write bytes that it receives. The Pointer is read-only and is automatically updated by the hardware whenever a new packet is successfully received. The Pointer is useful for determining how much free space is available within the FIFO. The ERXRDPT registers define a location within the FIFO where the receive hardware is forbidden to write to. In normal operation, the receive hardware will write data up to, but not including, the memory pointed to by ERXRDPT. If the FIFO fills up with data and new data continues to arrive, the hardware will not overwrite the previously received data. Instead, the new data will be thrown away and the old data will be preserved. In order to continuously receive new data, the host controller must periodically advance this Pointer whenever it finishes processing some, or all, of the old received data. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. TRANSMIT BUFFER Any space within the 8-Kbyte memory, which is not programmed as part of the receive FIFO buffer, is considered to be the transmit buffer. The responsibility of managing where packets are located in the transmit buffer belongs to the host controller. Whenever the host controller decides to transmit a packet, the ETXST and ETXND Pointers are programmed with addresses specifying where, within the transmit buffer, the particular packet to transmit is located. The hardware does not check that the start and end addresses do not overlap with the receive buffer. To prevent buffer corruption, the host controller must make sure to not transmit a packet while the ETXST and ETXND Pointers are overlapping the receive buffer, or while the ETXND Pointer is too close to the receive buffer. See Section 7.1 “Transmitting Packets” for more information. 3.2.3 READING AND WRITING TO THE BUFFER The Ethernet buffer contents are accessed from the host controller though separate Read and Write Pointers (ERDPT and EWRPT) combined with the read buffer memory and write buffer memory SPI commands. While sequentially reading from the receive buffer, a wrapping condition will occur at the end of the receive buffer. While sequentially writing to the buffer, no wrapping conditions will occur. See Section 4.2.2 “Read Buffer Memory Command” and Section 4.2.4 “Write Buffer Memory Command” for more information. 3.2.4 DMA ACCESS TO THE BUFFER The integrated DMA controller must read from the buffer when calculating a checksum and it must read and write to the buffer when copying memory. The DMA follows the same wrapping rules that SPI accesses do. While it sequentially reads, it will be subject to a wrapping condition at the end of the receive buffer. All writes it does will not be subject to any wrapping conditions. See Section 13.0 “Direct Memory Access Controller” for more information. Preliminary DS39662B-page 17
ENC28J60 FIGURE 3-2: ETHERNET BUFFER ORGANIZATION Transmit Buffer Start (ETXSTH:ETXSTL) 0000h Buffer Write Pointer (EWRPTH:EWRPTL) Transmit Buffer Data AAh (WBM AAh) Transmit Transmit Buffer End (ETXNDH:ETXNDL) Buffer Receive Buffer Start (ERXSTH:ERXSTL) Receive Buffer (Circular FIFO) Buffer Read Pointer (ERDPTH:ERDPTL) Receive Buffer Data (RBM 55h) 55h Receive Buffer End 1FFFh (ERXNDH:ERXNDL) DS39662B-page 18 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 3.3 PHY Registers To write to a PHY register: The PHY registers provide configuration and control of the PHY module, as well as status information about its operation. All PHY registers are 16 bits in width. There are a total of 32 PHY addresses; however, only 9 locations are implemented. Writes to unimplemented locations are ignored and any attempts to read these locations will return ‘0’. All reserved locations should be written as ‘0’; their contents should be ignored when read. 1. Unlike the ETH, MAC and MII control registers, or the buffer memory, the PHY registers are not directly accessible through the SPI control interface. Instead, access is accomplished through a special set of MAC control registers that implement Media Independent Interface Management (MIIM). These control registers are referred to as the MII registers. The registers that control access to the PHY registers are shown in Register 3-3 and Register 3-4. The PHY register will be written after the MIIM operation completes, which takes 10.24 μs. When the write operation has completed, the BUSY bit will clear itself. The host controller should not start any MIISCAN or MIIRD operations while busy. 3.3.1 READING PHY REGISTERS When a PHY register is read, the entire 16 bits are obtained. 2. 3. 3.3.3 2. 3. 4. 5. Write the address of the PHY register to read from into the MIREGADR register. Set the MICMD.MIIRD bit. The read operation begins and the MISTAT.BUSY bit is set. Wait 10.24 μs. Poll the MISTAT.BUSY bit to be certain that the operation is complete. While busy, the host controller should not start any MIISCAN operations or write to the MIWRH register. When the MAC has obtained the register contents, the BUSY bit will clear itself. Clear the MICMD.MIIRD bit. Read the desired data from the MIRDL and MIRDH registers. The order that these bytes are accessed is unimportant. 3.3.2 WRITING PHY REGISTERS When a PHY register is written to, the entire 16 bits is written at once; selective bit writes are not implemented. If it is necessary to reprogram only select bits in the register, the controller must first read the PHY register, modify the resulting data and then write the data back to the PHY register. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. SCANNING A PHY REGISTER The MAC can be configured to perform automatic back-to-back read operations on a PHY register. This can significantly reduce the host controller complexity when periodic status information updates are desired. To perform the scan operation: 1. To read from a PHY register: 1. Write the address of the PHY register to write to into the MIREGADR register. Write the lower 8 bits of data to write into the MIWRL register. Write the upper 8 bits of data to write into the MIWRH register. Writing to this register automatically begins the MIIM transaction, so it must be written to after MIWRL. The MISTAT.BUSY bit becomes set. 2. Write the address of the PHY register to read from into the MIREGADR register. Set the MICMD.MIISCAN bit. The scan operation begins and the MISTAT.BUSY bit is set. The first read operation will complete after 10.24 μs. Subsequent reads will be done at the same interval until the operation is cancelled. The MISTAT.NVALID bit may be polled to determine when the first read operation is complete. After setting the MIISCAN bit, the MIRDL and MIRDH registers will automatically be updated every 10.24 μs. There is no status information which can be used to determine when the MIRD registers are updated. Since the host controller can only read one MII register at a time through the SPI, it must not be assumed that the values of MIRDL and MIRDH were read from the PHY at exactly the same time. When the MIISCAN operation is in progress, the host controller must not attempt to write to MIWRH or start an MIIRD operation. The MIISCAN operation can be cancelled by clearing the MICMD.MIISCAN bit and then polling the MISTAT.BUSY bit. New operations may be started after the BUSY bit is cleared. Preliminary DS39662B-page 19
DS39662B-page 20 PHID2 PHCON2 PHSTAT2 PHIE PHIR PHLCON 03h 10h 11h 12h 13h 14h Bit 14 — PLOOPBK PFDPX — — — Bit 12 Bit 13 FRCLNK r r r r r — r — — r r r TXSTAT TXDIS Bit 11 r PHDPX PPWRSV r r r r r LSTAT JABBER — r Bit 10 LACFG3:LACFG0 r r RXSTAT COLSTAT r PHY Identifier (OUI19:OUI24) = 000101 PHY Identifier (OUI3:OUI18) = 0083h — PRST Bit 15 ENC28J60 PHY REGISTER SUMMARY Bit 7 — HDLDIS r r r DPXSTAT(1) r — r r r — r — — Bit 6 LBCFG3:LBCFG0 r r — r — r Bit 8 PDPXMD(1) PHY P/N (PPN5:PPN0) = 00h — — Bit 9 r r PLRITY r — — Bit 5 PLNKIF PLNKIE — r — — Bit 4 — Bit 1 LLSTAT JBSTAT — Bit 2 — — Bit 0 PGIF r — r LFRQ1:LFRQ0 r r — r STRCH r PGEIE — r r r r — r PHY Revision (PREV3:PREV0) = 00h — — Bit 3 x = unknown, u = unchanged, — = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition, r = reserved, do not modify. Reset values of the Duplex mode/status bits depend on the connection of the LED to the LEDB pin (see Section 2.6 “LED Configuration” for additional details). PHID1 02h Legend: Note 1: PHSTAT1 01h Name PHCON1 00h Addr TABLE 3-3: Reset Values 0011 0100 0010 001x xxxx xxxx xx00 00x0 0000 0000 0000 0000 --00 00q- --0- ---- -000 0000 0000 0000 0001 0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0011 ---1 1--- ---- -00- 00-- 00-q 0--- ---- ENC28J60 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 REGISTER 3-3: MICMD: MII COMMAND REGISTER U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — — — — MIISCAN MIIRD bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1 MIISCAN: MII Scan Enable bit 1 = PHY register at MIREGADR is continuously read and the data is placed in MIRD 0 = No MII Management scan operation is in progress bit 0 MIIRD: MII Read Enable bit 1 = PHY register at MIREGADR is read once and the data is placed in MIRD 0 = No MII Management read operation is in progress REGISTER 3-4: MISTAT: MII STATUS REGISTER U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 — — — — r NVALID SCAN BUSY bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3 Reserved: Maintain as ‘0’ bit 2 NVALID: MII Management Read Data Not Valid bit 1 = The contents of MIRD are not valid yet 0 = The MII Management read cycle has completed and MIRD has been updated bit 1 SCAN: MII Management Scan Operation bit 1 = MII Management scan operation is in progress 0 = No MII Management scan operation is in progress bit 0 BUSY: MII Management Busy bit 1 = A PHY register is currently being read or written to 0 = The MII Management interface is Idle © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 21
ENC28J60 3.3.4 PHSTAT REGISTERS 3.3.5 PHID1 AND PHID2 REGISTERS The PHSTAT1 and PHSTAT2 registers contain readonly bits that show the current status of the PHY module’s operations, particularly the conditions of the communications link to the rest of the network. The PHID1 and PHID2 registers are read-only registers. They hold constant data that help identify the Ethernet controller and may be useful for debugging purposes. This includes: The PHSTAT1 register (Register 3-5) contains the LLSTAT bit; it clears and latches low if the physical layer link has gone down since the last read of the register. Periodic polling by the host controller can be used to determine exactly when the link fails. It may be particularly useful if the link change interrupt is not used. • The part number of the PHY module (PPN5:PPN0) • The revision level of the PHY module (PREV3:PREV0); and • The PHY Identifier, as part of Microchip’s corporate Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI) (OUI3:OUI24) The PHSTAT1 register also contains a jabber status bit. An Ethernet controller is said to be “jabbering” if it continuously transmits data without stopping and allowing other nodes to share the medium. Generally, the jabber condition indicates that the local controller may be grossly violating the maximum packet size defined by the IEEE specification. This bit latches high to indicate that a jabber condition has occurred since the last read of the register. The PHY part number and revision are part of PHID2. The upper two bytes of the PHY identifier are located in PHID1, with the remainder in PHID2. The exact locations within registers are shown in Table 3-3. The PHSTAT2 register (Register 3-6) contains status bits which report if the PHY module is linked to the network and whether or not it is transmitting or receiving. DS39662B-page 22 The 22 bits of the OUI contained in the PHY Identifier (OUI3:OUI24, corresponding to PHID1<15:0> and PHID2<15:10>) are concatenated with ‘00’ as the first two digits (OUI1 and OUI2) to generate the entire OUI. For convenience, this 24-bit string is usually interpreted in hexadecimal; the resulting OUI for Microchip Technology is 0004A3h. Revision information is also stored in EREVID. This is a read-only control register which contains a 5-bit identifier for the specific silicon revision level of the device. Details of this register are shown in Table 3-2. Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 REGISTER 3-5: PHSTAT1: PHYSICAL LAYER STATUS REGISTER 1 U-0 U-0 U-0 R-1 R-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — PFDPX PHDPX — — — bit 15 bit 8 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/LL-0 R/LH-0 U-0 — — — — — LLSTAT JBSTAT — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: ‘1’ = Bit is set R = Read-only bit ‘0’ = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR R/L = Read-only latch bit LL = Bit latches low LH = Bit latches high bit 15-13 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 12 PFDPX: PHY Full-Duplex Capable bit 1 = PHY is capable of operating at 10 Mbps in Full-Duplex mode (this bit is always set) bit 11 PHDPX: PHY Half-Duplex Capable bit 1 = PHY is capable of operating at 10 Mbps in Half-Duplex mode (this bit is always set) bit 10-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2 LLSTAT: PHY Latching Link Status bit 1 = Link is up and has been up continously since PHSTAT1 was last read 0 = Link is down or was down for a period since PHSTAT1 was last read bit 1 JBSTAT: PHY Latching Jabber Status bit 1 = PHY has detected a transmission meeting the jabber criteria since PHSTAT1 was last read 0 = PHY has not detected any jabbering transmissions since PHSTAT1 was last read bit 0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 23
ENC28J60 REGISTER 3-6: PHSTAT2: PHYSICAL LAYER STATUS REGISTER 2 U-0 U-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-x U-0 — — TXSTAT RXSTAT COLSTAT LSTAT DPXSTAT(1) — bit 15 bit 8 U-0 U-0 R-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — PLRITY — — — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15-14 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 13 TXSTAT: PHY Transmit Status bit 1 = PHY is transmitting data 0 = PHY is not transmitting data bit 12 RXSTAT: PHY Receive Status bit 1 = PHY is receiving data 0 = PHY is not receiving data bit 11 COLSTAT: PHY Collision Status bit 1 = A collision is occuring 0 = A collision is not occuring bit 10 LSTAT: PHY Link Status bit (non-latching) 1 = Link is up 0 = Link is down bit 9 DPXSTAT: PHY Duplex Status bit(1) 1 = PHY is configured for full-duplex operation (PHCON1<8> is set) 0 = PHY is configured for half-duplex operation (PHCON1<8> is clear) bit 8-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5 PLRITY: Polarity Status bit 1 = The polarity of the signal on TPIN+/TPIN- is reversed 0 = The polarity of the signal on TPIN+/TPIN- is correct bit 4-0 x = Bit is unknown Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ Note 1: Reset values of the Duplex mode/status bit depends on the connection of the LED to the LEDB pin (see Section 2.6 “LED Configuration” for additional details). DS39662B-page 24 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 4.0 SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI) 4.1 Overview The ENC28J60 is designed to interface directly with the Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) port available on many microcontrollers. The implementation used on this device supports SPI mode 0,0 only. In addition, the SPI port requires that SCK be at Idle in a low state; selectable clock polarity is not supported. FIGURE 4-1: Commands and data are sent to the device via the SI pin, with data being clocked in on the rising edge of SCK. Data is driven out by the ENC28J60 on the SO line, on the falling edge of SCK. The CS pin must be held low while any operation is performed and returned high when finished. SPI INPUT TIMING CS SCK SI MSb In High-Impedance State SO FIGURE 4-2: LSb In SPI OUTPUT TIMING CS SCK SO MSb Out SI © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. LSb Out Don’t Care Preliminary DS39662B-page 25
ENC28J60 4.2 SPI Instruction Set followed by a 5-bit argument that specifies either a register address or a data constant. Write and bit field instructions are also followed by one or more bytes of data. The operation of the ENC28J60 depends entirely on commands given by an external host controller over the SPI interface. These commands take the form of instructions, of one or more bytes, which are used to access the control memory and Ethernet buffer spaces. At the least, instructions consist of a 3-bit opcode, TABLE 4-1: A total of seven instructions are implemented on the ENC28J60. Table 4-1 shows the command codes for all operations. SPI INSTRUCTION SET FOR THE ENC28J60 Instruction Name and Mnemonic Byte 0 Opcode Byte 1 and Following Argument Data Read Control Register (RCR) 0 0 0 a a a a a N/A Read Buffer Memory (RBM) 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 N/A Write Control Register (WCR) 0 1 0 a a a a a d d d d d d d d Write Buffer Memory (WBM) 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 d d d d d d d d Bit Field Set (BFS) 1 0 0 a a a a a d d d d d d d d Bit Field Clear (BFC) 1 0 1 a a a a a d d d d d d d d System Reset Command (Soft Reset) (SRC) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 N/A Legend: a = control register address, d = data payload. DS39662B-page 26 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 4.2.1 READ CONTROL REGISTER COMMAND registers in the current bank. If the 5-bit address is an ETH register, then data in the selected register will immediately start shifting out MSb first on the SO pin. Figure 4-3 shows the read sequence for these registers. The Read Control Register (RCR) command allows the host controller to read any of the ETH, MAC and MII registers in any order. The contents of the PHY registers are read via a special MII register interface (see Section 3.3.1 “Reading PHY Registers” for more information). If the address specifies one of the MAC or MII registers, a dummy byte will first be shifted out the SO pin. After the dummy byte, the data will be shifted out MSb first on the SO pin. The RCR operation is terminated by raising the CS pin. Figure 4-4 shows the read sequence for MAC and MII registers. The RCR command is started by pulling the CS pin low. The RCR opcode is then sent to the ENC28J60, followed by a 5-bit register address (A4 through A0). The 5-bit address identifies any of the 32 control FIGURE 4-3: READ CONTROL REGISTER COMMAND SEQUENCE (ETH REGISTERS) CS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 SCK Opcode SI 0 0 Address 4 0 3 2 1 0 Data Out High-Impedance State 7 SO FIGURE 4-4: 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 READ CONTROL REGISTER COMMAND SEQUENCE (MAC AND MII REGISTERS) CS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 SCK Opcode SI 0 0 0 Address 4 3 2 1 0 Dummy Byte High-Impedance State SO © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. 7 6 5 4 3 2 Preliminary Data Byte Out 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DS39662B-page 27
ENC28J60 4.2.2 READ BUFFER MEMORY COMMAND 4.2.3 The Read Buffer Memory (RBM) command allows the host controller to read bytes from the integrated 8-Kbyte transmit and receive buffer memory. The Write Control Register (WCR) command allows the host controller to write to any of the ETH, MAC and MII Control registers in any order. The PHY registers are written to via a special MII register interface (see Section 3.3.2 “Writing PHY Registers” for more information). If the AUTOINC bit in the ECON2 register is set, the ERDPT Pointer will automatically increment to point to the next address after the last bit of each byte is read. The next address will normally be the current address incremented by one. However, if the last byte in the receive buffer is read (ERDPT = ERXND), the ERDPT Pointer will change to the beginning of the receive buffer (ERXST). This allows the host controller to read packets from the receive buffer in a continuous stream without keeping track of when a wraparound is needed. If AUTOINC is set when address 1FFFh is read and ERXND does not point to this address, the Read Pointer will increment and wrap around to 0000h. The WCR command is started by pulling the CS pin low. The WCR opcode is then sent to the ENC28J60, followed by a 5-bit address (A4 through A0). The 5-bit address identifies any of the 32 control registers in the current bank. After the WCR command and address are sent, actual data that is to be written is sent, MSb first. The data will be written to the addressed register on the rising edge of the SCK line. The WCR operation is terminated by raising the CS pin. If the CS line is allowed to go high before eight bits are loaded, the write will be aborted for that data byte. Refer to the timing diagram in Figure 4-5 for a more detailed illustration of the byte write sequence. The RBM command is started by pulling the CS pin low. The RBM opcode is then sent to the ENC28J60, followed by the 5-bit constant 1Ah. After the RBM command and constant are sent, the data stored in the memory pointed to by ERDPT will be shifted out MSb first on the SO pin. If the host controller continues to provide clocks on the SCK pin, without raising CS, the byte pointed to by ERDPT will again be shifted out MSb first on the SO pin. In this manner, with AUTOINC enabled, it is possible to continuously read sequential bytes from the buffer memory without any extra SPI command overhead. The RBM command is terminated by raising the CS pin. FIGURE 4-5: WRITE CONTROL REGISTER COMMAND WRITE CONTROL REGISTER COMMAND SEQUENCE CS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 SCK Address Opcode SI 0 1 0 A4 3 2 Data Byte 1 0 D7 6 5 4 3 2 1 D0 High-Impedance State SO DS39662B-page 28 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 4.2.4 WRITE BUFFER MEMORY COMMAND any of the ETH registers in the current bank. After the BFS command and address are sent, the data byte containing the bit field set information should be sent, MSb first. The supplied data will be logically ORed to the content of the addressed register on the rising edge of the SCK line for the D0 bit. The Write Buffer Memory (WBM) command allows the host controller to write bytes to the integrated 8-Kbyte transmit and receive buffer memory. If the AUTOINC bit in the ECON2 register is set, after the last bit of each byte is written, the EWRPT Pointer will automatically be incremented to point to the next sequential address (current address + 1). If address 1FFFh is written with AUTOINC set, the Write Pointer will increment to 0000h. If the CS line is brought high before eight bits are loaded, the operation will be aborted for that data byte. The BFS operation is terminated by raising the CS pin. 4.2.6 The WBM command is started by lowering the CS pin. The WBM opcode should then be sent to the ENC28J60, followed by the 5-bit constant 1Ah. After the WBM command and constant are sent, the data to be stored in the memory pointed to by EWRPT should be shifted out MSb first to the ENC28J60. After 8 data bits are received, the Write Pointer will automatically increment if AUTOINC is set. The host controller can continue to provide clocks on the SCK pin and send data on the SI pin, without raising CS, to keep writing to the memory. In this manner, with AUTOINC enabled, it is possible to continuously write sequential bytes to the buffer memory without any extra SPI command overhead. The BFC command is started by lowering the CS pin. The BFC opcode should then be sent, followed by a 5-bit address (A4 through A0). The 5-bit address identifies any of the ETH registers in the current bank. After the BFC command and address are sent, a data byte containing the bit field clear information should be sent, MSb first. The supplied data will be logically inverted and subsequently ANDed to the contents of the addressed register on the rising edge of the SCK line for the D0 bit. The WBM command is terminated by bringing up the CS pin. Refer to Figure 4-6 for a detailed illustration of the write sequence. 4.2.5 BIT FIELD CLEAR COMMAND The Bit Field Clear (BFC) command is used to clear up to 8 bits in any of the ETH Control registers. Note that this command cannot be used on the MAC registers, MII registers, PHY registers or buffer memory. The BFC command uses the provided data byte to perform a bitwise NOTAND operation on the addressed register contents. As an example, if a register had the contents of F1h and the BFC command was executed with an operand of 17h, then the register would be changed to have the contents of E0h. BIT FIELD SET COMMAND The Bit Field Set (BFS) command is used to set up to 8 bits in any of the ETH Control registers. Note that this command cannot be used on the MAC registers, MII registers, PHY registers or buffer memory. The BFS command uses the provided data byte to perform a bit-wise OR operation on the addressed register contents. The BFC operation is terminated by bringing the CS pin high. If CS is brought high before eight bits are loaded, the operation will be aborted for that data byte. The BFS command is started by pulling the CS pin low. The BFS opcode is then sent, followed by a 5-bit address (A4 through A0). The 5-bit address identifies FIGURE 4-6: WRITE BUFFER MEMORY COMMAND SEQUENCE CS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 SCK Opcode SI 0 1 1 Address 1 1 SO © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. 0 1 Data Byte 0 0 7 6 5 4 3 Data Byte 1 2 1 D0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 High-Impedance State Preliminary DS39662B-page 29
ENC28J60 4.2.7 SYSTEM RESET COMMAND The command is started by pulling the CS pin low. The SRC opcode is the sent, followed by a 5-bit Soft Reset command constant of 1Fh. The SRC operation is terminated by raising the CS pin. The System Reset Command (SRC) allows the host controller to issue a System Soft Reset command. Unlike other SPI commands, the SRC is only a singlebyte command and does not operate on any register. FIGURE 4-7: Figure 4-7 shows a detailed illustration of the System Reset Command sequence. For more information on SRC’s Soft Reset, refer to Section 11.2 “System Reset”. SYSTEM RESET COMMAND SEQUENCE CS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SCK Opcode SI SO DS39662B-page 30 1 1 Data Constant (1Fh) 1 1 1 1 1 1 High-Impedance State Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 5.0 ETHERNET OVERVIEW 5.1.1 Before discussing the use of the ENC28J60 as an Ethernet interface, it may be helpful to review the structure of a typical data frame. Users requiring more information should refer to IEEE Standard 802.3 which is the basis for the Ethernet protocol. 5.1 Packet Format Normal IEEE 802.3 compliant Ethernet frames are between 64 and 1518 bytes long. They are made up of five or six different fields: a destination MAC address, a source MAC address, a type/length field, data payload, an optional padding field and a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC). Additionally, when transmitted on the Ethernet medium, a 7-byte preamble field and start-offrame delimiter byte are appended to the beginning of the Ethernet packet. Thus, traffic seen on the twisted pair cabling will appear as shown in Figure 5-1. FIGURE 5-1: PREAMBLE/START-OF-FRAME DELIMITER When transmitting and receiving data with the ENC28J60, the preamble and start of frame delimiter bytes will automatically be generated or stripped from the packets when they are transmitted or received. The host controller does not need to concern itself with them. Normally, the host controller will also not need to concern itself with padding and the CRC which the ENC28J60 will also be able to automatically generate when transmitting and verify when receiving. The padding and CRC fields will, however, be written into the receive buffer when packets arrive, so they may be evaluated by the host controller if needed. ETHERNET PACKET FORMAT Number of Bytes Field Comments 7 Preamble Filtered out by the Module 1 SFD Start-of-Frame Delimiter (filtered out by the module) 6 DA Destination Address, such as Multicast, Broadcast or Unicast 6 SA Source Address 2 Type/Length Type of Packet or the Length of the Packet Used in the Calculation of the FCS Data Packet Payload (with optional padding) 46-1500 Padding 4 Note 1: FCS(1) Frame Check Sequence – CRC The FCS is transmitted starting with bit 31 and ending with bit 0. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 31
ENC28J60 5.1.2 DESTINATION ADDRESS 5.1.5 The destination address field is a 6-byte field filled with the MAC address of the device that the packet is directed to. If the Least Significant bit in the first byte of the MAC address is set, the address is a multicast destination. For example, 01-00-00-00-F0-00 and 33-45-67-89-AB-CD are multicast addresses, while 00-00-00-00-F0-00 and 32-45-67-89-AB-CD are not. Packets with multicast destination addresses are designed to arrive and be important to a selected group of Ethernet nodes. If the destination address field is the reserved multicast address, FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF, the packet is a broadcast packet and it will be directed to everyone sharing the network. If the Least Significant bit in the first byte of the MAC address is clear, the address is a unicast address and will be designed for usage by only the addressed node. The ENC28J60 incorporates receive filters which can be used to discard or accept packets with multicast, broadcast and/or unicast destination addresses. When transmitting packets, the host controller is responsible for writing the desired destination address into the transmit buffer. 5.1.3 SOURCE ADDRESS The source address field is a 6-byte field filled with the MAC address of the node which created the Ethernet packet. Users of the ENC28J60 must generate a unique MAC address for each controller used. MAC addresses consist of two portions. The first three bytes are known as the Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI). OUIs are distributed by the IEEE. The last three bytes are address bytes at the discretion of the company that purchased the OUI. When transmitting packets, the assigned source MAC address must be written into the transmit buffer by the host controller. The ENC28J60 will not automatically transmit the contents of the MAADR registers which are used for the unicast receive filter. 5.1.4 TYPE/LENGTH The type/length field is a 2-byte field which defines which protocol the following packet data belongs to. Alternately, if the field is filled with the contents of 05DCh (1500) or any smaller number, the field is considered a length field and it specifies the amount of non-padding data which follows in the data field. Users implementing proprietary networks may choose to treat this field as a length field, while applications implementing protocols such as the Internet Protocol (IP) or Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), should program this field with the appropriate type defined by the protocol’s specification when transmitting packets. DS39662B-page 32 DATA The data field is a variable length field anywhere from 0 to 1500 bytes. Larger data packets will violate Ethernet standards and will be dropped by most Ethernet nodes. The ENC28J60, however, is capable of transmitting and receiving larger packets when the Huge Frame Enable bit is set (MACON3.HFRMEN = 1). 5.1.6 PADDING The padding field is a variable length field added to meet IEEE 802.3 specification requirements when small data payloads are used. The destination, source, type, data and padding of an Ethernet packet must be no smaller than 60 bytes. Adding the required 4-byte CRC field, packets must be no smaller than 64 bytes. If the data field is less than 46 bytes long, a padding field is required. When transmitting packets, the ENC28J60 automatically generates zero padding if the MACON3.PADCFG<2:0> bits are configured to do so. Otherwise, the host controller should manually add padding to the packet before transmitting it. The ENC28J60 will not prevent the transmission of undersize packets should the host controller command such an action. When receiving packets, the ENC28J60 automatically rejects packets which are less than 18 bytes; it is assumed that a packet this small does not contain even the minimum of source and destination addresses, type information and FCS checksum required for all packets. All packets 18 bytes and larger will be subject to the standard receive filtering criteria and may be accepted as normal traffic. To conform with IEEE 802.3 requirements, the application itself will need to inspect all received packets and reject those smaller than 64 bytes. 5.1.7 CRC The CRC field is a 4-byte field which contains an industry standard 32-bit CRC calculated with the data from the destination, source, type, data and padding fields. When receiving packets, the ENC28J60 will check the CRC of each incoming packet. If ERXFCON.CRCEN is set, packets with invalid CRCs will automatically be discarded. If CRCEN is clear and the packet meets all other receive filtering criteria, the packet will be written into the receive buffer and the host controller will be able to determine if the CRC was valid by reading the receive status vector (see Section 7.2 “Receiving Packets”). When transmitting packets, the ENC28J60 will automatically generate a valid CRC and transmit it if the MACON3.PADCFG<2:0> bits are configured to cause this. Otherwise, the host controller must generate the CRC and place it in the transmit buffer. Given the complexity of calculating a CRC, it is highly recommended that the PADCFG bits be configured such that the ENC28J60 will automatically generate the CRC field. Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 6.0 INITIALIZATION 6.2 Before the ENC28J60 can be used to transmit and receive packets, certain device settings must be initialized. Depending on the application, some configuration options may need to be changed. Normally, these tasks may be accomplished once after Reset and do not need to be changed thereafter. 6.1 Receive Buffer Before receiving any packets, the receive buffer must be initialized by programming the ERXST and ERXND Pointers. All memory between and including the ERXST and ERXND addresses will be dedicated to the receive hardware. It is recommended that the ERXST Pointer be programmed with an even address. Applications expecting large amounts of data and frequent packet delivery may wish to allocate most of the memory as the receive buffer. Applications that may need to save older packets or have several packets ready for transmission should allocate less memory. When programming the ERXST or ERXND Pointer, the internal hardware copy of the ERXWRPT registers will automatically be updated with the value of ERXST. This value will be used as the starting location when the receive hardware begins writing received data. The ERXWRPT registers are updated by the hardware only when a new packet is successfully received. Note: Transmission Buffer All memory which is not used by the receive buffer is considered the transmission buffer. Data which is to be transmitted should be written into any unused space. After a packet is transmitted, however, the hardware will write a seven-byte status vector into memory after the last byte in the packet. Therefore, the host controller should leave at least seven bytes between each packet and the beginning of the receive buffer. No explicit action is required to initialize the transmission buffer. 6.3 Receive Filters The appropriate receive filters should be enabled or disabled by writing to the ERXFCON register. See Section 8.0 “Receive Filters” for information on how to configure it. 6.4 Waiting For OST If the initialization procedure is being executed immediately following a Power-on Reset, the ESTAT.CLKRDY bit should be polled to make certain that enough time has elapsed before proceeding to modify the MAC and PHY registers. For more information on the OST, see Section 2.2 “Oscillator Start-up Timer”. After writing to ERXST or ERXND, the ERXWRPT registers are not updated immediately; only the internal hardware copy of the ERXWRPT registers is updated. Therefore, comparing if (ERXWRPT = = ERXST) is not practical in a firmware initialization routine. For tracking purposes, the ERXRDPT registers should additionally be programmed with the same value. To program ERXRDPT, the host controller must write to ERXRDPTL first, followed by ERXRDPTH. See Section 7.2.4 “Freeing Receive Buffer Space” for more information. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 33
ENC28J60 6.5 MAC Initialization Settings 4. Several of the MAC registers require configuration during initialization. This only needs to be done once; the order of programming is unimportant. 1. 2. 3. Set the MARXEN bit in MACON1 to enable the MAC to receive frames. If using full duplex, most applications should also set TXPAUS and RXPAUS to allow IEEE defined flow control to function. Configure the PADCFG, TXCRCEN and FULDPX bits of MACON3. Most applications should enable automatic padding to at least 60 bytes and always append a valid CRC. For convenience, many applications may wish to set the FRMLNEN bit as well to enable frame length status reporting. The FULDPX bit should be set if the application will be connected to a full-duplex configured remote node; otherwise, it should be left clear. Configure the bits in MACON4. For conformance to the IEEE 802.3 standard, set the DEFER bit. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. REGISTER 6-1: Program the MAMXFL registers with the maximum frame length to be permitted to be received or transmitted. Normal network nodes are designed to handle packets that are 1518 bytes or less. Configure the Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap register, MABBIPG. Most applications will program this register with 15h when Full-Duplex mode is used and 12h when Half-Duplex mode is used. Configure the Non-Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap register low byte, MAIPGL. Most applications will program this register with 12h. If half duplex is used, the Non-Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap register high byte, MAIPGH, should be programmed. Most applications will program this register to 0Ch. If Half-Duplex mode is used, program the Retransmission and Collision Window registers, MACLCON1 and MACLCON2. Most applications will not need to change the default Reset values. If the network is spread over exceptionally long cables, the default value of MACLCON2 may need to be increased. Program the local MAC address into the MAADR1:MAADR6 registers. MACON1: MAC CONTROL REGISTER 1 U-0 U-0 U-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — r TXPAUS RXPAUS PASSALL MARXEN bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 Reserved: Maintain as ‘0’ bit 3 TXPAUS: Pause Control Frame Transmission Enable bit 1 = Allow the MAC to transmit pause control frames (needed for flow control in full duplex) 0 = Disallow pause frame transmissions bit 2 RXPAUS: Pause Control Frame Reception Enable bit 1 = Inhibit transmissions when pause control frames are received (normal operation) 0 = Ignore pause control frames which are received bit 1 PASSALL: Pass All Received Frames Enable bit 1 = Control frames received by the MAC will be written into the receive buffer if not filtered out 0 = Control frames will be discarded after being processed by the MAC (normal operation) bit 0 MARXEN: MAC Receive Enable bit 1 = Enable packets to be received by the MAC 0 = Disable packet reception DS39662B-page 34 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 REGISTER 6-2: MACON3: MAC CONTROL REGISTER 3 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PADCFG2 PADCFG1 PADCFG0 TXCRCEN PHDREN HFRMEN FRMLNEN FULDPX bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 PADCFG2:PADCFG0: Automatic Pad and CRC Configuration bits 111 = All short frames will be zero padded to 64 bytes and a valid CRC will then be appended 110 = No automatic padding of short frames 101 = MAC will automatically detect VLAN Protocol frames which have a 8100h type field and automatically pad to 64 bytes. If the frame is not a VLAN frame, it will be padded to 60 bytes. After padding, a valid CRC will be appended. 100 = No automatic padding of short frames 011 = All short frames will be zero padded to 64 bytes and a valid CRC will then be appended 010 = No automatic padding of short frames 001 = All short frames will be zero padded to 60 bytes and a valid CRC will then be appended 000 = No automatic padding of short frames bit 4 TXCRCEN: Transmit CRC Enable bit 1 = MAC will apend a valid CRC to all frames transmitted regardless of PADCFG. TXCRCEN must be set if PADCFG specifies that a valid CRC will be appended. 0 = MAC will not append a CRC. The last 4 bytes will be checked and if it is an invalid CRC, it will be reported in the transmit status vector. bit 3 PHDREN: Proprietary Header Enable bit 1 = Frames presented to the MAC contain a 4-byte proprietary header which will not be used when calculating the CRC 0 = No proprietary header is present. The CRC will cover all data (normal operation). bit 2 HFRMEN: Huge Frame Enable bit 1 = Frames of any size will be allowed to be transmitted and receieved 0 = Frames bigger than MAMXFL will be aborted when transmitted or received bit 1 FRMLNEN: Frame Length Checking Enable bit 1 = The type/length field of transmitted and received frames will be checked. If it represents a length, the frame size will be compared and mismatches will be reported in the transmit/receive status vector. 0 = Frame lengths will not be compared with the type/length field bit 0 FULDPX: MAC Full-Duplex Enable bit 1 = MAC will operate in Full-Duplex mode. PDPXMD bit must also be set. 0 = MAC will operate in Half-Duplex mode. PDPXMD bit must also be clear. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 35
ENC28J60 REGISTER 6-3: MACON4: MAC CONTROL REGISTER 4 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 R-0 R-0 — DEFER BPEN NOBKOFF — — r r bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6 DEFER: Defer Transmission Enable bit (applies to half duplex only) 1 = When the medium is occupied, the MAC will wait indefinitely for it to become free when attempting to transmit (use this setting for 802.3 compliance) 0 = When the medium is occupied, the MAC will abort the transmission after the excessive deferral limit is reached bit 5 BPEN: No Backoff During Backpressure Enable bit (applies to half duplex only) 1 = After incidentally causing a collision during backpressure, the MAC will immediately begin retransmitting 0 = After incidentally causing a collision during backpressure, the MAC will delay using the Binary Exponential Backoff algorithm before attempting to retransmit (normal operation) bit 4 NOBKOFF: No Backoff Enable bit (applies to half duplex only) 1 = After any collision, the MAC will immediately begin retransmitting 0 = After any collision, the MAC will delay using the Binary Exponential Backoff algorithm before attempting to retransmit (normal operation) bit 3-2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1-0 Reserved: Maintain as ‘0’ REGISTER 6-4: MABBIPG: MAC BACK-TO-BACK INTER-PACKET GAP REGISTER U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — BBIPG6 BBIPG5 BBIPG4 BBIPG3 BBIPG2 BBIPG1 BBIPG0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6-0 BBIPG6:BBIPG0: Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap Delay Time bits When FULDPX (MACON3<0>) = 1: Nibble time offset delay between the end of one transmission and the beginning of the next in a back-to-back sequence. The register value should be programmed to the desired period in nibble times minus 3. The recommended setting is 15h which represents the minimum IEEE specified Inter-Packet Gap (IPG) of 9.6 μs. When FULDPX (MACON3<0>) = 0: Nibble time offset delay between the end of one transmission and the beginning of the next in a back-to-back sequence. The register value should be programmed to the desired period in nibble times minus 6. The recommended setting is 12h which represents the minimum IEEE specified Inter-Packet Gap (IPG) of 9.6 μs. DS39662B-page 36 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 6.6 PHY Initialization Settings Depending on the application, bits in three of the PHY module’s registers may also require configuration. The PHCON1.PDPXMD bit partially controls the device’s half/full-duplex configuration. Normally, this bit is initialized correctly by the external circuitry (see Section 2.6 “LED Configuration”). If the external circuitry is not present or incorrect, however, the host controller must program the bit properly. Alternatively, for an externally configurable system, the PDPXMD bit may be read and the FULDPX bit be programmed to match. If using half duplex, the host controller may wish to set the PHCON2.HDLDIS bit to prevent automatic loopback of the data which is transmitted. The PHY register, PHLCON, controls the outputs of LEDA and LEDB. If an application requires a LED configuration other than the default, PHLCON must be altered to match the new requirements. The settings for LED operation are discussed in Section 2.6 “LED Configuration”. The PHLCON register is shown in Register 2-2 (page 9). For proper duplex operation, the PHCON1.PDPXMD bit must also match the value of the MACON3.FULDPX bit. REGISTER 6-5: PHCON2: PHY CONTROL REGISTER 2 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — FRCLNK TXDIS r r JABBER r HDLDIS bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 r r r r r r r r bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 14 FRCLNK: PHY Force Linkup bit 1 = Force linkup even when no link partner is detected 0 = Normal operation bit 13 TXDIS: Twisted-Pair Transmitter Disable bit 1 = Disable twisted-pair transmitter 0 = Normal operation bit 12-11 Reserved: Write as ‘0’ bit 10 JABBER: Jabber Correction Disable bit 1 = Disable jabber correction 0 = Normal operation bit 9 Reserved: Write as ‘0’ bit 8 HDLDIS: PHY Half-Duplex Loopback Disable bit When PHCON1<8> = 1 or PHCON1<14> = 1: This bit is ignored. When PHCON1<8> = 0 and PHCON1<14> = 0: 1 = Transmitted data will only be sent out on the twisted-pair interface 0 = Transmitted data will be looped back to the MAC and sent out on the twisted-pair interface bit 7-0 Reserved: Write as ‘0’ © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 37
ENC28J60 NOTES: DS39662B-page 38 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 7.0 TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING PACKETS 7.1 Transmitting Packets The MAC inside the ENC28J60 will automatically generate the preamble and start-of-frame delimiter fields when transmitting. Additionally, the MAC can generate any padding (if needed) and the CRC if configured to do so. The host controller must generate and write all other frame fields into the buffer memory for transmission. FIGURE 7-1: Additionally, the ENC28J60 requires a single per packet control byte to precede the packet for transmission. The per packet control byte is organized as shown in Figure 7-1. Before transmitting packets, the MAC registers which alter the transmission characteristics should be initialized as documented in Section 6.0 “Initialization”. For an example of how the entire transmit packet and results will look in memory, see Figure 7-2. FORMAT FOR PER PACKET CONTROL BYTES — — — — PHUGEEN PPADEN PCRCEN bit 7 POVERRIDE bit 0 bit 7-4 Unused bit 3 PHUGEEN: Per Packet Huge Frame Enable bit When POVERRIDE = 1: 1 = The packet will be transmitted in whole 0 = The MAC will transmit up to the number of bytes specified by MAMXFL. If the packet is larger than MAMXFL, it will be aborted after MAMXFL is reached. When POVERRIDE = 0: This bit is ignored. bit 2 PPADEN: Per Packet Padding Enable bit When POVERRIDE = 1: 1 = The packet will be zero padded to 60 bytes if it is less than 60 bytes 0 = The packet will be trasmitted without adding any padding bytes When POVERRIDE = 0: This bit is ignored. bit 1 PCRCEN: Per Packet CRC Enable bit When POVERRIDE = 1: 1 = A valid CRC will be calculated and attached to the frame 0 = No CRC will be appended. The last 4 bytes of the frame will be checked for validity as a CRC. When POVERRIDE = 0: This bit is ignored. bit 0 POVERRIDE: Per Packet Override bit 1 = The values of PCRCEN, PPADEN and PHUGEEN will override the configuration defined by MACON3 0 = The values in MACON3 will be used to determine how the packet will be transmitted © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 39
ENC28J60 FIGURE 7-2: SAMPLE TRANSMIT PACKET LAYOUT Buffer Pointers Address Memory ETXST = 0120h 0120h 0121h 0Eh data[1] 0122h data[2] Description Control PHUGEEN, PPADN, PCRCEN and POVERRIDE Data Packet ETXND = 0156h 0156h 0157h 0158h 0159h 016Ah 016Bh 016Ch 016Dh 016Eh Destination Address, Source Address, Type/Length and Data Status Vector Status Vector Written by the Hardware data[m] tsv[7:0] tsv[15:8] tsv[23:16] tsv[31:24] tsv[39:32] tsv[47:40] tsv[55:48] Start of the Next Packet To achieve the example layout shown in Figure 7-2 and to transmit a packet, the host controller should: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Appropriately program the ETXST Pointer to point to an unused location in memory. It will point to the per packet control byte. In the example, it would be programmed to 0120h. It is recommended that an even address be used for ETXST. Use the WBM SPI command to write the per packet control byte, the destination address, the source MAC address, the type/length and the data payload. Appropriately program the ETXND Pointer. It should point to the last byte in the data payload. In the example, it would be programmed to 0156h. Clear EIR.TXIF, set EIE.TXIE and set EIE.INTIE to enable an interrupt when done (if desired). Start the transmission process by setting ECON1.TXRTS. If a DMA operation was in progress while the TXRTS bit was set, the ENC28J60 will wait until the DMA operation is complete before attempting to transmit the packet. This possible delay is required because the DS39662B-page 40 DMA and transmission engine share the same memory access port. Similarly, if the DMAST bit in ECON1 is set after TXRTS is already set, the DMA will wait until the TXRTS bit becomes clear before doing anything. While the transmission is in progress, none of the unshaded bits (except for the EECON1 register’s bits) in Table 7-2 should be changed. Additionally, none of the bytes to be transmitted should be read or written to through the SPI. If the host controller wishes to cancel the transmission, it can clear the TXRTS bit. When the packet is finished transmitting or was aborted due to an error/cancellation, the ECON1.TXRTS bit will be cleared, a seven-byte transmit status vector will be written to the location pointed to by ETXND + 1, the EIR.TXIF will be set and an interrupt will be generated (if enabled). The ETXST and ETXND Pointers will not be modified. To check if the packet was successfully transmitted, the ESTAT.TXABRT bit should be read. If it was set, the host controller may interrogate the ESTAT.LATECOL bit in addition to the various fields in the transmit status vector to determine the cause. The transmit status vector is organized as shown in Table 7-1. Multi-byte fields are written in little-endian format. Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 TABLE 7-1: Bit 55-52 TRANSMIT STATUS VECTORS Field Description Zero 0 51 Transmit VLAN Tagged Frame Frame’s length/type field contained 8100h which is the VLAN protocol identifier. 50 Backpressure Applied Carrier sense method backpressure was previously applied. 49 Transmit Pause Control Frame The frame transmitted was a control frame with a valid pause opcode. 48 Transmit Control Frame The frame transmitted was a control frame. Total Bytes Transmitted on Wire Total bytes transmitted on the wire for the current packet, including all bytes from collided attempts. 31 Transmit Underrun Reserved. This bit will always be ‘0’. 30 Transmit Giant Byte count for frame was greater than MAMXFL. 29 Transmit Late Collision Collision occurred beyond the collision window (MACLCON2). 28 Transmit Excessive Collision Packet was aborted after the number of collisions exceeded the retransmission maximum (MACLCON1). 27 Transmit Excessive Defer Packet was deferred in excess of 24,287 bit times (2.4287ms). 26 Transmit Packet Defer Packet was deferred for at least one attempt but less than an excessive defer. 47-32 25 Transmit Broadcast Packet’s destination address was a broadcast address. 24 Transmit Multicast Packet’s destination address was a multicast address. 23 Transmit Done Transmission of the packet was completed. 22 Transmit Length Out of Range Indicates that frame type/length field was larger than 1500 bytes (type field). 21 Transmit Length Check Error Indicates that frame length field value in the packet does not match the actual data byte length and is not a type field. MACON3.FRMLNEN must be set to get this error. 20 Transmit CRC Error The attached CRC in the packet did not match the internally generated CRC. 19-16 Transmit Collision Count Number of collisions the current packet incurred during transmission attempts. It applies to successfully transmitted packets and as such, will not show the possible maximum count of 16 collisions. 15-0 Transmit Byte Count Total bytes in frame not counting collided bytes. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 41
ENC28J60 TABLE 7-2: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS USED FOR PACKET TRANSMISSION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page INTIE — PKTIE PKTIF DMAIE DMAIF LINKIE LINKIF TXIE TXIF r r TXERIE TXERIF RXERIE RXERIF 13 13 ESTAT INT BUFER r LATECOL — RXBUSY TXABRT CLKRDY 13 ECON1 TXRST RXRST DMAST CSUMEN TXRTS RXEN BSEL1 BSEL0 Register Name EIE EIR ETXSTL TX Start Low Byte (ETXST<7:0>) ETXSTH — ETXNDL — — TX Start High Byte (ETXST<12:8>) 13 TX End High Byte (ETXND<12:8>) 13 TX End Low Byte (ETXND<7:0>) ETXNDH — — — 13 13 13 MACON1 — — — r TXPAUS RXPAUS PASSALL MARXEN 14 MACON3 PADCFG2 PADCFG1 PADCFG0 TXCRCEN PHDREN HFRMEN FRMLNEN FULDPX 14 DEFER BPEN NOBKOFF — — r r 14 MACON4 — MABBIPG — Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap (BBIPG<6:0>) 14 MAIPGL — Non-Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap Low Byte (MAIPGL<6:0>) 14 MAIPGH — Non-Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap High Byte (MAIPGH<6:0>) MACLCON1 — — — — MACLCON2 — — 14 Retransmission Maximum (RETMAX<3:0>) Collision Window (COLWIN<5:0>) 14 14 MAMXFLL Maximum Frame Length Low Byte (MAMXFL<7:0>) 14 MAMXFLH Maximum Frame Length High Byte (MAMXFL<15:8>) 14 Legend: — = unimplemented, r = reserved bit. Shaded cells are not used. DS39662B-page 42 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 7.2 Receiving Packets 7.2.1 ENABLING RECEPTION Assuming that the receive buffer has been initialized, the MAC has been properly configured and the receive filters have been configured to receive Ethernet packets, the host controller should: 1. 2. 3. If an interrupt is desired whenever a packet is received, set EIE.PKTIE and EIE.INTIE. If an interrupt is desired whenever a packet is dropped due to insufficient buffer space, clear EIR.RXERIF and set both EIE.RXERIE and EIE.INTIE Enable reception by setting ECON1.RXEN. After setting RXEN, the Duplex mode and the Receive Buffer Start and End Pointers should not be modified. Additionally, to prevent unexpected packets from arriving, it is recommended that RXEN be cleared before altering the receive filter configuration (ERXFCON) and MAC address. FIGURE 7-3: After reception is enabled, packets which are not filtered out will be written into the circular receive buffer. Any packet which does not meet the necessary filter criteria will be discarded and the host controller will not have any means of identifying that a packet was thrown away. When a packet is accepted and completely written into the buffer, the EPKTCNT register will increment, the EIR.PKTIF bit will be set, an interrupt will be generated (if enabled) and the Hardware Write Pointer, ERXWRPT, will automatically advance. 7.2.2 RECEIVE PACKET LAYOUT Figure 7-3 shows the layout of a received packet. The packets are preceded by a six-byte header which contains a Next Packet Pointer, in addition to a receive status vector which contains receive statistics, including the packet’s size. This receive status vector is shown in Table 7-3. If the last byte in the packet ends on an odd value address, the hardware will automatically add a padding byte when advancing the Hardware Write Pointer. As such, all packets will start on an even boundary. SAMPLE RECEIVE PACKET LAYOUT Address Memory Description Packet N – 1 End of the Previous Packet 101Fh 1020h 1021h 1022h 1023h 1024h 1025h 1026h 1027h 6Eh 10h rsv[7:0] rsv[15:8] rsv[23:16] rsv[30:24] data[1] data[2] Low Byte High Byte status[7:0] status[15:8] status[23:16] status[31:24] Next Packet Pointer Receive Status Vector Packet N 1059h 106Ah 106Bh 106Ch 106Dh 106Eh data[m-3] data[m-2] data[m-1] data[m] crc[31:24] crc[23:16] crc[15:8] crc[7:0] Byte Skipped to Ensure Even Buffer Address Packet N + 1 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Packet Data: Destination Address, Source Address, Type/Length, Data, Padding, CRC Start of the Next Packet Preliminary DS39662B-page 43
ENC28J60 TABLE 7-3: RECEIVE STATUS VECTORS Bit Field 31 Zero Description 0 30 Receive VLAN Type Detected Current frame was recognized as a VLAN tagged frame. 29 Receive Unknown Opcode Current frame was recognized as a control frame but it contained an unknown opcode. 28 Receive Pause Control Frame Current frame was recognized as a control frame containing a valid pause frame opcode and a valid destination address. 27 Receive Control Frame Current frame was recognized as a control frame for having a valid type/length designating it as a control frame. 26 Dribble Nibble Indicates that after the end of this packet, an additional 1 to 7 bits were received. The extra bits were thrown away. 25 Receive Broadcast Packet Indicates packet received had a valid broadcast address. 24 Receive Multicast Packet Indicates packet received had a valid multicast address. 23 Received Ok Indicates that at the packet had a valid CRC and no symbol errors. 22 Length Out of Range Indicates that frame type/length field was larger than 1500 bytes (type field). 21 Length Check Error Indicates that frame length field value in the packet does not match the actual data byte length and specifies a valid length. 20 CRC Error Indicates that frame CRC field value does not match the CRC calculated by the MAC. 19 Reserved 18 Carrier Event Previously Seen 17 Reserved 16 Long Event/Drop Event Indicates a packet over 50,000 bit times occurred or that a packet was dropped since the last receive. Received Byte Count Indicates length of the received frame. This includes the destination address, source address, type/length, data, padding and CRC fields. This field is stored in little-endian format. 15-0 7.2.3 Indicates that at some time since the last receive, a carrier event was detected. The carrier event is not associated with this packet. A carrier event is activity on the receive channel that does not result in a packet receive attempt being made. READING RECEIVED PACKETS To process the packet, the host controller will normally use the RBM SPI command and start reading from the beginning of the next Packet Pointer. The host controller will save the next Packet Pointer, any necessary bytes from the receive status vector and then proceed to read the actual packet contents. If ECON2.AUTOINC is set, it will be able to sequentially read the entire packet without ever modifying the ERDPT registers. The Read Pointer would automatically wrap at the end of the circular receive buffer to the beginning. EXAMPLE 7-1: In the event that the application needed to do random access to the packet, it would be necessary to manually calculate the proper ERDPT, taking care to not exceed the end of the receive buffer if the packet spans the ERXND-to-ERXST buffer boundary. In other words, given the packet start address and a desired offset, the application should follow the logic shown in Example 7-1. RANDOM ACCESS ADDRESS CALCULATION if Packet Start Address + Offset > ERXND, then ERDPT = Packet Start Address + Offset – (ERXND – ERXST + 1) else ERDPT = Packet Start Address + Offset DS39662B-page 44 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 7.2.4 FREEING RECEIVE BUFFER SPACE After the host controller has processed a packet (or part of the packet) and wishes to free the buffer space used by the processed data, the host controller must advance the Receive Buffer Read Pointer, ERXRDPT. The ENC28J60 will always write up to, but not including, the memory pointed to by the Receive Buffer Read Pointer. If the ENC28J60 ever attempts to overwrite the Receive Buffer Read Pointer location, the packet in progress will be aborted, the EIR.RXERIF will be set and an interrupt will be generated (if enabled). In this manner, the hardware will never overwrite unprocessed packets. Normally, the ERXRDPT will be advanced to the value pointed to by the next Packet Pointer which precedes the receive status vector for the current packet. Following such a procedure will not require any Pointer calculations to account for wrapping at the end of the circular receive buffer. The Receive Buffer Read Pointer Low Byte (ERXRDPTL register) is internally buffered to prevent the Pointer from moving when only one byte is updated through the SPI. To move ERXRDPT, the host controller must write to ERXRDPTL first. The write will update the internal buffer but will not affect the register. When the host controller writes to ERXRDPTH, the internally buffered low byte will be loaded into the ERXRDPTL register at the same time. The ERXRDPT bytes can be read in any order. When they are read, the actual value of the registers will be returned. As a result, the buffered low byte is not readable. In addition to advancing the Receive Buffer Read Pointer, after each packet is fully processed, the host controller must write a ‘1’ to the ECON2.PKTDEC bit. Doing so will cause the EPKTCNT register to decrement by 1. After decrementing, if EPKTCNT is ‘0’, the EIR.PKTIF flag will automatically be cleared. Otherwise, it will remain set, indicating that additional packets are in the receive buffer and are waiting to be processed. Attempts to decrement EPKTCNT below 0 are ignored. Additionally, if the EPKTCNT register ever maximizes at 255, all new packets which are received will be aborted, even if buffer space is available. To indicate the error, the EIR.RXERIF will be set and an interrupt will be generated (if enabled). To prevent this condition, the host controller must properly decrement the counter whenever a packet is processed. EXAMPLE 7-2: Because only one Pointer is available to control buffer area ownership, the host controller must process packets in the order they are received. If the host controller wishes to save a packet to be processed later, it should copy the packet to an unused location in memory. It may accomplish this efficiently using the integrated DMA controller (see Section 13.0 “Direct Memory Access Controller”). 7.2.5 RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE At any time the host controller wishes to know how much receive buffer space is remaining, it should read the Hardware Write Pointer (ERXWRPT registers) and compare it with the ERXRDPT registers. Combined with the known size of the receive buffer, the free space can be derived. Note: The ERXWRPT registers only update when a packet has been successfully received. If the host controller reads it just before another packet is to be successfully completed, the value returned could be stale and off by the maximum frame length permitted (MAMXFLN) plus 7. Furthermore, as the host controller reads one byte of ERXWRPT, a new packet may arrive and update the Pointer before the host controller has an opportunity to read the other byte of ERXWRPT. When reading the ERXWRPT register with the receive hardware enabled, special care must be taken to ensure the low and high bytes are read as a matching set. To be assured that a matching set is obtained: 1. 2. 3. 4. Read the EPKTCNT register and save its contents. Read ERXWRPTL and ERXWRPTH. Read the EPKTCNT register again. Compare the two packet counts. If they are not the same, go back to step 2. With the Hardware Write Pointer obtained, the free space can be calculated as shown in Example 7-2. The hardware prohibits moving the Write Pointer to the same value occupied by ERXRDPT (except when the Buffer Pointers are being configured), so at least one byte will always go unused in the buffer. The example calculation reflects the lost byte. RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE CALCULATION if ERXWRPT > ERXRDPT, then Free Space = (ERXND – ERXST) – (ERXWRPT – ERXRDPT) else if ERXWRPT = ERXRDPT, then Free Space = (ERXND – ERXST) else Free Space = ERXRDPT – ERXWRPT – 1 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 45
ENC28J60 TABLE 7-4: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS USED FOR PACKET RECEPTION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page EIE INTIE PKTIE DMAIE LINKIE TXIE r TXERIE RXERIE 13 EIR — PKTIF DMAIF LINKIF TXIF r TXERIF RXERIF 13 ESTAT INT BUFER r LATECOL — RXBUSY TXABRT CLKRDY 13 ECON2 AUTOINC PKTDEC PWRSV r VRPS — — — 13 ECON1 TXRST RXRST DMAST CSUMEN TXRTS RXEN BSEL1 BSEL0 13 Register Name ERXSTL RX Start Low Byte (ERXST<7:0>) ERXSTH — ERXNDL — ERXRDPTL 13 RX Start High Byte (ERXST<12:8>) 13 — — RX End High Byte (ERXND<12:8>) 13 13 RX RD Pointer Low Byte (ERXRDPT<7:0>) ERXRDPTH EPKTCNT — RX End Low Byte (ERXND<7:0>) ERXNDH ERXFCON — — — — UCEN ANDOR CRCEN 13 RX RD Pointer High Byte (ERXRDPT<12:8>) PMEN MPEN HTEN MCEN 13 BCEN Ethernet Packet Count 14 14 MACON1 — — — r TXPAUS RXPAUS PASSALL MARXEN MACON3 PADCFG2 PADCFG1 PADCFG0 TXCRCEN PHDREN HFRMEN FRMLNEN FULDPX MAMXFLL Maximum Frame Length Low Byte (MAMXFL<7:0>) 14 Maximum Frame Length High Byte (MAMXFL<15:8>) 14 MAMXFLH Legend: 14 14 — = unimplemented, r = reserved bit. Shaded cells are not used. DS39662B-page 46 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 8.0 RECEIVE FILTERS To minimize the processing requirements of the host controller, the ENC28J60 incorporates several different receive filters which can automatically reject packets which are not needed. Six different types of packet filters are implemented: • • • • • • Unicast Pattern Match Magic Packet™ Hash Table Multicast Broadcast © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. The individual filters are all configured by the ERXFCON register (Register 8-1). More than one filter can be active at any given time. Additionally, the filters can be configured by the ANDOR bit to either logically AND, or logically OR, the tests of several filters. In other words, the filters may be set so that only packets accepted by all active filters are accepted, or a packet accepted by any one filter is accepted. The flowcharts in Figure 8-1 and Figure 8-2 show the effect that each of the filters will have depending on the setting of ANDOR. The device can enter Promiscuous mode and receive all packets by clearing the ERXFCON register. The proper setting of the register will depend on the application requirements. Preliminary DS39662B-page 47
ENC28J60 REGISTER 8-1: ERXFCON: ETHERNET RECEIVE FILTER CONTROL REGISTER R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 UCEN ANDOR CRCEN PMEN MPEN HTEN MCEN BCEN bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 UCEN: Unicast Filter Enable bit When ANDOR = 1: 1 = Packets not having a destination address matching the local MAC address will be discarded 0 = Filter disabled When ANDOR = 0: 1 = Packets with a destination address matching the local MAC address will be accepted 0 = Filter disabled bit 6 ANDOR: AND/OR Filter Select bit 1 = AND: Packets will be rejected unless all enabled filters accept the packet 0 = OR: Packets will be accepted unless all enabled filters reject the packet bit 5 CRCEN: Post-Filter CRC Check Enable bit 1 = All packets with an invalid CRC will be discarded 0 = The CRC validity will be ignored bit 4 PMEN: Pattern Match Filter Enable bit When ANDOR = 1: 1 = Packets must meet the Pattern Match criteria or they will be discarded 0 = Filter disabled When ANDOR = 0: 1 = Packets which meet the Pattern Match criteria will be accepted 0 = Filter disabled bit 3 MPEN: Magic Packet Filter Enable bit When ANDOR = 1: 1 = Packets must be Magic Packets for the local MAC address or they will be discarded 0 = Filter disabled When ANDOR = 0: 1 = Magic Packets for the local MAC address will be accepted 0 = Filter disabled bit 2 HTEN: Hash Table Filter Enable bit When ANDOR = 1: 1 = Packets must meet the Hash Table criteria or they will be discarded 0 = Filter disabled When ANDOR = 0: 1 = Packets which meet the Hash Table criteria will be accepted 0 = Filter disabled bit 1 MCEN: Multicast Filter Enable bit When ANDOR = 1: 1 = Packets must have the Least Significant bit set in the destination address or they will be discarded 0 = Filter disabled When ANDOR = 0: 1 = Packets which have the Least Significant bit set in the destination address will be accepted 0 = Filter disabled bit 0 BCEN: Broadcast Filter Enable bit When ANDOR = 1: 1 = Packets must have a destination address of FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF or they will be discarded 0 = Filter disabled When ANDOR = 0: 1 = Packets which have a destination address of FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF will be accepted 0 = Filter disabled DS39662B-page 48 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 FIGURE 8-1: RECEIVE FILTERING USING OR LOGIC Packet Detected on Wire ANDOR = 0 (OR) UCEN set? Yes Yes Unicast packet? No No PMEN set? Yes Yes Pattern matches? No No MPEN set? Yes Magic Packet for us? No Yes No HTEN set? Yes Yes Hash table bit set? No No MCEN set? Yes Multicast destination? No Yes No BCEN set? Yes Broadcast destination? No Yes CRCEN set? Yes No No CRC valid? No Yes Reject Packet © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary Accept Packet DS39662B-page 49
ENC28J60 FIGURE 8-2: RECEIVE FILTERING USING AND LOGIC Packet Detected on Wire ANDOR = 1 (AND) UCEN set? Yes No Unicast packet? No Yes PMEN set? Yes Pattern matches? No No Yes MPEN set? Yes Magic Packet for us? No No Yes HTEN set? Yes No Hash table bit set? No Yes MCEN set? Yes Multicast destination? No No Yes BCEN set? Yes Broadcast destination? No No Yes No CRCEN set? Yes CRC valid? No Yes Accept Packet DS39662B-page 50 Preliminary Reject Packet © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 8.1 Unicast Filter the filter criteria will immediately not be met, even if the corresponding mask bits are all ‘0’. The pattern match checksum registers should be programmed to the checksum which is expected for the selected bytes. The checksum is calculated in the same manner that the DMA module calculates checksums (see Section 13.2 “Checksum Calculations”). Data bytes which have corresponding mask bits programmed to ‘0’ are completely removed for purposes of calculating the checksum, as opposed to treating the data bytes as zero. The unicast receive filter checks the destination address of all incoming packets. If the destination address exactly matches the contents of the MAADR registers, the packet will meet the unicast filter criteria. 8.2 Pattern Match Filter The pattern match filter selects up to 64 bytes from the incoming packet and calculates an IP checksum of the bytes. The checksum is then compared to the EPMCS registers. The packet meets the pattern match filter criteria if the calculated checksum matches the EPMCS registers. The pattern match filter may be useful for filtering packets which have expected data inside them. As an example, if the application wished to filter all packets having a particular source MAC address of 00-04-A3-FF-FF-FF, it could program the pattern match offset to 0000h and then set bits 6 and 7 of EPMM0 and bits 0, 1, 2 and 3 of EPMM1 (assuming all other mask bits are ‘0’). The proper checksum to program into the EPMCS registers would be 0x5BFC. As an alternative configuration, it could program the offset to 0006h and set bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 of EPMM0. The checksum would still be 5BFCh. However, the second case would be less desirable as packets less than 70 bytes long could never meet the pattern match criteria, even if they would generate the proper checksum given the mask configuration. To use the pattern match filter, the host controller must program the pattern match offset (EPMOH:EPMOL), all of the pattern match mask bytes (EPMM7:EPMM0) and the pattern match checksum register pair (EPMCSH:EPMCSL). The pattern match offset should be loaded with the offset from the beginning of the destination address field to the 64-byte window which will be used for the checksum computation. Within the 64-byte window, each individual byte can be selectively included or excluded from the checksum computation by setting or clearing the respective bit in the pattern match mask. If a packet is received which would cause the 64 byte window to extend past the end of the CRC, FIGURE 8-3: Another example of a pattern matching filter is illustrated in Figure 8-3. SAMPLE PATTERN MATCH FORMAT Input Configuration: EMPOH:EPMOL = 0006h EPMM7:EPMM0 = 0000000000001F0Ah EPMCSH:EPMCSL = 563Fh Field DA SA Type/Length Data FCS Received Data 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 AA BB CC 00 5A 09 0A 0B 0C 0D . . . 40 . . . FE 45 23 01 Byte # 0 1 2 3 4 5 14 15 16 17 18 . . . 70 . . . 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Bytes used for Checksum Computation 64-byte Window used for Pattern Match Values used for Checksum Computation = {88h, AAh, 09h, 0Ah, 0Bh, 0Ch, 0Dh, 00h} (00h padding byte added by hardware) Note: Received data is shown in hexadecimal. Byte numbers are shown in decimal format. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 51
ENC28J60 8.3 Magic Packet™ Filter The Magic Packet filter checks the destination address and data fields of all incoming packets. If the destination address matches the MAADR registers and the data field holds a valid Magic Packet pattern someplace FIGURE 8-4: within it, then the packet will meet the Magic Packet filter criteria. The Magic Packet pattern consists of a sync pattern of six 0xFF bytes, followed by 16 repeats of the destination address. See Figure 8-4 for a sample Magic Packet. SAMPLE MAGIC PACKET™ FORMAT Received Data Field 11 22 33 44 55 66 Comments DA SA Type/Length 77 88 99 AA BB CC 00 FE 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E FF FF FF FF FF 00 Sync Pattern FF FF FF FF FF FF 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 Data 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 Sixteen Repeats of the Station Address 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E EF 54 32 10 8.4 FCS Hash Table Filter 8.5 The hash table receive filter performs a CRC over the six destination address bytes in the packet. The CRC is then used as a Pointer into the bits of the EHT registers. If the Pointer points to a bit which is set, the packet meets the hash table filter criteria. For example, if the CRC is calculated to be 0x5, bit 5 in the hash table will be checked. If it is set, the hash table filter criteria will be met. If every bit is clear in the hash table, the filter criteria will never be met. Similarly, if every bit is set in the hash table, the filter criteria will always be met. DS39662B-page 52 Multicast Filter The multicast receive filter checks the destination address of all incoming packets. If the Least Significant bit of the first byte of the destination address is set, the packet will meet the multicast filter criteria. 8.6 Broadcast Filter The broadcast receive filter checks the destination address of all incoming packets. If the destination address is FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF, the packet will meet the broadcast filter criteria. Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 9.0 DUPLEX MODE CONFIGURATION AND NEGOTIATION 2. The ENC28J60 does not support automatic duplex negotiation. If it is connected to an automatic duplex negotiation enabled network switch or Ethernet controller, the ENC28J60 will be detected as a half-duplex device. To communicate in Full-Duplex mode, the ENC28J60 and the remote node (switch, router or Ethernet controller) must be manually configured for full-duplex operation. 9.1 Half-Duplex Operation The ENC28J60 operates in Half-Duplex mode when MACON3.FULDPX = 0 and PHCON1.PDPXMD = 0. If only one of these two bits is set, the ENC28J60 will be in an indeterminate state and not function correctly. Since switching between Full and Half-Duplex modes may result in this indeterminate state, the host controller should not transmit any packets (maintain ECON1.TXRTS clear) and packet reception should be disabled (ECON1.RXEN and ESTAT.RXBUSY should be clear) during this period. In Half-Duplex mode, only one Ethernet controller may be transmitting on the physical medium at any time. If the host controller sets the ECON1.TXRTS bit, requesting that a packet be transmitted while another Ethernet controller is already transmitting, the ENC28J60 will delay, waiting for the remote transmitter to stop. After the transmission stops, the ENC28J60 will attempt to transmit its packet. If another Ethernet controller starts transmitting at approximately the same time that the ENC28J60 starts transmitting, the data on the wire will become corrupt and a collision will occur. The hardware will handle this condition in one of two ways: 1. If the collision occurs before the number of bytes specified by the “Collision Window” in MACLCON2 were transmitted, the ECON1.TXRTS bit will remain set, a random exponential back off delay will elapse as defined by the IEEE 802.3 specification and then a new attempt to transmit the packet from the beginning will occur. The host controller will not need to intervene. If the number of retransmission attempts already matches the “Retransmission Maximum” (RETMAX) defined in MACLCON1, the packet will be aborted and ECON1.TXRTS will be cleared. The host controller will then be responsible for taking appropriate action. The host controller will be able to determine that the packet was aborted instead of being successfully transmitted by reading the ESTAT.TXABRT flag. For more information, see Section 7.1 “Transmitting Packets”. A transmit abort will cause the transmit error interrupt. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. If the collision occurs after the number of bytes specified by the “Collision Window” in MACLCON2 were transmitted, the packet will be immediately aborted without any retransmission attempts. Ordinarily, in 802.3 compliant networks which are properly configured, this late collision will not occur. User intervention may be required to correct the issue. This problem may occur as a result of a full-duplex node attempting to transmit on the half-duplex medium. Alternately, the ENC28J60 may be attempting to operate in Half-Duplex mode while it may be connected to a full-duplex network. Excessively long cabling and network size may also be a possible cause of late collisions. When set in Half-Duplex mode, the Reset default configuration will loop transmitted packets back to itself. Unless the receive filter configuration filters these packets out, they will be written into the circular receive buffer, just as any other network traffic. To stop this behavior, the host controller should set the PHCON2.HDLDIS bit. 9.2 Full-Duplex Operation The ENC28J60 operates in Full-Duplex mode when MACON3.FULDPX = 1 and PHCON1.PDPXMD = 1. If only one of these two bits is clear, the ENC28J60 will be in an indeterminate state and not function correctly. Since switching between Full and Half-Duplex modes may result in this indeterminate state, the host controller should not transmit any packets (maintain ECON1.TXRTS clear) and packet reception should be disabled (ECON1.RXEN and ESTAT.RXBUSY should be clear) during this period. In Full-Duplex mode, packets will be transmitted simultaneously while packets may be received. Given this, it is impossible to cause any collisions when transmitting packets. Several configuration fields, such as “Retransmission Maximum” (RETMAX) in MACLCON1 and “Collision Window” (COLWIN) in MACLCON2, will not be used. When set in Full-Duplex mode, the Reset default configuration will not loop transmitted packets back to itself. If loopback is desired for diagnostic purposes, the PHCON1.PLOOPBK bit should be set by the host controller. Enabling loopback in Full-Duplex mode will disable the twisted pair output driver and ignore all incoming data, thus dropping any link (if established). All packets received as a result of the loopback configuration will be subject to all enabled receive filters, just as ordinary network traffic would be. Preliminary DS39662B-page 53
ENC28J60 NOTES: DS39662B-page 54 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 10.0 FLOW CONTROL The ENC28J60 implements hardware flow control for both Full and Half-Duplex modes. The operation of this feature differs depending on which mode is being used. 10.1 Half-Duplex Mode In Half-Duplex mode, setting the EFLOCON.FCEN0 bit causes flow control to be enabled. When FCEN0 is set, a continuous preamble pattern of alternating ‘1’s and ‘0’s (55h) will automatically be transmitted on the Ethernet medium. Any connected nodes will see the transmission and either not transmit anything, waiting for the ENC28J60’s transmission to end, or will attempt to transmit and immediately cause a collision. Because a collision will always occur, no nodes on the network will be able to communicate with each other and no new packets will arrive. When the host controller tells the ENC28J60 to transmit a packet by setting ECON1.TXRTS, the preamble pattern will stop being transmitted. An InterPacket Gap delay will pass as configured by register MABBIPG and then the ENC28J60 will attempt to transmit its packet. During the Inter-Packet Gap delay, other nodes may begin to transmit. Because all traffic was jammed previously, several nodes may begin transmitting and a series of collisions may occur. When the ENC28J60 successfully finishes transmitting its packet or aborts it, the transmission of the preamble pattern will automatically restart. When the host controller wishes to no longer jam the network, it should clear the FCEN0 bit. The preamble transmission will cease and normal network operation will resume. matically decrement every 512 bit times or 51.2 μs. While the timer is counting down, reception of packets is still enabled. If new pause frames arrive, the timer will be reinitialized with the new pause timer value. When the timer reaches zero or was sent a frame with a zero pause timer value, the MAC that received the pause frame will resume transmitting any pending packets. To prevent a pause frame from stopping all traffic on the entire network, Ethernet switches and routers do not propagate pause control frames in Full-Duplex mode. The pause operation only applies to the recipient. A sample network is shown in Figure 10-1. If Computer A were to be transmitting too much data to the ENC28J60 in Full-Duplex mode, the ENC28J60 could transmit a pause control frame to stop the data which is being sent to it. The Ethernet switch would take the pause frame and stop sending data to the ENC28J60. If Computer A continues to send data, the Ethernet switch will buffer the data so it can be transmitted later when its pause timer expires. If the Ethernet switch begins to run out of buffer space, it will likely transmit a pause control frame of its own to Computer A. If, for some reason, the Ethernet switch does not generate a pause control frame of its own, or one of the nodes does not properly handle the pause frame it receives, then packets will inevitably be dropped. In any event, any communication between Computer A and Computer B will always be completely unaffected. FIGURE 10-1: SAMPLE FULL-DUPLEX NETWORK Given the detrimental network effects that are possible and lack of effectiveness, it is not recommend that halfduplex flow control be used unless the application will be in a closed network environment with proper testing. Computer A 10.2 Computer B Full-Duplex Mode In Full-Duplex mode (MACON3.FULDPX = 1), hardware flow control is implemented by means of transmitting pause control frames as defined by the IEEE 802.3 specification. Pause control frames are 64-byte frames consisting of the reserved multicast destination address of 01-80-C2-00-00-01, the source address of the sender, a special pause opcode, a two-byte pause timer value and padding/CRC. Normally, when a pause control frame is received by a MAC, the MAC will finish the packet it is transmitting and then stop transmitting any new frames. The pause timer value will be extracted from the control frame and used to initialize an internal timer. The timer will auto- © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary Ethernet Switch MCP22S80 E N C 28 J 6 0 DS39662B-page 55
ENC28J60 To enable flow control on the ENC28J60 in Full-Duplex mode, the host controller must set the TXPAUS and RXPAUS bits in the MACON1 register. Then, at any time that the receiver buffer is running out of space, the host controller should turn flow control on by writing the value 02h to the EFLOCON register. The hardware will periodically transmit pause frames loaded with the pause timer value specified in the EPAUS registers. The host controller can continue to transmit its own packets without interfering with the flow control hardware. When space has been made available for more packets in the receive buffer, the host controller should turn flow control off by writing the value 03h to the EFLOCON register. The hardware will send one last pause frame loaded with a pause timer value of 0000h. When the pause frame is received by the remote node, it will resume normal network operations. REGISTER 10-1: When RXPAUS is set in the MACON1 register and a valid pause frame arrives with a non-zero pause timer value, the ENC28J60 will automatically inhibit transmissions. If the host controller sets the ECON1.TXRTS bit to send a packet, the hardware will simply wait until the pause timer expires before attempting to send the packet and subsequently clearing the TXRTS bit. Normally, the host controller will never know that a pause frame has been received. However, if it is desirable to the host controller to know when the MAC is paused or not, it should set the PASSALL bit in MACON1 and then manually interpret the pause control frames which may arrive. EFLOCON: ETHERNET FLOW CONTROL REGISTER U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — — — FULDPXS FCEN1 FCEN0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2 FULDPXS: Read-Only MAC Full-Duplex Shadow bit 1 = MAC is configured for Full-Duplex mode, FULDPX (MACON3<0>) is set 0 = MAC is configured for Half-Duplex mode, FULDPX (MACON3<0>) is clear bit 1-0 FCEN1:FCEN0: Flow Control Enable bits When FULDPXS = 1: 11 = Send one pause frame with a ‘0’ timer value and then turn flow control off 10 = Send pause frames periodically 01 = Send one pause frame then turn flow control off 00 = Flow control off When FULDPXS = 0: 11 = Flow control on 10 = Flow control off 01 = Flow control on 00 = Flow control off DS39662B-page 56 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 TABLE 10-1: Name ECON1 SUMMARY OF REGISTERS USED WITH FLOW CONTROL Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 TXRST RXRST DMAST CSUMEN TXRTS RXEN MACON1 — — — r TXPAUS RXPAUS MABBIPG — EFLOCON — Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page BSEL1 BSEL0 13 PASSALL MARXEN Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap (BBIPG<6:0>) — — — — 14 14 FULDPXS FCEN1 FCEN0 14 EPAUSL Pause Timer Value Low Byte (EPAUS<7:0>) 14 EPAUSH Pause Timer Value High Byte (EPAUS<15:8>) 14 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 57
ENC28J60 NOTES: DS39662B-page 58 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 11.0 RESET The ENC28J60 differentiates between various kinds of Reset: • • • • • Power-on Reset (POR) System Reset Transmit Only Reset Receive Only Reset Miscellaneous MAC and PHY Subsystem Resets A simplified block diagram of the On-Chip Reset Circuit is shown in Figure 11-1. FIGURE 11-1: ON-CHIP RESET CIRCUIT Soft Reset Command Hardware Reset System Reset POR Reset Host Interface Reset Transmit Transmit Reset Reset Receive Receive Reset © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 59
ENC28J60 11.1 Power-on Reset (POR) A Power-on Reset pulse is generated on-chip whenever VDD rises above a certain threshold. This allows the device to start in the initialized state when VDD is adequate for operation. The POR circuitry is always enabled. As a result, most applications do not need to attach any external circuitry to the RESET pin to ensure a proper Reset at powerup. The RESET pin’s internal weak pull-up will maintain a logical high level on the pin during normal device operation. To ensure proper POR operation, a minimum rise rate for VDD is specified (parameter D003). The application circuit must meet this requirement to allow the Oscillator Start-up Timer and CLKOUT functions to reset properly. After a Power-on Reset, the contents of the dual port buffer memory will be unknown. However, all registers will be loaded with their specified Reset values. Certain portions of the ENC28J60 must not be accessed immediately after a POR. See Section 2.2 “Oscillator Start-up Timer” for more information. 11.2 System Reset The System Reset of ENC28J60 can be accomplished by either the RESET pin, or through the SPI interface. The RESET pin provides an asynchronous method for triggering an external Reset of the device. A Reset is generated by holding the RESET pin low. The ENC28J60 has a noise filter in the RESET path which detects and ignores small pulses of time tRSTLOW or less. When the RESET pin is held high, the ENC28J60 will operate normally. After a System Reset, all PHY registers should not be read or written to until at least 50 μs have passed since the Reset has ended. All registers will revert to their Reset default values. The dual port buffer memory will maintain state throughout the System Reset. 11.3 Transmit Only Reset The Transmit Only Reset is performed by writing a ‘1’ to the TXRST bit in the ECON1 register using the SPI interface. If a packet was being transmitted when the TXRST bit was set, the hardware will automatically clear the TXRTS bit and abort the transmission. This action resets the transmit logic only. The System Reset automatically performs the Transmit Only Reset. Other register and control blocks, such as buffer management and host interface, are not affected by a Transmit Only Reset event. When the host controller wishes to return to normal operation, it should clear the TXRST bit. 11.4 Receive Only Reset The Receive Only Reset is performed by writing a ‘1’ to the RXRST bit in the ECON1 register using the SPI interface. If packet reception was enabled (the RXEN bit was set) when RXRST was set, the hardware will automatically clear the RXEN bit. If a packet was being received, it would be immediately aborted. This action resets receive logic only. The System Reset automatically performs Receive Only Reset. Other register and control blocks, such as the buffer management and host interface blocks, are not affected by a Receive Only Reset event. When the host controller wishes to return to normal operation, it should clear the RXRST bit. The ENC28J60 can also be reset via the SPI using the System Reset Command. See Section 4.0 “Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)”. The RESET pin will not be driven low by any internal Resets, including a System Reset Command via the SPI interface. DS39662B-page 60 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 11.5 PHY Subsystem Reset The PHY module may be reset by writing a ‘1’ to the PRST bit in the PHCON1 register (Register 11-1). All the PHY register contents will revert to their Reset defaults. REGISTER 11-1: Unlike other Resets, the PHY cannot be removed from Reset immediately after setting PRST. The PHY requires a delay, after which the hardware automatically clears the PRST bit. After a Reset is issued, the host controller should poll PRST and wait for it to become clear before using the PHY. PHCON1: PHY CONTROL REGISTER 1 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 PRST PLOOPBK — — PPWRSV r — PDPXMD bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 r — — — — — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15 PRST: PHY Software Reset bit 1 = PHY is processing a Software Reset (automatically resets to ‘0’ when done) 0 = Normal operation bit 14 PLOOPBK: PHY Loopback bit 1 = All data transmitted will be returned to the MAC. The twisted-pair interface will be disabled. 0 = Normal operation bit 13-12 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 11 PPWRSV: PHY Power-Down bit 1 = PHY is shut down 0 = Normal operation bit 10 Reserved: Maintain as ‘0’ bit 9 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 8 PDPXMD: PHY Duplex Mode bit 1 = PHY operates in Full-Duplex mode 0 = PHY operates in Half-Duplex mode bit 7 Reserved: Maintain as ‘0’ bit 6-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 61
ENC28J60 NOTES: DS39662B-page 62 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 12.0 INTERRUPTS The ENC28J60 has multiple interrupt sources and an interrupt output pin to signal the occurrence of events to the host controller. The interrupt pin is designed for use by a host controller that is capable of detecting falling edges. Interrupts are managed with two registers. The EIE register contains the individual interrupt enable bits for each interrupt source, while the EIR register contains the corresponding interrupt flag bits. When an interrupt occurs, the interrupt flag is set. If the interrupt is enabled in the EIE register and the INTIE global interrupt enable bit is set, the INT pin will be driven low (see Figure 12-1). Note: Except for the LINKIF interrupt flag, interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the associated global enable bit. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. This feature allows for software polling. FIGURE 12-1: When an enabled interrupt occurs, the interrupt pin will remain low until all flags which are causing the interrupt are cleared or masked off (enable bit is cleared) by the host controller. If more than one interrupt source is enabled, the host controller must poll each flag in the EIR register to determine the source(s) of the interrupt. It is recommended that the Bit Field Clear (BFC) SPI command be used to reset the flag bits in the EIR register rather than the normal Write Control Register (WCR) command. This is necessary to prevent unintentionally altering a flag that changes during the write command. The BFC and WCR commands are discussed in detail in Section 4.0 “Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)”. After an interrupt occurs, the host controller should clear the global enable bit for the interrupt pin before servicing the interrupt. Clearing the enable bit will cause the interrupt pin to return to the non-asserted state (high). Doing so will prevent the host controller from missing a falling edge should another interrupt occur while the immediate interrupt is being serviced. After the interrupt has been serviced, the global enable bit may be restored. If an interrupt event occurred while the previous interrupt was being processed, the act of resetting the global enable bit will cause a new falling edge on the interrupt pin to occur. ENC28J60 INTERRUPT LOGIC PKTIF PKTIE DMAIF PLNKIF PGIF PLNKIE PGEIE DMAIE LINKIF INT LINKIE INT TXIF TXIE INTIE TXERIF TXERIE RXERIF RXERIE © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 63
ENC28J60 12.1 INT Interrupt Enable (INTIE) The INT Interrupt Enable bit (INTIE) is a global enable bit which allows the following interrupts to drive the INT pin: • • • • • • 12.1.1 Receive Error Interrupt (RXERIF) Transmit Error Interrupt (TXERIF) Transmit Interrupt (TXIF) Link Change Interrupt (LINKIF) DMA Interrupt (DMAIF) Receive Packet Pending Interrupt (PKTIF) REGISTER 12-1: When any of the above interrupts are enabled and generated, the virtual bit, INT in the ESTAT register (Register 12-1), will be set to ‘1’. If EIE.INTIE is ‘1’, the INT pin will be driven low. INT INTERRUPT REGISTERS The registers associated with the INT interrupts are shown in Register 12-2, Register 12-3, Register 12-4 and Register 12-5. ESTAT: ETHERNET STATUS REGISTER R-0 R/C-0 R-0 R/C-0 U-0 R-0 R/C-0 R/W-0 INT BUFER r LATECOL — RXBUSY TXABRT CLKRDY bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit C = Clearable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 INT: INT Interrupt Flag bit 1 = INT interrupt is pending 0 = No INT interrupt is pending bit 6 BUFER: Ethernet Buffer Error Status bit 1 = An Ethernet read or write has generated a buffer error (overrun or underrun) 0 = No buffer error has occurred bit 5 Reserved: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 LATECOL: Late Collision Error bit 1 = A collision occurred after 64 bytes had been transmitted 0 = No collisions after 64 bytes have occurred bit 3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2 RXBUSY: Receive Busy bit 1 = Receive logic is receiving a data packet 0 = Receive logic is Idle bit 1 TXABRT: Transmit Abort Error bit 1 = The transmit request was aborted 0 = No transmit abort error bit 0 CLKRDY: Clock Ready bit 1 = OST has expired; PHY is ready 0 = OST is still counting; PHY is not ready DS39662B-page 64 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 REGISTER 12-2: EIE: ETHERNET INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 INTIE PKTIE DMAIE LINKIE TXIE r TXERIE RXERIE bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 INTIE: Global INT Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Allow interrupt events to drive the INT pin 0 = Disable all INT pin activity (pin is continuously driven high) bit 6 PKTIE: Receive Packet Pending Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enable receive packet pending interrupt 0 = Disable receive packet pending interrupt bit 5 DMAIE: DMA Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enable DMA interrupt 0 = Disable DMA interrupt bit 4 LINKIE: Link Status Change Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enable link change interrupt from the PHY 0 = Disable link change interrupt bit 3 TXIE: Transmit Enable bit 1 = Enable transmit interrupt 0 = Disable transmit interrupt bit 2 Reserved: Maintain as ‘0’ bit 1 TXERIE: Transmit Error Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enable transmit error interrupt 0 = Disable transmit error interrupt bit 0 x = Bit is unknown RXERIE: Receive Error Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enable receive error interrupt 0 = Disable receive error interrupt © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 65
ENC28J60 REGISTER 12-3: EIR: ETHERNET INTERRUPT REQUEST (FLAG) REGISTER U-0 R-0 R/C-0 R-0 R/C-0 R-0 R/C-0 R/C-0 — PKTIF DMAIF LINKIF TXIF r TXERIF RXERIF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit C = Clearable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6 PKTIF: Receive Packet Pending Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Receive buffer contains one or more unprocessed packets; cleared when PKTDEC is set 0 = Receive buffer is empty bit 5 DMAIF: DMA Interrupt Flag bit 1 = DMA copy or checksum calculation has completed 0 = No DMA interrupt is pending bit 4 LINKIF: Link Change Interrupt Flag bit 1 = PHY reports that the link status has changed; read PHIR register to clear 0 = Link status has not changed bit 3 TXIF: Transmit Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Transmit request has ended 0 = No transmit interrupt is pending bit 2 Reserved: Maintain as ‘0’ bit 1 TXERIF: Transmit Error Interrupt Flag bit 1 = A transmit error has occurred 0 = No transmit error has occurred bit 0 RXERIF: Receive Error Interrupt Flag bit 1 = A packet was aborted because there is insufficient buffer space or the packet count is 255 0 = No receive error interrupt is pending DS39662B-page 66 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 REGISTER 12-4: PHIE: PHY INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 r r r r r r r r bit 15 bit 8 R-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 r r r PLNKIE r r PGEIE r bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15-6 Reserved: Write as ‘0’, ignore on read bit 5 Reserved: Maintain as ‘0’ bit 4 PLNKIE: PHY Link Change Interrupt Enable bit 1 = PHY link change interrupt is enabled 0 = PHY link change interrupt is disabled bit 3-2 Reserved: Write as ‘0’, ignore on read bit 1 PGEIE: PHY Global Interrupt Enable bit 1 = PHY interrupts are enabled 0 = PHY interrupts are disabled bit 0 x = Bit is unknown Reserved: Maintain as ‘0’ REGISTER 12-5: PHIR: PHY INTERRUPT REQUEST (FLAG) REGISTER R-x R-x R-x R-x R-x R-x R-x R-x r r r r r r r r bit 15 bit 8 R-x R-x R-0 R/SC-0 R-0 R/SC-0 R-x R-0 r r r PLNKIF r PGIF r r bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit SC = Self-clearing bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15-6 Reserved: Do not modify bit 5 Reserved: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 PLNKIF: PHY Link Change Interrupt Flag bit 1 = PHY link status has changed since PHIR was last read; resets to ‘0’ when read 0 = PHY link status has not changed since PHIR was last read bit 3 Reserved: Read as ‘0’ bit 2 PGIF: PHY Global Interrupt Flag bit 1 = One or more enabled PHY interrupts have occurred since PHIR was last read; resets to ‘0’ when read 0 = No PHY interrupts have occurred bit 1 Reserved: Do not modify bit 0 Reserved: Read as ‘0’ © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 67
ENC28J60 12.1.2 RECEIVE ERROR INTERRUPT FLAG (RXERIF) The Receive Error Interrupt Flag (RXERIF) is used to indicate a receive buffer overflow condition. Alternately, this interrupt may indicate that too many packets are in the receive buffer and more cannot be stored without overflowing the EPKTCNT register. When a packet is being received and the receive buffer runs completely out of space, or EPKTCNT is 255 and cannot be incremented, the packet being received will be aborted (permanently lost) and the EIR.RXERIF bit will be set to ‘1’. Once set, RXERIF can only be cleared by the host controller or by a Reset condition. If the receive error interrupt and INT interrupt are enabled (EIE.RXERIE = 1 and EIE.INTIE = 1), an interrupt is generated by driving the INT pin low. If the receive error interrupt is not enabled (EIE.RXERIE = 0 or EIE.INTIE = 0), the host controller may poll the ENC28J60 for the RXERIF and take appropriate action. Normally, upon the receive error condition, the host controller would process any packets pending from the receive buffer and then make additional room for future packets by advancing the ERXRDPT registers (low byte first) and decrementing the EPKTCNT register. See Section 7.2.4 “Freeing Receive Buffer Space” for more information on processing packets. Once processed, the host controller should use the BFC command to clear the EIR.RXERIF bit. 12.1.3 2. 3. 4. 5. Excessive collisions occurred as defined by the Retransmission Maximum (RETMAX) bits in the MACLCON1 register. A late collision occurred as defined by the Collision Window (COLWIN) bits in the MACLCON2 register. A collision after transmitting 64 bytes occurred (ESTAT.LATECOL set). The transmission was unable to gain an opportunity to transmit the packet because the medium was constantly occupied for too long. The deferral limit (2.4287 ms) was reached and the MACON4.DEFER bit was clear. An attempt to transmit a packet larger than the maximum frame length defined by the MAMXFL registers was made without setting the MACON3.HFRMEN bit or per packet POVERRIDE and PHUGEEN bits. DS39662B-page 68 After a transmit abort, the TXRTS bit will be cleared, the ESTAT.TXABRT bit will be set and the transmit status vector will be written at ETXND + 1. The MAC will not automatically attempt to retransmit the packet. The host controller may wish to read the transmit status vector and LATECOL bit to determine the cause of the abort. After determining the problem and solution, the host controller should clear the LATECOL (if set) and TXABRT bits so that future aborts can be detected accurately. In Full-Duplex mode, condition 5 is the only one that should cause this interrupt. Collisions and other problems related to sharing the network are not possible on full-duplex networks. The conditions which cause the transmit error interrupt meet the requirements of the transmit interrupt. As a result, when this interrupt occurs, TXIF will also be simultaneously set. 12.1.4 TRANSMIT ERROR INTERRUPT FLAG (TXERIF) The Transmit Error Interrupt Flag (TXERIF) is used to indicate that a transmit abort has occurred. An abort can occur because of any of the following: 1. Upon any of these conditions, the EIR.TXERIF flag is set to ‘1’. Once set, it can only be cleared by the host controller or by a Reset condition. If the transmit error interrupt is enabled (EIE.TXERIE = 1 and EIE.INTIE = 1), an interrupt is generated by driving the INT pin low for one OSC1 period. If the transmit error interrupt is not enabled (EIE.TXERIE = 0 or EIE.INTIE = 0), the host controller may poll the ENC28J60 for the TXERIF and take appropriate action. Once the interrupt is processed, the host controller should use the BFC command to clear the EIR.TXERIF bit. TRANSMIT INTERRUPT FLAG (TXIF) The Transmit Interrupt Flag (TXIF) is used to indicate that the requested packet transmission has ended (ECON1.TXRTS has transitioned from ‘1’ to ‘0’). Upon transmission completion, abort or transmission cancellation by the host controller, the EIR.TXIF flag will be set to ‘1’. If the host controller did not clear the TXRTS bit and the ESTAT.TXABRT bit is not set, then the packet was successfully transmitted. Once TXIF is set, it can only be cleared by the host controller or by a Reset condition. If the transmit interrupt is enabled (EIE.TXIE = 1 and EIE.INTIE = 1), an interrupt is generated by driving the INT pin low. If the transmit interrupt is not enabled (EIE.TXIE = 0 or EIE.INTIE = 0), the host controller may poll the ENC28J60 for the TXIF bit and take appropriate action. Once processed, the host controller should use the BFC command to clear the EIR.TXIF bit. Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 12.1.5 LINK CHANGE INTERRUPT FLAG (LINKIF) 12.1.6 The LINKIF indicates that the link status has changed. The actual current link status can be obtained from the PHSTAT1.LLSTAT or PHSTAT2.LSTAT (see Register 3-5 and Register 3-6). Unlike other interrupt sources, the link status change interrupt is created in the integrated PHY module; additional steps must be taken to enable it. By Reset default, LINKIF is never set for any reason. To receive it, the host controller must set the PHIE.PLNKIE and PGEIE bits. After setting the two PHY interrupt enable bits, the LINKIF bit will then shadow the contents of the PHIR.PGIF bit. The PHY only supports one interrupt, so the PGIF bit will always be the same as the PHIR.PLNKIF bit (when both PHY enable bits are set). Once LINKIF is set, it can only be cleared by the host controller or by a Reset. If the link change interrupt is enabled (EIE.LINKIE = 1, EIE.INTIE = 1, PHIE.PLNKIE = 1 and PHIE.PGEIE = 1), an interrupt will be generated by driving the INT pin low. If the link change interrupt is not enabled (EIE.LINKIE = 0, EIE.INTIE = 0, PHIE.PLNKIE = 0 or PHIE.PGEIE = 0), the host controller may poll the ENC28J60 for the PHIR.PLNKIF bit and take appropriate action. The LINKIF bit is read-only. Because reading from PHY registers requires non-negligible time, the host controller may instead set PHIE.PLNKIE and PHIE.PGEIE and then poll the EIR.LINKIF bit. Performing an MII read on the PHIR register will clear the LINKIF, PGIF and PLNKIF bits automatically and allow for future link status change interrupts. See Section 3.3 “PHY Registers” for information on accessing the PHY registers. DMA INTERRUPT FLAG (DMAIF) The DMA interrupt indicates that the DMA module has completed its memory copy or checksum calculation (ECON1.DMAST has transitioned from ‘1’ to ‘0’). Additionally, this interrupt will be caused if the host controller cancels a DMA operation by manually clearing the DMAST bit. Once set, DMAIF can only be cleared by the host controller or by a Reset condition. If the DMA interrupt is enabled (EIE.DMAIE = 1 and EIE.INTIE = 1), an interrupt is generated by driving the INT pin low. If the DMA interrupt is not enabled (EIE.DMAIE = 0 or EIE.INTIE = 0), the host controller may poll the ENC28J60 for the DMAIF and take appropriate action. Once processed, the host controller should use the BFC command to clear the EIR.DMAIF bit. 12.1.7 RECEIVE PACKET PENDING INTERRUPT FLAG (PKTIF) The Receive Packet Pending Interrupt Flag (PKTIF) is used to indicate the presence of one or more data packets in the receive buffer and to provide a notification means for the arrival of new packets. When the receive buffer has at least one packet in it, EIR.PKTIF will be set. In other words, this interrupt flag will be set anytime the Ethernet Packet Count register (EPKTCNT) is non-zero. If the receive packet pending interrupt is enabled (EIE.PKTIE = 1 and EIE.INTIE = 1), an interrupt will be generated by driving the INT pin low whenever a new packet is successfully received and written into the receive buffer. If the receive packet pending interrupt is not enabled (EIE.PKTIE = 0 or EIE.INTIE = 0), the host controller will not be notified when new packets arrive. However, it may poll the PKTIF bit and take appropriate action. The PKTIF bit can only be cleared by the host controller or by a Reset condition. In order to clear PKTIF, the EPKTCNT register must be decremented to ‘0’. See Section 7.2 “Receiving Packets” for more information about clearing the EPKTCNT register. If the last data packet in the receive buffer is processed, EPKTCNT will become zero and the PKTIF bit will automatically be cleared. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 69
ENC28J60 12.2 12.2.1 Wake-On-LAN/Remote Wake-up Wake-On-LAN or Remote Wake-up is useful in conserving system power. The host controller and other subsystems can be put in Low-Power mode and be woken up by the ENC28J60 when a wake-up packet is received from a remote station. The ENC28J60 must not be in Power-Save mode and the transmit and receive modules must be enabled in order to receive a wake-up packet. The ENC28J60 wakes up the host controller via the INT signal when the Interrupt Mask registers are properly configured. The receive filter can also be set up to only receive a specific wake-up packet (see Register 8-1 for available options). Section 12.2.1 “Setup Steps for Waking Up on a Magic Packet” shows the steps necessary in configuring the ENC28J60 to send an interrupt signal to the host controller upon the reception of a Magic packet. DS39662B-page 70 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. SETUP STEPS FOR WAKING UP ON A MAGIC PACKET Set ERXFCON.CRCEN and ERXFCON.MPEN. Service all pending packets. Set EIE.PKTIE and EIE.INTIE. Set up the host controller to wake-up on an external interrupt INT signal. Put the host controller and other subsystems to Sleep to save power. Once a Magic packet is received, the EPKTCNT is incremented to ‘1’, which causes the EIR.PKTIF bit to set. In turn, the ESTAT.INT bit is set and the INT signal is driven low, causing the host to wake-up. Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 13.0 DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS CONTROLLER 13.1 To copy memory within the buffer: The ENC28J60 incorporates a dual purpose DMA controller which can be used to copy data between locations within the 8-Kbyte memory buffer. It can also be used to calculate a 16-bit checksum which is compatible with various industry standard protocols, including TCP and IP. When a DMA operation begins, the EDMAST register pair is copied into an Internal Source Pointer. The DMA will execute on one byte at a time and then increment the Internal Source Pointer. However, if a byte is processed and the Internal Source Pointer is equal to the Receive Buffer End Pointer, ERXND, the Source Pointer will not be incremented. Instead, the Internal Source Pointer will be loaded with the Receive Buffer Start Pointer, ERXST. In this way, the DMA will follow the circular FIFO structure of the receive buffer and received packets can be processed using one operation. The DMA operation will end when the Internal Source Pointer matches the EDMAND Pointer. While any DMA operation is in progress, the DMA Pointers and the ECON1.CSUMEN bit should not be modified. The DMA operation can be canceled at any time by clearing the ECON1.DMAST bit. No registers will change; however, some memory bytes may already have been copied if a DMA copy was in progress. Note 1: If the EDMAND Pointer cannot be reached because of the receive buffer wrapping behavior, the DMA operation will never end. 2: By design, the DMA module cannot be used to copy only one byte (EDMAST = EDMAND). An attempt to do so will overwrite all memory in the buffer and may never end. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Copying Memory 1. 2. 3. 4. Appropriately program the EDMAST, EDMAND and EDMADST register pairs. The EDMAST registers should point to the first byte to copy from, the EDMAND registers should point to the last byte to copy and the EDMADST registers should point to the first byte in the destination range. The destination range will always be linear, never wrapping at any values except from 8191 to 0 (the 8-Kbyte memory boundary). Extreme care should be taken when programming the Start and End Pointers to prevent a never ending DMA operation which would overwrite the entire 8-Kbyte buffer. If an interrupt at the end of the copy process is desired, set EIE.DMAIE and EIE.INTIE and clear EIR.DMAIF. Verify that ECON1.CSUMEN is clear. Start the DMA copy by setting ECON1.DMAST. If a transmit operation is in progress (TXRTS set) while the DMAST bit is set, the ENC28J60 will wait until the transmit operation is complete before attempting to do the DMA copy. This possible delay is required because the DMA and transmission engine share the same memory access port. When the copy is complete, the DMA hardware will clear the DMAST bit, set the DMAIF bit and generate an interrupt (if enabled). The Pointers and the EDMACS registers will not be modified. After the DMA module has been initialized and has begun its copy, two main clock cycles will be required for each byte copied. As a result, if a maximum size 1518-byte packet was copied, the DMA module would require slightly more than 121.44 μs to complete. The time required to copy a minimum size packet of 64 bytes would be dominated by the time required to configure the DMA. Preliminary DS39662B-page 71
ENC28J60 13.2 Checksum Calculations The checksum calculation logic treats the source data as a series of 16-bit big-endian integers. If the source range contains an odd number of bytes, a padding byte of 00h is effectively added to the end of the series for purposes of calculating the checksum. The calculated checksum is the 16-bit one’s complement of the one’s complement sum of all 16-bit integers. For example, if the bytes included in the checksum were {89h, ABh, CDh}, the checksum would begin by computing 89ABh + CD00h. A carry out of the 16th bit would occur in the example, so in 16-bit one’s complement arithmetic, it would be added back to the first bit. The resulting value of 56ACh would finally be complemented to achieve a checksum of A953h. Pointers will not be modified and no memory will be written to. The EDMACSH and EDMACSL registers will contain the calculated checksum. The host controller may write this value into a packet, compare this value with a received checksum, or use it for other purposes. Various protocols, such as TCP and IP, have a checksum field inside a range of data which the checksum covers. If such a packet is received and the host controller needs to validate the checksum, it can do the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. To calculate a checksum: 1. Program the EDMAST and EDMAND register pairs to point to the first and last bytes of buffer data to be included in the checksum. Care should be taken when programming these Pointers to prevent a never ending checksum calculation due to receive buffer wrapping. To generate an optional interrupt when the checksum calculation is done, clear EIR.DMAIF, set EIE.DMAIE and set EIE.INTIE. Start the calculation by setting ECON1.CSUMEN and ECON1.DMAST. 2. 3. Writing to the receive buffer is permitted when the write address is protected by means of the ERXRDPT Pointers. See Section 7.2 “Receiving Packets” for additional information. The IP checksum has unique mathematical properties which may be used in some cases to reduce the processing requirements further. Writing to the receive buffer may be unnecessary in some applications. When the checksum is finished being calculated, the hardware will clear the DMAST bit, set the DMAIF bit and an interrupt will be generated if enabled. The DMA TABLE 13-1: Read the checksum from the packet and save it to a temporary location Write zeros to the checksum field. Calculate a new checksum using the DMA controller. Compare the results with the saved checksum from step 1. When operating the DMA in Checksum mode, it will take one main clock cycle for every byte included in the checksum. As a result, if a checksum over 1446 bytes were performed, the DMA module would require slightly more than 57.84 μs to complete the operation. SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH THE DMA CONTROLLER Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page EIE INTIE PKTIE DMAIE LINKIE TXIE r TXERIE RXERIE 13 EIR — PKTIF DMAIF LINKIF TXIF r TXERIF RXERIF 13 TXRST RXRST DMAST CSUMEN TXRTS RXEN BSEL1 BSEL0 13 Register Name ECON1 ERXNDL RX End Low Byte (ERXND<7:0>) — ERXNDH — — 13 RX End High Byte (ERXND<12:8>) 13 EDMASTL EDMASTH EDMANDL EDMANDH EDMADSTL EDMADSTH EDMACSL DMA Start Low Byte (EDMAST<7:0>) — — — DMA Start High Byte (EDMAST<12:8>) DMA End Low Byte (EDMAND<7:0>) — — — DMA End High Byte (EDMAND<12:8>) DMA Destination Low Byte (EDMADST<7:0>) — — — DMA Destination High Byte (EDMADST<12:8>) DMA Checksum Low Byte (EDMACS<7:0>) 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 EDMACSH DMA Checksum High Byte (EDMACS<15:8>) 13 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used with the DMA controller. DS39662B-page 72 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 14.0 POWER-DOWN When normal operation is desired, the host controller must perform a slightly modified procedure: The ENC28J60 may be commanded to power-down via the SPI interface. When powered down, it will no longer be able to transmit and receive any packets. 1. 2. Wake-up by clearing ECON2.PWRSV. Wait at least 300 μs for the PHY to stabilize. To accomplish the delay, the host controller may poll ESTAT.CLKRDY and wait for it to become set. Restore receive capability by setting ECON1.RXEN. To maximize power savings: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn off packet reception by clearing ECON1.RXEN. Wait for any in-progress packets to finish being received by polling ESTAT.RXBUSY. This bit should be clear before proceeding. Wait for any current transmissions to end by confirming ECON1.TXRTS is clear. Set ECON2.VRPS (if not already set). Enter Sleep by setting ECON2.PWRSV. All MAC, MII and PHY registers become inaccessible as a result. Setting PWRSV also clears ESTAT.CLKRDY automatically. 3. After leaving Sleep mode, there is a delay of many milliseconds before a new link is established (assuming an appropriate link partner is present). The host controller may wish to wait until the link is established before attempting to transmit any packets. The link status can be determined by polling the PHSTAT2.LSTAT bit. Alternatively, the link change interrupt may be used if it is enabled. See Section 12.1.5 “Link Change Interrupt Flag (LINKIF)” for additional details. In Sleep mode, all registers and buffer memory will maintain their states. The ETH registers and buffer memory will still be accessible by the host controller. Additionally, the clock driver will continue to operate. The CLKOUT function will be unaffected (see Section 2.3 “CLKOUT Pin”). TABLE 14-1: Name ESTAT ECON2 ECON1 SUMMARY OF REGISTERS USED WITH POWER-DOWN Bit 7 Bit 6 INT BUFER AUTOINC PKTDEC TXRST RXRST Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page r LATECOL — RXBUSY TXABRT CLKRDY 13 PWRSV r VRPS — — — 13 DMAST CSUMEN TXRTS RXEN BSEL1 BSEL0 13 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’, r = reserved bit. Shaded cells are not used for power-down. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 73
ENC28J60 NOTES: DS39662B-page 74 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 15.0 BUILT-IN SELF-TEST CONTROLLER The BIST controller is operated through four registers: The ENC28J60 features a Built-in Self-Test (BIST) module which is designed to confirm proper operation of each bit in the 8-Kbyte memory buffer. Although it is primarily useful for testing during manufacturing, it remains present and available for diagnostic purposes by the user. The controller writes to all locations in the buffer memory and requires several pieces of hardware shared by normal Ethernet operations. Thus, the BIST should only be used on Reset or after necessary hardware is freed. When the BIST is used, the ECON1 register’s DMAST, RXEN and TXRTS bits should all be clear. REGISTER 15-1: • EBSTCON register (control and status register) • EBSTSD register (fill seed/initial shift value) • EBSTCSH and EBSTCSL registers (high and low bytes of generated checksum) The EBSTCON register (Register 15-1) controls the module’s overall operation, selecting the testing modes and starting the self-test process. The bit pattern for memory tests is provided by the EBSTSD seed register; its content is either used directly, or as the seed for a pseudo-random number generator, depending on the Test mode. EBSTCON: ETHERNET SELF-TEST CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PSV2 PSV1 PSV0 PSEL TMSEL1 TMSEL0 TME BISTST bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 PSV2:PSV0: Pattern Shift Value bits When TMSEL<1:0> = 10: The bits in EBSTSD will shift left by this amount after writing to each memory location. When TMSEL<1:0> = 00, 01 or 11: This value is ignored. bit 4 PSEL: Port Select bit 1 = DMA and BIST modules will swap ports when accessing the memory 0 = Normal configuration bit 3-2 TMSEL1:TMSEL0: Test Mode Select bits 11 = Reserved 10 = Pattern shift fill 01 = Address fill 00 = Random data fill bit 1 TME: Test Mode Enable bit 1 = Enable Test mode 0 = Disable Test mode bit 0 BISTST: Built-in Self-Test Start/Busy bit 1 = Test in progress; cleared automatically when test is done 0 = No test running © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 75
ENC28J60 15.1 Using the BIST When the BIST controller is started, it will fill the entire buffer with the data generated for the current test configuration and it will also calculate a checksum of the data as it is written. When the BIST is complete, the EBSTCS registers will be updated with the checksum. The host controller will be able to determine if the test passed or failed by using the DMA module to calculate a checksum of all memory. The resulting checksum generated by the DMA should match the BIST checksum. If after any properly executed test, the checksums differ, a hardware fault may be suspected. The BIST controller supports 3 different operations: The ports through which the BIST and DMA modules access the dual port SRAM can be swapped for each of the four Test modes to ensure proper read/write capability from both ports. To use the BIST: 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Program the EDMAST register pair to 0000h. Program EDMAND and ERXND register pairs to 1FFFh. Configure the DMA for checksum generation by setting CSUMEN in ECON1. Write the seed/initial shift value byte to the EBSTSD register (this is not necessary if Address Fill mode is used). Enable Test mode, select the desired test, select the desired port configuration for the test. Start the BIST by setting EBSTCON.BISTST. Start the DMA checksum by setting DMAST in ECON1. The DMA controller will read the memory at the same rate the BIST controller will write to it, so the DMA can be started any time after the BIST is started. Wait for the DMA to complete by polling the DMAST bit or receiving the DMA interrupt (if enabled). Compare the EDMACS registers with the EBSTCS registers. To ensure full testing, the test should be redone with the Port Select bit, PSEL, altered. When not using Address Fill mode, additional tests may be done with different seed values to gain greater confidence that the memory is working as expected. DS39662B-page 76 The BIST module requires one main clock cycle for each byte that it writes into the RAM. The DMA module’s checksum implementation requires the same time but it can be started immediately after the BIST is started. As a result, the minimum time required to do one test pass is slightly greater than 327.68 μs. 15.2 • Random Data Fill • Address Fill • Pattern Shift Fill 1. 2. At any time during a test, the test can be canceled by clearing the BISTST, DMAST and TME bits. While the BIST is filling memory, the EBSTSD register should not be accessed, nor should any configuration changes occur. When the BIST completes its memory fill and checksum generation, the BISTST bit will automatically be cleared. Random Data Fill Mode In Random Data Fill mode, the BIST controller will write pseudo-random data into the buffer. The random data is generated by a Linear Feedback Shift Register (LFSR) implementation. The random number generator is seeded by the initial contents of the EBSTSD register and the register will have new contents when the BIST is finished. Because of the LFSR implementation, an initial seed of zero will generate a continuous pattern of zeros. As a result, a non-zero seed value will likely perform a more extensive memory test. Selecting the same seed for two separate trials will allow a repeat of the same test. 15.3 Address Fill Mode In Address Fill mode, the BIST controller will write the low byte of each memory address into the associated buffer location. As an example, after the BIST is operated, the location 0000h should have 00h in it, location 0001h should have 01h in it, location 0E2Ah should have 2Ah in it and so on. With this fixed memory pattern, the BIST and DMA modules should always generate a checksum of F807h. The host controller may use Address Fill mode to confirm that the BIST and DMA modules themselves are both operating as intended. 15.4 Pattern Shift Fill Mode In Pattern Shift Fill mode, the BIST controller writes the value of EBSTSD into memory location 0000h. Before writing to location 0001h, it shifts the contents of EBSTSD to the left by the value specified by the PSV2:PSV0 bits in EBSTCON. Bits that leave the most significant end of EBSTSD are wrapped around to the least significant side. This shift is repeated for each new address. As a result of shifting the data, a checkerboard pattern can be written into the buffer memory to confirm that adjacent memory elements do not affect each other when accessed. Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 TABLE 15-1: Name ECON1 ERXNDL ERXNDH EDMASTL EDMASTH EDMANDL EDMANDH SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH THE SELF-TEST CONTROLLER Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page TXRST RXRST DMAST CSUMEN TXRTS RXEN BSEL1 BSEL0 13 RX End Low Byte (ERXND<7:0>) — — — RX End High Byte (ERXND<12:8>) DMA Start Low Byte (EDMAST<7:0>) — — — 13 13 13 DMA Start High Byte (EDMAST<12:8>) 13 DMA End Low Byte (EDMAND<7:0>) — — — 13 DMA End High Byte (EDMAND<12:8>) 13 EDMACSL DMA Checksum Low Byte (EDMACS<7:0>) 13 EDMACSH DMA Checksum High Byte (EDMACS<15:8>) 13 EBSTSD Built-in Self-Test Fill Seed (EBSTSD<7:0>) EBSTCON PSV2 PSV1 PSV0 PSEL 14 TMSEL1 TMSEL0 TME BISTST 14 EBSTCSL Built-in Self-Test Checksum Low Byte (EBSTCS<7:0>) 14 EBSTCSH Built-in Self-Test Checksum High Byte (EBSTCS<15:8>) 14 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 77
ENC28J60 NOTES: DS39662B-page 78 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 16.0 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Absolute Maximum Ratings Storage temperature ...............................................................................................................................-65°C to +150°C Ambient temperature under bias............................................................................................. -40°C to +85°C (Industrial) 0°C to +70°C (Commercial) Voltage on VDD, VDDOSC, VDDPLL, VDDRX, and VDDTX, with respect to VSS ................................................ -0.3V to 3.6V Voltage on RESET, CS, SCK and SI, with respect to VSS ........................................................................... -0.3V to 6.0V Voltage on CLKOUT, SO, OSC1, OSC2, LEDA and LEDB, with respect to VSS ...............................-0.3V to VDD + 0.3V Voltage on TPIN+/- and TPOUT+/- with respect to VSS ............................................................................... -0.3V to 5.0V VCAP with respect to VSS (Note 1) ............................................................................................................. -0.3V to 2.75V ESD protection on all pins.......................................................................................................................................... 2 kV Current sourced or sunk by LEDA, LEDB ...............................................................................................................12 mA Current sourced or sunk by CLKOUT .......................................................................................................................8 mA Current sourced or sunk by INT and SO...................................................................................................................4 mA Note 1: VCAP is not designed to supply an external load. No external voltage should be applied to this pin. † Notice: Stresses above those listed under “Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at those or any other conditions above those indicated in the operational listings of this specification is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 79
ENC28J60 16.1 DC Characteristics: ENC28J60 (Industrial and Commercial) DC CHARACTERISTICS Param. No. Sym Characteristic D001 VDD Supply Voltage D002 VPOR VDD Power-on Reset Voltage D003 SVDD VDD Rise Rate to ensure internal Power-on Reset signal VIH Standard Operating Conditions -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C, 3.10V ≤ VDD ≤ 3.60V (Industrial) 0°C ≤ TA ≤ +70°C, 3.10V ≤ VDD ≤ 3.60V (Commercial) Min Typ Max Units Conditions 3.10 3.30 3.60 V — — 0.7 V See section on Power-on Reset for details 0.05 — — V/ms See section on Power-on Reset for details 2.25 — 5.5 V 0.7 VDD — VDD V Input High Voltage D004 SCK, CS, SI, RESET D005 OSC1 VIL Input Low Voltage D006 SCK, CS, SI, RESET VSS — 1.0 V D007 OSC1 VSS — 0.3 VDD V VDD – 0.7 VDD – 0.7 VDD – 0.7 — — — — — — V V V IOH = -12.0 mA (Note 1) IOH = -8.0 mA (Note 1) IOH = -4.0 mA (Note 1) — — — — — — 0.4 0.4 0.4 V V V IOL = 12.0 mA IOL = 8.0 mA IOL = 4.0 mA 74K — 173K Ω All input pins except OSC1 — — ±1 μA CS = RESET = VDD, VSS ≤ VPIN ≤ VDD, pins in high-impedance state (Note 1) OSC1 pin — — ±200 μA OSC1 = VDD (Note 1) Transmitting Ethernet packets — 160 180 mA VDD = 3.30V, FSCK = 10 MHz, SO = Open, LEDA and LEDB open, ECON2<PWRSV> = 0 Active, not transmitting Ethernet packets — 120 — mA VDD = 3.30V, LEDA and LEDB open, ECON2<PWRSV> = 0 Standby Current (Sleep mode) — 1.2 2.0 mA CS = VDD, Inputs tied to VDD or VSS, VDD = 3.3V, TA = 25°C, ECON2<PWRSV> = 1 VOH Output High Voltage LEDA, LEDB CLKOUT INT, SO VOL Output Low Voltage LEDA, LEDB CLKOUT INT, SO RPU Weak Pull-up Resistance IIL Input Leakage Current IDD IDDS Note 1: Operating Current Negative current is defined as current sourced by the pin. DS39662B-page 80 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 TABLE 16-1: AC CHARACTERISTICS: ENC28J60 (INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL) Standard Operating Conditions -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C, 3.10V ≤ VDD ≤ 3.60V (Industrial) 0°C ≤ TA ≤ +70°C, 3.10V ≤ VDD ≤ 3.60V (Commercial) AC CHARACTERISTICS TABLE 16-2: Param. No. OSCILLATOR TIMING CHARACTERISTICS Sym Characteristic Min Max Units FOSC Clock In Frequency 25 25 MHz TOSC Clock In Period 40 40 ns TDUTY Duty Cycle (external clock input) 40 60 % Δf Clock Tolerance — ±50 ppm Min Max Conditions Units TABLE 16-3: Param. No. RESET AC CHARACTERISTICS Sym Characteristic trl RESET Pin High Time (between Reset events) 2 — μs tRSTLOW RESET Pin Low Time to trigger Reset 400 — ns Min Max Units ns Conditions TABLE 16-4: Param. No. CLKOUT PIN AC CHARACTERISTICS Sym Characteristic Conditions thCLKOUT 16.5 — tlCLKOUT CLKOUT Pin Low Time 16.5 — ns TDUTY = 50% (Note 1) trCLKOUT CLKOUT Pin Rise Time — 3 ns Measured from 0.1 VDD to 0.9 VDD, Load = 10 pF (Note 1) tfCLKOUT Note 1: CLKOUT Pin High Time TDUTY = 50% (Note 1) CLKOUT Pin Fall Time — 4 ns Measured from 0.9 VDD to 0.1 VDD, Load = 10 pF (Note 1) CLKOUT prescaler is set to divide by one. TABLE 16-5: REQUIREMENTS FOR EXTERNAL MAGNETICS Parameter Min Norm Max Units RX Transformer Turns Ratio — 1:1 — — TX Transformer Turns Ratio — 1:1 — — Insertion Loss 0.0 0.6 1.1 dB Primary Inductance 350 — — μH Transformer Isolation — 1.5 — kV Differential to Common Mode Rejection 40 — — dB Return Loss -16 — — Conditions dB © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary Transformer Center Tap = 3.3V 8 mA bias 0.1 to 10 MHz DS39662B-page 81
ENC28J60 FIGURE 16-1: SPI INPUT TIMING TCSS TCSH TCSD CS SCK TSU THD MSb In SI LSb In 1/FSCK SO High-Impedance FIGURE 16-2: SPI OUTPUT TIMING CS SCK TV SO TDIS TV MSb Out LSb Out 1/FSCK SI LSb In Don’t Care TABLE 16-6: Param. No. Sym SPI INTERFACE AC CHARACTERISTICS Characteristic FSCK 1 Clock Frequency TCSS CS Setup Time Min Max Units DC 20 Conditions MHz 50 — ns 10 — ns ETH registers and memory buffer 210 — ns MAC and MII registers 2 TCSH CS Hold Time 3 TCSD CS Disable Time 50 — ns 4 TSU Data Setup Time 10 — ns 5 THD Data Hold Time 10 — ns 6 TV Output Valid from Clock Low — 10 ns SO Load = 30 pF 7 TDIS Output Disable Time — 10 ns SO Load = 30 pF DS39662B-page 82 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 17.0 PACKAGING INFORMATION 17.1 Package Marking Information 28-Lead SPDIP Example ENC28J60-I/SP e3 0610017 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX YYWWNNN 28-Lead SOIC Example ENC28J60-I/SO e3 0610017 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX YYWWNNN 28-Lead SSOP Example XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX YYWWNNN 28-Lead QFN ENC28J60 -C/SS e3 0610017 Example XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX YYWWNNN ENC28J60 -I/ML e3 0610017 Legend: XX...X Y YY WW NNN e3 * Note: Customer-specific information Year code (last digit of calendar year) Year code (last 2 digits of calendar year) Week code (week of January 1 is week ‘01’) Alphanumeric traceability code Pb-free JEDEC designator for Matte Tin (Sn) This package is Pb-free. The Pb-free JEDEC designator ( e3 ) can be found on the outer packaging for this package. In the event the full Microchip part number cannot be marked on one line, it will be carried over to the next line, thus limiting the number of available characters for customer-specific information. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 83
ENC28J60 17.2 Package Details The following sections give the technical details of the packages. 28-Lead Skinny Plastic Dual In-line (SP) – 300 mil Body (PDIP) E1 D 2 n 1 α E A2 A L c β B1 A1 eB Units Number of Pins Pitch p B Dimension Limits n p INCHES* MIN NOM MILLIMETERS MAX MIN NOM 28 MAX 28 .100 2.54 Top to Seating Plane A .140 .150 .160 3.56 3.81 4.06 Molded Package Thickness A2 .125 .130 .135 3.18 3.30 3.43 Base to Seating Plane A1 .015 8.26 0.38 Shoulder to Shoulder Width E .300 .310 .325 7.62 7.87 Molded Package Width E1 .275 .285 .295 6.99 7.24 7.49 Overall Length D 1.345 1.365 1.385 34.16 34.67 35.18 Tip to Seating Plane L c .125 .130 .135 3.18 3.30 3.43 .008 .012 .015 0.20 0.29 0.38 B1 .040 .053 .065 1.02 1.33 1.65 Lead Thickness Upper Lead Width Lower Lead Width Overall Row Spacing Mold Draft Angle Top B § .016 .019 .022 0.41 0.48 0.56 eB α .320 .350 .430 8.13 8.89 10.92 5 10 15 5 10 15 β Mold Draft Angle Bottom 5 10 15 5 10 15 * Controlling Parameter § Significant Characteristic Notes: Dimension D and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed .010” (0.254mm) per side. JEDEC Equivalent: MO-095 Drawing No. C04-070 DS39662B-page 84 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 28-Lead Plastic Small Outline (SO) – Wide, 300 mil Body (SOIC) E E1 p D B 2 1 n h α 45° c A2 A φ β L Units Dimension Limits n p A1 INCHES* NOM 28 .050 .099 .091 .008 .407 .295 .704 .020 .033 4 .011 .017 12 12 Preliminary MAX MILLIMETERS NOM 28 1.27 2.36 2.50 2.24 2.31 0.10 0.20 10.01 10.34 7.32 7.49 17.65 17.87 0.25 0.50 0.41 0.84 0 4 0.23 0.28 0.36 0.42 0 12 0 12 MAX Number of Pins Pitch Overall Height A .093 .104 2.64 Molded Package Thickness A2 .088 .094 2.39 Standoff § A1 .004 .012 0.30 Overall Width E .394 .420 10.67 Molded Package Width E1 .288 .299 7.59 Overall Length D .695 .712 18.08 Chamfer Distance h .010 .029 0.74 Foot Length L .016 .050 1.27 φ Foot Angle Top 0 8 8 c Lead Thickness .009 .013 0.33 Lead Width B .014 .020 0.51 α Mold Draft Angle Top 0 15 15 β Mold Draft Angle Bottom 0 15 15 * Controlling Parameter § Significant Characteristic Notes: Dimensions D and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed .010” (0.254mm) per side. JEDEC Equivalent: MS-013 Drawing No. C04-052 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. MIN MIN DS39662B-page 85
ENC28J60 28-Lead Plastic Shrink Small Outline (SS) – 209 mil Body, 5.30 mm (SSOP) E E1 p D B 2 1 n A c φ A2 A1 L Units Number of Pins Dimension Limits n p Pitch Overall Height Molded Package Thickness Standoff Overall Width Molded Package Width Overall Length Foot Length Lead Thickness Foot Angle Lead Width A A2 A1 E E1 D L c φ B INCHES MIN .065 .002 .295 .197 .390 .022 .004 0° .009 NOM 28 .026 .069 .307 .209 .402 .030 4° - MILLIMETERS * MAX .079 .073 .323 .220 .413 .037 .010 8° .015 MIN 1.65 0.05 7.49 5.00 9.90 0.55 0.09 0° 0.22 NOM 28 0.65 1.75 7.80 5.30 10.20 0.75 4° - MAX 2.0 1.85 8.20 5.60 10.50 0.95 0.25 8° 0.38 * Controlling Parameter Notes: Dimensions D and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed .010" (0.254mm) per side. Drawing No. C04-073 DS39662B-page 86 Revised 1-12-06 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 28-Lead Plastic Quad Flat No Lead Package (ML) 6x6 mm Body (QFN) – With 0.55 mm Contact Length (Saw Singulated) E2 E EXPOSED METAL PAD (NOTE 2) e D b D2 2 1 K n OPTIONAL INDEX TOP VIEW AREA SEE DETAIL ALTERNATE INDEX INDICATORS L BOTTOM VIEW (NOTE 1) A1 A Units Dimension Limits MILLIMETERS* INCHES MIN Number of Pins DETAIL ALTERNATE PAD OUTLINE MAX NOM n MIN NOM 28 MAX 28 Pitch e Overall Height A .031 .035 .039 0.80 0.90 1.00 Standoff A1 .000 .001 .002 0.00 0.02 0.05 Contact Thickness A3 0.65 BSC .026 BSC 0.20 REF .008 REF E Exposed Pad Length .240 5.90 6.00 6.10 .167 .169 3.89 4.24 4.29 .232 .236 .240 5.90 6.00 6.10 D2 Overall Length .236 .153 D Exposed Pad Width .232 E2 Overall Width .153 .167 .169 3.89 4.24 4.29 Contact Width β .009 .011 .013 0.23 0.28 0.33 Contact Length § L .018 .022 .024 0.45 0.55 0.65 K .008 – – 0.20 – – Contact-to-Exposed Pad § * Controlling Parameter § Significant Characteristic Notes: 1. Pin 1 visual index feature may vary, but must be located within the hatched area. 2. Exposed pad varies according to die attach paddle size. BSC: Basic Dimension. Theoretically exact value shown without tolerances. See ASME Y14.5M REF: Reference Dimension, usually without tolerance, for information purposes only. See ASME Y14.5M JEDEC equivalent: MO-220 Drawing No. C04-105 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary Revised 09-12-05 DS39662B-page 87
ENC28J60 NOTES: DS39662B-page 88 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 INDEX B Block Diagrams Crystal Oscillator Operation .......................................... 5 ENC28J60 Architecture ................................................ 3 Ethernet Buffer Organization ...................................... 18 External Clock Source .................................................. 5 External Connections.................................................... 7 I/O Level Shifting 3-State Buffers ...................................................... 8 AND Gate ............................................................. 8 Interrupt Logic ............................................................. 63 LEDB Polarity Configuration ......................................... 8 Memory Organization.................................................. 11 On-Chip Reset Circuit ................................................. 59 Typical Interface............................................................ 4 Broadcast Filter ................................................................... 52 Built-in Self-Test Controller ................................................. 75 Address Fill Mode ....................................................... 76 Associated Registers .................................................. 77 EBSTCS registers....................................................... 76 EBSTSD Register ....................................................... 76 Pattern Shift Fill Mode................................................. 76 Random Data Fill Mode .............................................. 76 Use.............................................................................. 76 C Checksum Calculations ...................................................... 72 CLKOUT Pin ......................................................................... 6 Control Register Map .......................................................... 12 Control Register Summary............................................ 13–14 Control Registers ................................................................ 12 Customer Change Notification Service ............................... 91 Customer Notification Service............................................. 91 Customer Support ............................................................... 91 D DMA Controller ................................................................... 71 Access to Buffers ........................................................ 17 Associated Registers .................................................. 72 Checksum Calculations .............................................. 72 Copying Memory......................................................... 71 Duplex-Mode Configuration and Negotiation .................................... 53 F Filtering Using AND Logic ........................................................ 50 Using OR Logic .......................................................... 49 Flow Control........................................................................ 55 Associated Registers.................................................. 57 Full-Duplex Mode ....................................................... 55 Half-Duplex Mode....................................................... 55 Sample Full-Duplex Network (Diagram) ..................... 55 Full-Duplex-Mode Operation.................................................................... 53 H Half-Duplex-Mode Operation.................................................................... 53 Hash Table Filter ................................................................ 52 I I/O Level Shifting .................................................................. 8 Using 3-State Buffers ................................................... 8 Using AND Gates ......................................................... 8 Initialization ......................................................................... 33 MAC Settings.............................................................. 34 PHY Settings .............................................................. 37 Receive Buffer ............................................................ 33 Receive Filters............................................................ 33 Transmit Buffer ........................................................... 33 Waiting for OST .......................................................... 33 Interrupts ............................................................................ 63 DMA Flag (DMAIF) ..................................................... 69 INT Enable (INTIE) ..................................................... 64 Link Change Flag (LINKIF)......................................... 69 Receive Error Flag (RXERIF) ..................................... 68 Receive Packet Pending Flag (PKTIF) ....................... 69 Transmit Error Flag (TXERIF) .................................... 68 Transmit Interrupt Flag (TXIF) .................................... 68 L LED Configuration ................................................................ 8 LEDB Polarity and Reset Configuration................................ 8 M E Electrical Characteristics..................................................... 79 Absolute Maximum Ratings ........................................ 79 AC Characteristics ...................................................... 81 CLKOUT Pin AC ......................................................... 81 DC Characteristics ...................................................... 80 Oscillator Timing ......................................................... 81 Requirements for External Magnetics......................... 81 Reset AC..................................................................... 81 SPI Interface AC ......................................................... 82 ENC28J60 Block Diagram .................................................... 3 EREVID Register ................................................................ 22 Errata .................................................................................... 2 Ethernet Buffer .................................................................... 17 Organization (Diagram)............................................... 18 Ethernet Module Transmitting and Receiving Data Receive Packet Layout ....................................... 43 Transmit Packet Layout ...................................... 40 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Ethernet Overview .............................................................. 31 External Connections (Diagram)........................................... 7 Magic Packet Filter ............................................................. 52 Magnetics and External Components................................... 7 Memory Organization ......................................................... 11 Multicast Filter..................................................................... 52 O Oscillator............................................................................... 5 CLKOUT Transition ...................................................... 6 Crystal Oscillator .......................................................... 5 External Clock Source .................................................. 5 Start-up Timer............................................................... 5 P Packaging Information ........................................................ 83 Details......................................................................... 84 Marking....................................................................... 83 Preliminary DS39662B-page 89
ENC28J60 Packet Format..................................................................... 31 CRC Field ................................................................... 32 Data Field.................................................................... 32 Destination Address .................................................... 32 Padding Field .............................................................. 32 Preamble/Start-of-Frame Delimiter ............................. 31 Source Address .......................................................... 32 Type/Length Field ....................................................... 32 Pattern Match Filter............................................................. 51 Per Packet Control Byte Format ......................................... 39 PHID Registers ................................................................... 22 PHSTAT Registers.............................................................. 22 PHY Register Summary ...................................................... 20 PHY Registers..................................................................... 19 Reading....................................................................... 19 Scanning ..................................................................... 19 Writing ......................................................................... 19 Pinout Diagrams.................................................................... 1 Pinout I/O Descriptions ......................................................... 4 Power-Down........................................................................ 73 Associated Registers .................................................. 73 Power-on Reset (POR) ....................................................... 60 R Read Control Register (RCR) ............................................. 27 Reader Response ............................................................... 92 Reading and Writing to the Buffer ....................................... 17 Receive Buffer..................................................................... 17 Receive Filters .................................................................... 47 Broadcast .................................................................... 52 Hash Table.................................................................. 52 Magic Packet .............................................................. 52 Magic Packet Format .................................................. 52 Multicast ...................................................................... 52 Pattern Match.............................................................. 51 Pattern Match Filter Format ........................................ 51 Unicast ........................................................................ 51 Using AND Logic......................................................... 50 Using OR Logic ........................................................... 49 Receive Only Reset ............................................................ 60 Receiving Packets............................................................... 43 Associated Registers .................................................. 46 Calculating Buffer Free Space .................................... 45 Calculating Free Receive Buffer Space ...................... 45 Calculating Random Access Address ......................... 44 Freeing Buffer Space .................................................. 45 Reading....................................................................... 44 Status Vectors............................................................. 44 Registers EBSTCON (Ethernet Self-Test Control)...................... 75 ECOCON (Clock Output Control) ................................. 6 ECON1 (Ethernet Control 1) ....................................... 15 ECON2 (Ethernet Control 2) ....................................... 16 EFLOCON (Ethernet Flow Control) ............................ 56 EIE (Ethernet Interrupt Enable)................................... 65 EIR (Ethernet Interrupt Request, Flag) ....................... 66 ERXFCON (Ethernet Receive Filter Control) .............. 48 ESTAT (Ethernet Status) ............................................ 64 MABBIPG (MAC Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap)................................................ 36 MACON1 (MAC Control 1).......................................... 34 MACON3 (MAC Control 3).......................................... 35 MACON4 (MAC Control 4).......................................... 36 MICMD (MII Command) .............................................. 21 MISTAT (MII Status) ................................................... 21 PHCON1 (PHY Control 1)........................................... 61 DS39662B-page 90 PHCON2 (PHY Control 2) .......................................... 37 PHID (PHY Device ID)................................................ 22 PHIE (PHY Interrupt Enable) ...................................... 67 PHIR (PHY Interrupt Request, Flag)........................... 67 PHLCON (PHY Module LED Control)........................... 9 PHSTAT1 (Physical Layer Status 1)........................... 23 PHSTAT2 (Physical Layer Status 2)........................... 24 Reset .................................................................................. 59 MAC and PHY Subsystem Resets ............................. 61 Power-on Reset .......................................................... 60 Receive Only Reset .................................................... 60 System Reset ............................................................. 60 Transmit Only Reset ................................................... 60 S Serial Peripheral Interface. See SPI. SPI Bit Field Clear Command............................................ 29 Bit Field Set Command............................................... 29 Instruction Set............................................................. 26 Overview..................................................................... 25 Read Buffer Memory Command ................................. 28 Read Control Register Command............................... 27 System Reset Command............................................ 30 Write Buffer Memory Command ................................. 29 Write Control Register Command............................... 28 System Reset ..................................................................... 60 T Termination Requirement ..................................................... 7 Timing Diagrams CLKOUT Transition ...................................................... 6 Read Control Register Command (ETH) .................... 27 Read Control Register Command (MAC/MII) ............. 27 SPI Input ..................................................................... 82 SPI Input Timing ......................................................... 25 SPI Output .................................................................. 82 SPI Output Timing ...................................................... 25 System Reset Command Sequence........................... 30 Write Buffer Memory Command Sequence ................ 29 Write Control Register Command Sequence.............. 28 Transmit Buffer ................................................................... 17 Transmit Only Reset ........................................................... 60 Transmitting Packets .......................................................... 39 Associated Registers .................................................. 42 Status Vectors ............................................................ 41 Typical ENC28J60-Based Interface...................................... 4 U Unicast Filter....................................................................... 51 W WWW, On-Line Support ....................................................... 2 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 THE MICROCHIP WEB SITE CUSTOMER SUPPORT Microchip provides online support via our WWW site at www.microchip.com. This web site is used as a means to make files and information easily available to customers. Accessible by using your favorite Internet browser, the web site contains the following information: Users of Microchip products can receive assistance through several channels: • Product Support – Data sheets and errata, application notes and sample programs, design resources, user’s guides and hardware support documents, latest software releases and archived software • General Technical Support – Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), technical support requests, online discussion groups, Microchip consultant program member listing • Business of Microchip – Product selector and ordering guides, latest Microchip press releases, listing of seminars and events, listings of Microchip sales offices, distributors and factory representatives • • • • • Distributor or Representative Local Sales Office Field Application Engineer (FAE) Technical Support Development Systems Information Line Customers should contact their distributor, representative or field application engineer (FAE) for support. Local sales offices are also available to help customers. A listing of sales offices and locations is included in the back of this document. Technical support is available through the web site at: http://support.microchip.com CUSTOMER CHANGE NOTIFICATION SERVICE Microchip’s customer notification service helps keep customers current on Microchip products. Subscribers will receive e-mail notification whenever there are changes, updates, revisions or errata related to a specified product family or development tool of interest. To register, access the Microchip web site at www.microchip.com, click on Customer Change Notification and follow the registration instructions. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 91
ENC28J60 READER RESPONSE It is our intention to provide you with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip product. If you wish to provide your comments on organization, clarity, subject matter, and ways in which our documentation can better serve you, please FAX your comments to the Technical Publications Manager at (480) 792-4150. Please list the following information, and use this outline to provide us with your comments about this document. To: Technical Publications Manager RE: Reader Response Total Pages Sent ________ From: Name Company Address City / State / ZIP / Country Telephone: (_______) _________ - _________ FAX: (______) _________ - _________ Application (optional): Would you like a reply? Device: ENC28J60 Y N Literature Number: DS39662B Questions: 1. What are the best features of this document? 2. How does this document meet your hardware and software development needs? 3. Do you find the organization of this document easy to follow? If not, why? 4. What additions to the document do you think would enhance the structure and subject? 5. What deletions from the document could be made without affecting the overall usefulness? 6. Is there any incorrect or misleading information (what and where)? 7. How would you improve this document? DS39662B-page 92 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ENC28J60 PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM To order or obtain information, e.g., on pricing or delivery, refer to the factory or the listed sales office. PART NO. -X Device Temperature Range Examples: /XX Package Device a) b) ENC28J60: Ethernet Controller w/SPI Interface ENC28J60T: Ethernet Controller w/SPI Interface (Tape and Reel) c) d) e) Temperature Range I = -40°C to +85°C (Industrial) (SPDIP, SOIC and QFN packages only) C = 0°C to +70°C (Commercial) (SSOP packages only) Package SP SO SS ML = = = = f) ENC28J60-I/SP: Industrial temperature, SPDIP package. ENC28J60-I/SO: Industrial temperature, SOIC package. ENC28J60T-I/SO: Tape and Reel, Industrial temperature, SOIC package. ENC28J60-C/SS: Commercial temperature, SSOP package. ENC28J60T-C/SS: Tape and Reel, Comercial temperature, SSOP package. ENC28J60-I/ML: Industrial temperature, QFN package. SPDIP (Skinny Plastic DIP) SOIC (Plastic Small Outline) SSOP (Plastic Shrink Small Outline) QFN (Quad Flat No Lead) © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 93
WORLDWIDE SALES AND SERVICE AMERICAS ASIA/PACIFIC ASIA/PACIFIC EUROPE Corporate Office 2355 West Chandler Blvd. Chandler, AZ 85224-6199 Tel: 480-792-7200 Fax: 480-792-7277 Technical Support: http://support.microchip.com Web Address: www.microchip.com Australia - Sydney Tel: 61-2-9868-6733 Fax: 61-2-9868-6755 India - Bangalore Tel: 91-80-4182-8400 Fax: 91-80-4182-8422 China - Beijing Tel: 86-10-8528-2100 Fax: 86-10-8528-2104 India - New Delhi Tel: 91-11-5160-8631 Fax: 91-11-5160-8632 Austria - Wels Tel: 43-7242-2244-3910 Fax: 43-7242-2244-393 Denmark - Copenhagen Tel: 45-4450-2828 Fax: 45-4485-2829 China - Chengdu Tel: 86-28-8676-6200 Fax: 86-28-8676-6599 India - Pune Tel: 91-20-2566-1512 Fax: 91-20-2566-1513 France - Paris Tel: 33-1-69-53-63-20 Fax: 33-1-69-30-90-79 China - Fuzhou Tel: 86-591-8750-3506 Fax: 86-591-8750-3521 Japan - Yokohama Tel: 81-45-471- 6166 Fax: 81-45-471-6122 Germany - Munich Tel: 49-89-627-144-0 Fax: 49-89-627-144-44 China - Hong Kong SAR Tel: 852-2401-1200 Fax: 852-2401-3431 Korea - Gumi Tel: 82-54-473-4301 Fax: 82-54-473-4302 China - Qingdao Tel: 86-532-8502-7355 Fax: 86-532-8502-7205 Korea - Seoul Tel: 82-2-554-7200 Fax: 82-2-558-5932 or 82-2-558-5934 Asia Pacific Office Suites 3707-14, 37th Floor Tower 6, The Gateway Habour City, Kowloon Hong Kong Tel: 852-2401-1200 Fax: 852-2401-3431 Atlanta Alpharetta, GA Tel: 770-640-0034 Fax: 770-640-0307 Boston Westborough, MA Tel: 774-760-0087 Fax: 774-760-0088 Chicago Itasca, IL Tel: 630-285-0071 Fax: 630-285-0075 Dallas Addison, TX Tel: 972-818-7423 Fax: 972-818-2924 Detroit Farmington Hills, MI Tel: 248-538-2250 Fax: 248-538-2260 Kokomo Kokomo, IN Tel: 765-864-8360 Fax: 765-864-8387 Los Angeles Mission Viejo, CA Tel: 949-462-9523 Fax: 949-462-9608 China - Shanghai Tel: 86-21-5407-5533 Fax: 86-21-5407-5066 Malaysia - Penang Tel: 60-4-646-8870 Fax: 60-4-646-5086 China - Shenyang Tel: 86-24-2334-2829 Fax: 86-24-2334-2393 China - Shenzhen Tel: 86-755-8203-2660 Fax: 86-755-8203-1760 China - Shunde Tel: 86-757-2839-5507 Fax: 86-757-2839-5571 China - Wuhan Tel: 86-27-5980-5300 Fax: 86-27-5980-5118 China - Xian Tel: 86-29-8833-7250 Fax: 86-29-8833-7256 Philippines - Manila Tel: 63-2-634-9065 Fax: 63-2-634-9069 Italy - Milan Tel: 39-0331-742611 Fax: 39-0331-466781 Netherlands - Drunen Tel: 31-416-690399 Fax: 31-416-690340 Spain - Madrid Tel: 34-91-708-08-90 Fax: 34-91-708-08-91 UK - Wokingham Tel: 44-118-921-5869 Fax: 44-118-921-5820 Singapore Tel: 65-6334-8870 Fax: 65-6334-8850 Taiwan - Hsin Chu Tel: 886-3-572-9526 Fax: 886-3-572-6459 Taiwan - Kaohsiung Tel: 886-7-536-4818 Fax: 886-7-536-4803 Taiwan - Taipei Tel: 886-2-2500-6610 Fax: 886-2-2508-0102 Thailand - Bangkok Tel: 66-2-694-1351 Fax: 66-2-694-1350 San Jose Mountain View, CA Tel: 650-215-1444 Fax: 650-961-0286 Toronto Mississauga, Ontario, Canada Tel: 905-673-0699 Fax: 905-673-6509 06/08/06 DS39662B-page 94 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.

More Related Content

PDF
16f88
Alfredo Santillan
 
PDF
Pic 16f877 a
bmsjh
 
PDF
675
Alfredo Santillan
 
PDF
Pic18f4550
Felix Alvarez
 
PDF
6datasheets
Muhammad Iman Santoso
 
PDF
Pic16 f676
veenaarams
 
PDF
14k50 auto
Alfredo Santillan
 
PDF
DATA SHEET PIC12F675
dennisayalalaime
 
16f88
Alfredo Santillan
 
Pic 16f877 a
bmsjh
 
675
Alfredo Santillan
 
Pic18f4550
Felix Alvarez
 
6datasheets
Muhammad Iman Santoso
 
Pic16 f676
veenaarams
 
14k50 auto
Alfredo Santillan
 
DATA SHEET PIC12F675
dennisayalalaime
 

What's hot (14)

PDF
Datasheet
Dario Castro
 
PDF
16f628a
001ripper
 
PDF
Microchip technology kit2 tutorial
Mauro Cunha
 
PDF
16f84 a pic
karlosuri
 
PDF
Datasheet PIC16f887
whendygarcia
 
DOCX
Filterlab tutorial
Claudia Antonio Urquidi
 
PPTX
Winmate trusted mobile security solution
Allan (Yun-Chin) Lin
 
PPSX
Algont
Sergey Olekhov
 
PDF
16 f887
lala
 
PDF
Test
guest1e2941
 
PDF
CCTV Catalogue
Kentua Kayode
 
PPTX
Dr. Marta LaColla - Equine Microchips 101
John Blue
 
PDF
Pic16f87x1a
Luis Gomez
 
PDF
Data Sheet Del 16 F870
Nataly Paredes
 
Datasheet
Dario Castro
 
16f628a
001ripper
 
Microchip technology kit2 tutorial
Mauro Cunha
 
16f84 a pic
karlosuri
 
Datasheet PIC16f887
whendygarcia
 
Filterlab tutorial
Claudia Antonio Urquidi
 
Winmate trusted mobile security solution
Allan (Yun-Chin) Lin
 
Algont
Sergey Olekhov
 
16 f887
lala
 
Test
guest1e2941
 
CCTV Catalogue
Kentua Kayode
 
Dr. Marta LaColla - Equine Microchips 101
John Blue
 
Pic16f87x1a
Luis Gomez
 
Data Sheet Del 16 F870
Nataly Paredes
 
Ad

Viewers also liked (20)

PPTX
Atherton
Edgar Renteria
 
PDF
Quiz 1
Gopi Saiteja
 
PDF
Free study calculation of inertia
Intishar Rahman
 
PPTX
40 cfr 261.4(a)(10) The RCRA Exclusion from Solid Waste for Coke By-Product W...
Daniels Training Services
 
DOCX
Baptism of fire
Tolulope Ilori
 
DOCX
Attacking the enemy of your calling
Tolulope Ilori
 
DOCX
0000
José Luis Rondinel Orihuela
 
PDF
GeoMedia 2013, GIS Tools Where You Need Them_Ciaran Kirk - Intergraph Geospat...
IMGS
 
PDF
Facebook groups
ferelrew
 
DOCX
Maapa co inux
Aura Lilia Gomez Chavez
 
PPTX
Voorstelling afd entourage en coaches recruitering
Toon Goes
 
DOCX
Bringing forth
Tolulope Ilori
 
PPT
Libro atherton
Lizbeth Tarango Valle
 
DOCX
Ensayo tic´s para docentes
Jose Cardenas
 
DOCX
Digital Planning & Sales
Squid Ink
 
DOCX
camden blog
James Aitcheson-Labarr
 
PPT
Anamorphic illusions
drtsunami11
 
PPTX
MIT FM
Mateus Teles
 
PDF
Cruz Roja Nicaragüense ante alerta epidemiológica
Cruz Roja Nicaragüense
 
PPTX
La casa encantada de atenas
22974255
 
Atherton
Edgar Renteria
 
Quiz 1
Gopi Saiteja
 
Free study calculation of inertia
Intishar Rahman
 
40 cfr 261.4(a)(10) The RCRA Exclusion from Solid Waste for Coke By-Product W...
Daniels Training Services
 
Baptism of fire
Tolulope Ilori
 
Attacking the enemy of your calling
Tolulope Ilori
 
0000
José Luis Rondinel Orihuela
 
GeoMedia 2013, GIS Tools Where You Need Them_Ciaran Kirk - Intergraph Geospat...
IMGS
 
Facebook groups
ferelrew
 
Maapa co inux
Aura Lilia Gomez Chavez
 
Voorstelling afd entourage en coaches recruitering
Toon Goes
 
Bringing forth
Tolulope Ilori
 
Libro atherton
Lizbeth Tarango Valle
 
Ensayo tic´s para docentes
Jose Cardenas
 
Digital Planning & Sales
Squid Ink
 
camden blog
James Aitcheson-Labarr
 
Anamorphic illusions
drtsunami11
 
MIT FM
Mateus Teles
 
Cruz Roja Nicaragüense ante alerta epidemiológica
Cruz Roja Nicaragüense
 
La casa encantada de atenas
22974255
 
Ad

Similar to Ww1.microchip.com downloads en_device_doc_39662b (20)

PDF
Pic 16f877a
KRNFORD
 
PDF
819 data sheet
Nimal Rathnaweera
 
PDF
Datasheet enc28j60
Just Desta
 
PDF
Datasheet pic 18f4550
David Narváez
 
PDF
datasheet-micro.pdf
XCristiianX
 
PDF
PIC 16F87XA
David López
 
PDF
Pic16F87XA
Abbadon Kuchiku-kan
 
PDF
12f675
YesseniaMadelaineAro
 
PDF
C18 manual
zan369
 
PDF
PIC Microcontroller
muneer.k
 
PDF
Pic 18 f4550 Datasheet
Matin7
 
PDF
Pic18f458
Girish Bellenavar
 
PDF
PIC16F1934.PDF
BrayanJulian8
 
PDF
Data Sheet Del 16 F870
Nataly Paredes
 
PDF
adc evaluation
danie_lpalacios
 
PDF
Pt100
Andres Rodriguez
 
PDF
C18 user guide_51288j
username2468
 
PDF
C18 user guide_51288j
username2468
 
PDF
PICDEM2PlusUserGuide.pdf
asconindia
 
PDF
51419a
vazkrox
 
Pic 16f877a
KRNFORD
 
819 data sheet
Nimal Rathnaweera
 
Datasheet enc28j60
Just Desta
 
Datasheet pic 18f4550
David Narváez
 
datasheet-micro.pdf
XCristiianX
 
PIC 16F87XA
David López
 
Pic16F87XA
Abbadon Kuchiku-kan
 
12f675
YesseniaMadelaineAro
 
C18 manual
zan369
 
PIC Microcontroller
muneer.k
 
Pic 18 f4550 Datasheet
Matin7
 
Pic18f458
Girish Bellenavar
 
PIC16F1934.PDF
BrayanJulian8
 
Data Sheet Del 16 F870
Nataly Paredes
 
adc evaluation
danie_lpalacios
 
Pt100
Andres Rodriguez
 
C18 user guide_51288j
username2468
 
C18 user guide_51288j
username2468
 
PICDEM2PlusUserGuide.pdf
asconindia
 
51419a
vazkrox
 

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
Optimiser vos workloads AI/ML sur Amazon EC2 et AWS Graviton
Julien SIMON
 
PDF
Blue Purple Modern Animated Computer Science Presentation.pdf.pdf
Akar16
 
DOCX
The AUB Centre for AI in Media Proposal.docx
GAONE9
 
PDF
MIND Revenue Release Quarter 2 2025 Press Release
MIND CTI
 
PPTX
Programs and apps: productivity, graphics, security and other tools
4mqw9zch22
 
PPTX
Understanding_Digital_Forensics_Presentation.pptx
ImranKhan423233
 
PDF
Diabetes mellitus diagnosis method based random forest with bat algorithm
IAESIJAI
 
PDF
NewMind AI Weekly Chronicles - August'25 Week I
NewMind AI
 
PPTX
20250228 LYD VKU AI Blended-Learning.pptx
DatVoNgoc
 
PPTX
ACSFv1EN-58255 AWS Academy Cloud Security Foundations.pptx
23bcla24
 
PDF
Per capita expenditure prediction using model stacking based on satellite ima...
IAESIJAI
 
PDF
Electronic commerce courselecture one. Pdf
OmerMohamed64
 
PPT
“AI and Expert System Decision Support & Business Intelligence Systems”
ZubinRadhakrishnan
 
PDF
TokAI - TikTok AI Agent : The First AI Application That Analyzes 10,000+ Vira...
SOFTTECHHUB
 
PDF
Empathic Computing: Creating Shared Understanding
Mark Billinghurst
 
PDF
Review of recent advances in non-invasive hemoglobin estimation
IAESIJAI
 
PDF
Building Integrated photovoltaic BIPV_UPV.pdf
SandeepSingh286037
 
PDF
Advanced methodologies resolving dimensionality complications for autism neur...
IAESIJAI
 
PPTX
sap open course for s4hana steps from ECC to s4
sreeni2106invites
 
PDF
Encapsulation theory and applications.pdf
gurumoop
 
Optimiser vos workloads AI/ML sur Amazon EC2 et AWS Graviton
Julien SIMON
 
Blue Purple Modern Animated Computer Science Presentation.pdf.pdf
Akar16
 
The AUB Centre for AI in Media Proposal.docx
GAONE9
 
MIND Revenue Release Quarter 2 2025 Press Release
MIND CTI
 
Programs and apps: productivity, graphics, security and other tools
4mqw9zch22
 
Understanding_Digital_Forensics_Presentation.pptx
ImranKhan423233
 
Diabetes mellitus diagnosis method based random forest with bat algorithm
IAESIJAI
 
NewMind AI Weekly Chronicles - August'25 Week I
NewMind AI
 
20250228 LYD VKU AI Blended-Learning.pptx
DatVoNgoc
 
ACSFv1EN-58255 AWS Academy Cloud Security Foundations.pptx
23bcla24
 
Per capita expenditure prediction using model stacking based on satellite ima...
IAESIJAI
 
Electronic commerce courselecture one. Pdf
OmerMohamed64
 
“AI and Expert System Decision Support & Business Intelligence Systems”
ZubinRadhakrishnan
 
TokAI - TikTok AI Agent : The First AI Application That Analyzes 10,000+ Vira...
SOFTTECHHUB
 
Empathic Computing: Creating Shared Understanding
Mark Billinghurst
 
Review of recent advances in non-invasive hemoglobin estimation
IAESIJAI
 
Building Integrated photovoltaic BIPV_UPV.pdf
SandeepSingh286037
 
Advanced methodologies resolving dimensionality complications for autism neur...
IAESIJAI
 
sap open course for s4hana steps from ECC to s4
sreeni2106invites
 
Encapsulation theory and applications.pdf
gurumoop
 

Ww1.microchip.com downloads en_device_doc_39662b

  • 1. ENC28J60 Data Sheet Stand-Alone Ethernet Controller with SPI Interface © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B
  • 2. Note the following details of the code protection feature on Microchip devices: • Microchip products meet the specification contained in their particular Microchip Data Sheet. • Microchip believes that its family of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the market today, when used in the intended manner and under normal conditions. • There are dishonest and possibly illegal methods used to breach the code protection feature. All of these methods, to our knowledge, require using the Microchip products in a manner outside the operating specifications contained in Microchip’s Data Sheets. Most likely, the person doing so is engaged in theft of intellectual property. • Microchip is willing to work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of their code. • Neither Microchip nor any other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of their code. Code protection does not mean that we are guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.” Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Microchip are committed to continuously improving the code protection features of our products. Attempts to break Microchip’s code protection feature may be a violation of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. If such acts allow unauthorized access to your software or other copyrighted work, you may have a right to sue for relief under that Act. Information contained in this publication regarding device applications and the like is provided only for your convenience and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to ensure that your application meets with your specifications. MICROCHIP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, RELATED TO THE INFORMATION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ITS CONDITION, QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. Microchip disclaims all liability arising from this information and its use. Use of Microchip devices in life support and/or safety applications is entirely at the buyer’s risk, and the buyer agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Microchip from any and all damages, claims, suits, or expenses resulting from such use. No licenses are conveyed, implicitly or otherwise, under any Microchip intellectual property rights. Trademarks The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, Accuron, dsPIC, KEELOQ, microID, MPLAB, PIC, PICmicro, PICSTART, PRO MATE, PowerSmart, rfPIC and SmartShunt are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. AmpLab, FilterLab, Migratable Memory, MXDEV, MXLAB, SEEVAL, SmartSensor and The Embedded Control Solutions Company are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. Analog-for-the-Digital Age, Application Maestro, CodeGuard, dsPICDEM, dsPICDEM.net, dsPICworks, ECAN, ECONOMONITOR, FanSense, FlexROM, fuzzyLAB, In-Circuit Serial Programming, ICSP, ICEPIC, Linear Active Thermistor, Mindi, MiWi, MPASM, MPLIB, MPLINK, PICkit, PICDEM, PICDEM.net, PICLAB, PICtail, PowerCal, PowerInfo, PowerMate, PowerTool, REAL ICE, rfLAB, rfPICDEM, Select Mode, Smart Serial, SmartTel, Total Endurance, UNI/O, WiperLock and ZENA are trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. SQTP is a service mark of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. All other trademarks mentioned herein are property of their respective companies. © 2006, Microchip Technology Incorporated, Printed in the U.S.A., All Rights Reserved. Printed on recycled paper. Microchip received ISO/TS-16949:2002 certification for its worldwide headquarters, design and wafer fabrication facilities in Chandler and Tempe, Arizona, Gresham, Oregon and Mountain View, California. The Company’s quality system processes and procedures are for its PICmicro® 8-bit MCUs, KEELOQ® code hopping devices, Serial EEPROMs, microperipherals, nonvolatile memory and analog products. In addition, Microchip’s quality system for the design and manufacture of development systems is ISO 9001:2000 certified. DS39662B-page ii Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 3. ENC28J60 Stand-Alone Ethernet Controller with SPI Interface Ethernet Controller Features Operational • IEEE 802.3 compatible Ethernet controller • Integrated MAC and 10BASE-T PHY • Supports one 10BASE-T port with automatic polarity detection and correction • Supports Full and Half-Duplex modes • Programmable automatic retransmit on collision • Programmable padding and CRC generation • Programmable automatic rejection of erroneous packets • SPI Interface with clock speeds up to 20 MHz • • • • • • Six interrupt sources and one interrupt output pin 25 MHz clock input requirement Clock out pin with programmable prescaler Operating voltage of 3.1V to 3.6V (3.3V typical) 5V tolerant inputs Temperature range: -40°C to +85°C Industrial, 0°C to +70°C Commercial (SSOP only) • 28-pin SPDIP, SSOP, SOIC, QFN packages Package Types 28-Pin SPDIP, SSOP, SOIC Medium Access Controller (MAC) Features VDD 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 ENC28J60 8-Kbyte transmit/receive packet dual port SRAM Configurable transmit/receive buffer size Hardware-managed circular receive FIFO Byte-wide random and sequential access with auto-increment • Internal DMA for fast data movement • Hardware assisted checksum calculation for various network protocols • Supports Unicast, Multicast and Broadcast packets • Programmable receive packet filtering and wake-up host on logical AND or OR of the following: - Unicast destination address - Multicast address - Broadcast address - Magic Packet™ - Group destination addresses as defined by 64-bit hash table - Programmable pattern matching of up to 64 bytes at user-defined offset 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 VCAP VSS CLKOUT INT NC* SO SI SCK CS RESET VSSRX TPINTPIN+ RBIAS • • • • LEDA LEDB VDDOSC OSC2 OSC1 VSSOSC VSSPLL VDDPLL VDDRX VSSTX TPOUT+ TPOUTVDDTX INT CLKOUT VSS VCAP VDD LEDA LEDB Buffer 28-pin QFN 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 NC* SO SI SCK CS RESET VSSRX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ENC28J60 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 VDDOSC OSC2 OSC1 VSSOSC VSSPLL VDDPLL VDDRX 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. TPOUTTPOUT+ VSSTX • Loopback mode • Two programmable LED outputs for LINK, TX, RX, collision and full/half-duplex status TPINTPIN+ RBIAS VDDTX Physical Layer (PHY) Features * Reserved pin; always leave disconnected. Preliminary DS39662B-page 1
  • 4. ENC28J60 Table of Contents 1.0 Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3 2.0 External Connections ................................................................................................................................................................... 5 3.0 Memory Organization ................................................................................................................................................................. 11 4.0 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)................................................................................................................................................. 25 5.0 Ethernet Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................... 31 6.0 Initialization................................................................................................................................................................................. 33 7.0 Transmitting and Receiving Packets .......................................................................................................................................... 39 8.0 Receive Filters............................................................................................................................................................................ 47 9.0 Duplex Mode Configuration and Negotiation.............................................................................................................................. 53 10.0 Flow Control ............................................................................................................................................................................... 55 11.0 Reset .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 59 12.0 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................................................................... 63 13.0 Direct Memory Access Controller ............................................................................................................................................... 71 14.0 Power-Down ............................................................................................................................................................................... 73 15.0 Built-in Self-Test Controller ........................................................................................................................................................ 75 16.0 Electrical Characteristics ............................................................................................................................................................ 79 17.0 Packaging Information................................................................................................................................................................ 83 Index .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 89 The Microchip Web Site ....................................................................................................................................................................... 91 Customer Change Notification Service ................................................................................................................................................ 91 Customer Support ................................................................................................................................................................................ 91 Reader Response ................................................................................................................................................................................ 92 Product Identification System............................................................................................................................................................... 93 TO OUR VALUED CUSTOMERS It is our intention to provide our valued customers with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip products. To this end, we will continue to improve our publications to better suit your needs. Our publications will be refined and enhanced as new volumes and updates are introduced. If you have any questions or comments regarding this publication, please contact the Marketing Communications Department via E-mail at docerrors@microchip.com or fax the Reader Response Form in the back of this data sheet to (480) 792-4150. We welcome your feedback. Most Current Data Sheet To obtain the most up-to-date version of this data sheet, please register at our Worldwide Web site at: http://www.microchip.com You can determine the version of a data sheet by examining its literature number found on the bottom outside corner of any page. The last character of the literature number is the version number, (e.g., DS30000A is version A of document DS30000). Errata An errata sheet, describing minor operational differences from the data sheet and recommended workarounds, may exist for current devices. As device/documentation issues become known to us, we will publish an errata sheet. The errata will specify the revision of silicon and revision of document to which it applies. To determine if an errata sheet exists for a particular device, please check with one of the following: • Microchip’s Worldwide Web site; http://www.microchip.com • Your local Microchip sales office (see last page) When contacting a sales office, please specify which device, revision of silicon and data sheet (include literature number) you are using. Customer Notification System Register on our web site at www.microchip.com to receive the most current information on all of our products. DS39662B-page 2 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 5. ENC28J60 1.0 OVERVIEW The ENC28J60 consists of seven major functional blocks: The ENC28J60 is a stand-alone Ethernet controller with an industry standard Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI). It is designed to serve as an Ethernet network interface for any controller equipped with SPI. The ENC28J60 meets all of the IEEE 802.3 specifications. It incorporates a number of packet filtering schemes to limit incoming packets. It also provides an internal DMA module for fast data throughput and hardware assisted checksum calculation, which is used in various network protocols. Communication with the host controller is implemented via an interrupt pin and the SPI, with clock rates of up to 20 MHz. Two dedicated pins are used for LED link and network activity indication. A simple block diagram of the ENC28J60 is shown in Figure 1-1. A typical application circuit using the device is shown in Figure 1-2. With the ENC28J60, two pulse transformers and a few passive components are all that is required to connect a microcontroller to an Ethernet network. FIGURE 1-1: 1. An SPI interface that serves as a communication channel between the host controller and the ENC28J60. Control Registers which are used to control and monitor the ENC28J60. A dual port RAM buffer for received and transmitted data packets. An arbiter to control the access to the RAM buffer when requests are made from DMA, transmit and receive blocks. The bus interface that interprets data and commands received via the SPI interface. The MAC (Medium Access Control) module that implements IEEE 802.3 compliant MAC logic. The PHY (Physical Layer) module that encodes and decodes the analog data that is present on the twisted pair interface. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. The device also contains other support blocks, such as the oscillator, on-chip voltage regulator, level translators to provide 5V tolerant I/Os and system control logic. ENC28J60 BLOCK DIAGRAM LEDA Buffer LEDB RX 8 Kbytes Dual Port RAM MAC RXBM TPOUT+ RXF (Filter) CLKOUT Control Registers TX MII Interface ch0 Arbiter ch0 ch1 DMA & Checksum PHY TPOUT- TPIN+ TX ch1 RX TXBM INT TPIN- Flow Control Bus Interface MIIM Interface RBIAS Host Interface CS(1) SI(1) SO OSC1 SPI System Control Power-on Reset Voltage Regulator 25 MHz Oscillator OSC2 SCK(1) VCAP RESET(1) Note 1: These pins are 5V tolerant. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 3
  • 6. ENC28J60 FIGURE 1-2: TYPICAL ENC28J60-BASED INTERFACE MCU ENC28J60 TPIN+/- CS I/O SDO SO SDI SCK SCK RJ45 TPOUT+/- SI TX/RX Buffer MAC ETHERNET TRANSFORMER PHY LEDA INT INTX LEDB TABLE 1-1: PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS Pin Number SPDIP, SOIC, SSOP QFN Pin Type Buffer Type VCAP 1 25 P — 2.5V output from internal regulator. A low Equivalent Series Resistance (ESR) capacitor, with a typical value of 10 μF and a minimum value of 1 μF to ground, must be placed on this pin. VSS 2 26 P — Ground reference. CLKOUT 3 27 O — Programmable clock output pin.(1) INT 4 28 O — INT interrupt output pin.(2) NC 5 1 O — Reserved function; always leave unconnected. SO 6 2 O — Data out pin for SPI interface.(2) SI 7 3 I ST Data in pin for SPI interface.(3) SCK 8 4 I ST Clock in pin for SPI interface.(3) CS 9 5 I ST Chip select input pin for SPI interface.(3,4) RESET 10 6 I ST Active-low device Reset input.(3, 4) VSSRX 11 7 P — Ground reference for PHY RX. TPIN- 12 8 I ANA Differential signal input. TPIN+ 13 9 I ANA Differential signal input. RBIAS 14 10 I ANA Bias current pin for PHY. Must be tied to ground via a resistor (refer to Section 2.4 “Magnetics, Termination and Other External Components” for details). VDDTX 15 11 P — Positive supply for PHY TX. TPOUT- 16 12 O — Differential signal output. TPOUT+ 17 13 O — Differential signal output. VSSTX 18 14 P — Ground reference for PHY TX. VDDRX 19 15 P — Positive 3.3V supply for PHY RX. VDDPLL 20 16 P — Positive 3.3V supply for PHY PLL. VSSPLL 21 17 P — Ground reference for PHY PLL. VSSOSC 22 18 P — Ground reference for oscillator. OSC1 23 19 I ANA OSC2 24 20 O — Oscillator output. VDDOSC 25 21 P — Positive 3.3V supply for oscillator. LEDB 26 22 O — LEDB driver pin.(5) LEDA 27 23 O — LEDA driver pin.(5) 28 24 P — Positive 3.3V supply. Pin Name VDD Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: Description Oscillator input. I = Input, O = Output, P = Power, DIG = Digital input, ANA = Analog signal input, ST = Schmitt Trigger Pins have a maximum current capacity of 8 mA. Pins have a maximum current capacity of 4 mA. Pins are 5V tolerant. Pins have an internal weak pull-up to VDD. Pins have a maximum current capacity of 12 mA. DS39662B-page 4 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 7. ENC28J60 2.0 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS 2.1 Oscillator 2.2 The ENC28J60 is designed to operate at 25 MHz with a crystal connected to the OSC1 and OSC2 pins. The ENC28J60 design requires the use of a parallel cut crystal. Use of a series cut crystal may give a frequency out of the crystal manufacturer specifications. A typical oscillator circuit is shown in Figure 2-1. The ENC28J60 may also be driven by an external clock source connected to the OSC1 pin as shown in Figure 2-2. FIGURE 2-1: CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR OPERATION The ENC28J60 contains an Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) to ensure that the oscillator and integrated PHY have stabilized before use. The OST does not expire until 7500 OSC1 clock cycles (300 μs) pass after Power-on Reset or wake-up from Power-Down mode occurs. During the delay, all Ethernet registers and buffer memory may still be read and written to through the SPI bus. However, software should not attempt to transmit any packets (set ECON1.TXRTS), enable reception of packets (set ECON1.RXEN) or access any MAC, MII or PHY registers during this period. When the OST expires, the CLKRDY bit in the ESTAT register will be set. The application software should poll this bit as necessary to determine when normal device operation can begin. Note: ENC28J60 OSC1 C1 Oscillator Start-up Timer To Internal Logic XTAL After a Power-on Reset, or the ENC28J60 is removed from Power-Down mode, the CLKRDY bit must be polled before transmitting packets, enabling packet reception or accessing any MAC, MII or PHY registers. RF(2) RS(1) OSC2 C2 Note 1: A series resistor, RS, may be required for AT strip cut crystals. 2: The feedback resistor, RF , is typically in the range of 2 to 10 MΩ. FIGURE 2-2: EXTERNAL CLOCK SOURCE(1) ENC28J60 3.3V Clock from External System Open(2) Note 1: 2: OSC1 OSC2 Duty cycle restrictions must be observed. A resistor to ground may be used to reduce system noise. This may increase system current. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 5
  • 8. ENC28J60 2.3 CLKOUT Pin The clock out pin is provided to the system designer for use as the host controller clock or as a clock source for other devices in the system. The CLKOUT has an internal prescaler which can divide the output by 1, 2, 3, 4 or 8. The CLKOUT function is enabled and the prescaler is selected via the ECOCON register (Register 2-1). To create a clean clock signal, the CLKOUT pin is held low for a period when power is first applied. After the Power-on Reset ends, the OST will begin counting. When the OST expires, the CLKOUT pin will begin outputting its default frequency of 6.25 MHz (main clock divided by 4). At any future time that the ENC28J60 is reset by software or the RESET pin, the CLKOUT function will not be altered (ECOCON will not change FIGURE 2-3: value). Additionally, Power-Down mode may be entered and the CLKOUT function will continue to operate. When Power-Down mode is cancelled, the OST will be reset but the CLKOUT function will continue. When the CLKOUT function is disabled (ECOCON = 0), the CLKOUT pin is driven low. The CLKOUT function is designed to ensure that minimum timings are preserved when the CLKOUT pin function is enabled, disabled or the prescaler value is changed. No high or low pulses will be outputted which exceed the frequency specified by the ECOCON configuration. However, when switching frequencies, a delay between two and eight OSC1 clock periods will occur where no clock pulses will be produced (see Figure 2-3). During this period, CLKOUT will be held low. CLKOUT TRANSITION ECOCON Changed REGISTER 2-1: 80 ns to 320 ns Delay ECOCON: CLOCK OUTPUT CONTROL REGISTER U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — — — COCON2 COCON1 COCON0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2-0 COCON2:COCON0: Clock Output Configuration bits 11x = Reserved for factory test. Do not use. Glitch prevention not assured. 101 = CLKOUT outputs main clock divided by 8 (3.125 MHz) 100 = CLKOUT outputs main clock divided by 4 (6.25 MHz) 011 = CLKOUT outputs main clock divided by 3 (8.333333 MHz) 010 = CLKOUT outputs main clock divided by 2 (12.5 MHz) 001 = CLKOUT outputs main clock divided by 1 (25 MHz) 000 = CLKOUT is disabled. The pin is driven low. DS39662B-page 6 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 9. ENC28J60 2.4 Magnetics, Termination and Other External Components To complete the Ethernet interface, the ENC28J60 requires several standard components to be installed externally. These components should be connected as shown in Figure 2-4. The internal analog circuitry in the PHY module requires that an external 2.32 kΩ, 1% resistor be attached from RBIAS to ground. The resistor influences the TPOUT+/signal amplitude. The resistor should be placed as close as possible to the chip with no immediately adjacent signal traces to prevent noise capacitively coupling into the pin and affecting the transmit behavior. It is recommended that the resistor be a surface mount type. Some of the device’s digital logic operates at a nominal 2.5V. An on-chip voltage regulator is incorporated to generate this voltage. The only external component required is an external filter capacitor, connected from VCAP to ground. The capacitor must have low equivalent-series resistance (ESR), with a typical value of 10 μF, and a minimum value of 1 μF. The internal regulator is not designed to drive external loads. On the TPIN+/TPIN- and TPOUT+/TPOUT- pins, 1:1 center-taped pulse transformers rated for Ethernet operations are required. When the Ethernet module is enabled, current is continually sunk through both TPOUT pins. When the PHY is actively transmitting, a differential voltage is created on the Ethernet cable by varying the relative current sunk by TPOUT+ compared to TPOUT-. FIGURE 2-4: A common-mode choke on the TPOUT interface, placed between the TPOUT pins and the Ethernet transformer (not shown), is not recommend. If a common-mode choke is used to reduce EMI emissions, it should be placed between the Ethernet transformer and pins 1 and 2 of the RJ-45 connector. Many Ethernet transformer modules include common-mode chokes inside the same device package. The transformers should have at least the isolation rating specified in Table 16-5 to protect against static voltages and meet IEEE 802.3 isolation requirements (see Section 16.0 “Electrical Characteristics” for specific transformer requirements). Both transmit and receive interfaces additionally require two resistors and a capacitor to properly terminate the transmission line, minimizing signal reflections. All power supply pins must be externally connected to the same power source. Similarly, all ground references must be externally connected to the same ground node. Each VDD and VSS pin pair should have a 0.1 μF ceramic bypass capacitor (not shown in the schematic) placed as close to the pins as possible. Since relatively high currents are necessary to operate the twisted-pair interface, all wires should be kept as short as possible. Reasonable wire widths should be used on power wires to reduce resistive loss. If the differential data lines cannot be kept short, they should be routed in such a way as to have a 100Ω characteristic impedance. ENC28J60 ETHERNET TERMINATION AND EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS 3.3V ENC28J60 MCU TPOUT+ I/O SCK SDO SDI 49.9Ω, 1% 0.1 μF(3) 2 TPOUT- 3 1:1 CT TPIN+ Level Shift Logic(2) 4 49.9Ω, 1% 5 49.9Ω, 1% INT0 1 Ferrite Bead(1,3) 49.9Ω, 1% CS SCK SI SO RJ-45 1 INT 0.1 μF 1:1 CT TPIN- 6 RBIAS VCAP LEDA 7 LEDB 8 2.32 kΩ, 1% 10 μF 75Ω(3) 75Ω(3) 75Ω(3) 75Ω(3) 1 nF, 2 kV(3) Note 1: Ferrite Bead should be rated for at least 80 mA. 2: Required only if the microcontroller is operating at 5V. See Section 2.5 “I/O Levels” for more information. 3: These components are installed for EMI reduction purposes. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 7
  • 10. ENC28J60 2.5 I/O Levels 2.6 The ENC28J60 is a 3.3V part; however, it was designed to be easily integrated into 5V systems. The SPI CS, SCK and SI inputs, as well as the RESET pin, are all 5V tolerant. On the other hand, if the host controller is operated at 5V, it quite likely will not be within specifications when its SPI and interrupt inputs are driven by the 3.3V CMOS outputs on the ENC28J60. A unidirectional level translator would be necessary. An economical 74HCT08 (quad AND gate), 74ACT125 (quad 3-state buffer) or many other 5V CMOS chips with TTL level input buffers may be used to provide the necessary level shifting. The use of 3-state buffers permits easy integration into systems which share the SPI bus with other devices. Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6 show example translation schemes. FIGURE 2-5: MCU LEVEL SHIFTING USING AND GATES ENC28J60 I/O SCK LED Configuration The LEDA and LEDB pins support automatic polarity detection on Reset. The LEDs can be connected such that the pin must source current to turn the LED on, or alternately connected such that the pin must sink current to turn the LED on. Upon system Reset, the ENC28J60 will detect how the LED is connected and begin driving the LED to the default state configured by the PHLCON register. If the LED polarity is changed while the ENC28J60 is operating, the new polarity will not be detected until the next system Reset occurs. LEDB is unique in that the connection of the LED is automatically read on Reset and determines how to initialize the PHCON1.PDPXMD bit. If the pin sources current to illuminate the LED, the bit is cleared on Reset and the PHY defaults to half-duplex operation. If the pin sinks current to illuminate the LED, the bit is set on Reset and the PHY defaults to full-duplex operation. Figure 2-7 shows the two available options. If no LED is attached to the LEDB pin, the PDPXMD bit will reset to an indeterminate value. FIGURE 2-7: LEDB POLARITY AND RESET CONFIGURATION OPTIONS CS SCK SO SI SI SO OSC1 INT0 Full-Duplex Operation: PDPXMD = 1 CLKOUT +3.3V LEDB INT Half-Duplex Operation: PDPXMD = 0 FIGURE 2-6: LEVEL SHIFTING USING 3-STATE BUFFERS LEDB ENC28J60 MCU I/O SCK CS SCK SO SI SI SO OSC1 INT0 CLKOUT INT The LEDs can also be configured separately to control their operating polarity (on or off when active), blink rate and blink stretch interval. The options are controlled by the LACFG3:LACFG0 and LBCFG3:LBCFG0 bits. Typical values for blink stretch are listed in Table 2-1. TABLE 2-1: LED BLINK STRETCH LENGTH Stretch Length Typical Stretch (ms) TNSTRCH (normal) 70 TLSTRCH (long) DS39662B-page 8 40 TMSTRCH (medium) 140 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 11. ENC28J60 REGISTER 2-2: PHLCON: PHY MODULE LED CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 r r r r LACFG3 LACFG2 LACFG1 LACFG0 bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-x LBCFG3 LBCFG2 LBCFG1 LBCFG0 LFRQ1 LFRQ0 STRCH r bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15-14 Reserved: Write as ‘0’ bit 13-12 Reserved: Write as ‘1’ bit 11-8 LACFG3:LACFG0: LEDA Configuration bits 1111 = Reserved 1110 = Display duplex status and collision activity (always stretched) 1101 = Display link status and transmit/receive activity (always stretched) 1100 = Display link status and receive activity (always stretched) 1011 = Blink slow 1010 = Blink fast 1001 = Off 1000 = On 0111 = Display transmit and receive activity (stretchable) 0110 = Reserved 0101 = Display duplex status 0100 = Display link status 0011 = Display collision activity (stretchable) 0010 = Display receive activity (stretchable) 0001 = Display transmit activity (stretchable) 0000 = Reserved bit 7-4 LBCFG3:LBCFG0: LEDB Configuration bits 1110 = Display duplex status and collision activity (always stretched) 1101 = Display link status and transmit/receive activity (always stretched) 1100 = Display link status and receive activity (always stretched) 1011 = Blink slow 1010 = Blink fast 1001 = Off 1000 = On 0111 = Display transmit and receive activity (stretchable) 0110 = Reserved 0101 = Display duplex status 0100 = Display link status 0011 = Display collision activity (stretchable) 0010 = Display receive activity (stretchable) 0001 = Display transmit activity (stretchable) 0000 = Reserved bit 3-2 LFRQ1:LFRQ0: LED Pulse Stretch Time Configuration bits (see Table 2-1) 11 = Reserved 10 = Stretch LED events by TLSTRCH 01 = Stretch LED events by TMSTRCH 00 = Stretch LED events by TNSTRCH bit 1 STRCH: LED Pulse Stretching Enable bit 1 = Stretchable LED events will cause lengthened LED pulses based on LFRQ1:LFRQ0 configuration 0 = Stretchable LED events will only be displayed while they are occurring bit 0 Reserved: Write as ‘0’ © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 9
  • 13. ENC28J60 3.0 MEMORY ORGANIZATION All memory in the ENC28J60 is implemented as static RAM. There are three types of memory in the ENC28J60: • Control Registers • Ethernet Buffer • PHY Registers The Control registers’ memory contains the registers that are used for configuration, control and status retrieval of the ENC28J60. The Control registers are directly read and written to by the SPI interface. The Ethernet buffer contains transmit and receive memory used by the Ethernet controller in a single memory space. The sizes of the memory areas are programmable by the host controller using the SPI interface. The Ethernet buffer memory can only be accessed via the read buffer memory and write buffer memory SPI commands (see Section 4.2.2 “Read Buffer Memory Command” and Section 4.2.4 “Write Buffer Memory Command”). The PHY registers are used for configuration, control and status retrieval of the PHY module. The registers are not directly accessible through the SPI interface; they can only be accessed through Media Independent Interface Management (MIIM) implemented in the MAC. Figure 3-1 shows the data memory organization for the ENC28J60. FIGURE 3-1: ENC28J60 MEMORY ORGANIZATION ECON1<1:0> Control Registers Ethernet Buffer 00h 0000h Buffer Pointers in Bank 0 = 00 Bank 0 19h 1Ah 1Fh 00h Common Registers = 01 Bank 1 19h 1Ah 1Fh 00h Common Registers = 10 Bank 2 19h 1Ah 1Fh 00h Common Registers = 11 Bank 3 19h 1Ah 1Fh Note: 1FFFh PHY Registers Common Registers 00h 1Fh Memory areas are not shown to scale. The size of the control memory space has been scaled to show detail. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 11
  • 14. ENC28J60 3.1 Control Registers Some of the available addresses are unimplemented. Any attempts to write to these locations are ignored while reads return ‘0’s. The register at address 1Ah in each bank is reserved; read and write operations should not be performed on this register. All other reserved registers may be read, but their contents must not be changed. When reading and writing to registers which contain reserved bits, any rules stated in the register definition should be observed. The Control Registers provide the main interface between the host controller and the on-chip Ethernet controller logic. Writing to these registers controls the operation of the interface, while reading the registers allows the host controller to monitor operations. The Control Register memory is partitioned into four banks, selectable by the bank select bits BSEL1:BSEL0 in the ECON1 register. Each bank is 32 bytes long and addressed by a 5-bit address value. Control registers for the ENC28J60 are generically grouped as ETH, MAC and MII registers. Register names starting with “E” belong to the ETH group. Similarly, registers names starting with “MA” belong to the MAC group and registers prefixed with “MI” belong to the MII group. The last five locations (1Bh to 1Fh) of all banks point to a common set of registers: EIE, EIR, ESTAT, ECON2 and ECON1. These are key registers used in controlling and monitoring the operation of the device. Their common mapping allows easy access without switching the bank. The ECON1 and ECON2 registers are discussed later in this section. TABLE 3-1: Bank 0 Address 00h ENC28J60 CONTROL REGISTER MAP Name Bank 1 Address Name Bank 2 Address Name Bank 3 Address 00h Name ERDPTL 00h EHT0 00h MACON1 MAADR5 01h ERDPTH 01h EHT1 01h Reserved 01h MAADR6 02h EWRPTL 02h EHT2 02h MACON3 02h MAADR3 03h EWRPTH 03h EHT3 03h MACON4 03h MAADR4 04h ETXSTL 04h EHT4 04h MABBIPG 04h MAADR1 MAADR2 05h ETXSTH 05h EHT5 05h — 05h 06h ETXNDL 06h EHT6 06h MAIPGL 06h EBSTSD 07h ETXNDH 07h EHT7 07h MAIPGH 07h EBSTCON 08h ERXSTL 08h EPMM0 08h MACLCON1 08h EBSTCSL 09h ERXSTH 09h EPMM1 09h MACLCON2 09h EBSTCSH 0Ah ERXNDL 0Ah EPMM2 0Ah MAMXFLL 0Ah MISTAT 0Bh ERXNDH 0Bh EPMM3 0Bh MAMXFLH 0Bh — 0Ch ERXRDPTL 0Ch EPMM4 0Ch Reserved 0Ch — 0Dh ERXRDPTH 0Dh EPMM5 0Dh Reserved 0Dh — 0Eh ERXWRPTL 0Eh EPMM6 0Eh Reserved 0Eh — 0Fh ERXWRPTH 0Fh EPMM7 0Fh — 0Fh — 10h EDMASTL 10h EPMCSL 10h Reserved 10h — 11h EDMASTH 11h EPMCSH 11h Reserved 11h — 12h EDMANDL 12h — 12h MICMD 12h EREVID 13h EDMANDH 13h — 13h — 13h — 14h EDMADSTL 14h EPMOL 14h MIREGADR 14h — 15h EDMADSTH 15h EPMOH 15h Reserved 15h ECOCON 16h EDMACSL 16h Reserved 16h MIWRL 16h Reserved 17h EDMACSH 17h Reserved 17h MIWRH 17h EFLOCON 18h — 18h ERXFCON 18h MIRDL 18h EPAUSL 19h — 19h EPKTCNT 19h MIRDH 19h EPAUSH 1Ah Reserved 1Ah Reserved 1Ah Reserved 1Ah Reserved 1Bh EIE 1Bh EIE 1Bh EIE 1Bh EIE 1Ch EIR 1Ch EIR 1Ch EIR 1Ch EIR 1Dh ESTAT 1Dh ESTAT 1Dh ESTAT 1Dh ESTAT 1Eh ECON2 1Eh ECON2 1Eh ECON2 1Eh ECON2 1Fh ECON1 1Fh ECON1 1Fh ECON1 1Fh ECON1 DS39662B-page 12 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 15. ENC28J60 TABLE 3-2: ENC28J60 CONTROL REGISTER SUMMARY Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on Reset Details on Page TXIE r TXERIE RXERIE 0000 0000 65 TXIF r TXERIF RXERIF -000 0000 66 — RXBUSY TXABRT CLKRDY(1) 0000 -000 64 Register Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 EIE INTIE PKTIE DMAIE LINKIE EIR — PKTIF DMAIF LINKIF ESTAT INT BUFER r LATECOL ECON2 AUTOINC PKTDEC PWRSV r VRPS — — — 1000 0--- 16 ECON1 TXRST RXRST DMAST CSUMEN TXRTS RXEN BSEL1 BSEL0 0000 0000 15 1111 1010 17 ERDPTL ERDPTH EWRPTL EWRPTH ETXSTL ETXSTH ETXNDL ETXNDH ERXSTL ERXSTH ERXNDL ERXNDH ERXRDPTL ERXRDPTH ERXWRPTL ERXWRPTH EDMASTL EDMASTH EDMANDL EDMANDH EDMADSTL EDMADSTH EDMACSL Read Pointer Low Byte ERDPT<7:0>) — — — Read Pointer High Byte (ERDPT<12:8>) — — — Write Pointer High Byte (EWRPT<12:8>) — — TX Start High Byte (ETXST<12:8>) — — TX End High Byte (ETXND<12:8>) — — RX Start High Byte (ERXST<12:8>) — — RX End High Byte (ERXND<12:8>) — — RX RD Pointer High Byte (ERXRDPT<12:8>) — — RX WR Pointer High Byte (ERXWRPT<12:8>) — — DMA Start High Byte (EDMAST<12:8>) — — DMA End High Byte (EDMAND<12:8>) — — 17 17 ---1 1111 17 17 ---0 0101 17 17 ---0 0000 17 71 ---0 0000 71 71 DMA Destination High Byte (EDMADST<12:8>) ---0 0000 71 0000 0000 DMA Destination Low Byte (EDMADST<7:0>) — ---0 0101 0000 0000 DMA End Low Byte (EDMAND<7:0>) — 17 17 0000 0000 DMA Start Low Byte (EDMAST<7:0>) — ---0 0000 0000 0000 RX WR Pointer Low Byte (ERXWRPT<7:0>) — 17 17 1111 1010 RX RD Pointer Low Byte (ERXRDPT<7:0>) — ---0 0000 1111 1111 RX End Low Byte (ERXND<7:0>) — 17 17 1111 1010 RX Start Low Byte (ERXST<7:0>) — ---0 0000 0000 0000 TX End Low Byte (ETXND<7:0>) — 17 0000 0000 TX Start Low Byte (ETXST<7:0>) — 17 0000 0000 Write Pointer Low Byte (EWRPT<7:0>) ---0 0101 71 ---0 0000 71 0000 0000 DMA Checksum Low Byte (EDMACS<7:0>) 72 EDMACSH DMA Checksum High Byte (EDMACS<15:8>) 0000 0000 72 EHT0 Hash Table Byte 0 (EHT<7:0>) 0000 0000 52 EHT1 Hash Table Byte 1 (EHT<15:8>) 0000 0000 52 EHT2 Hash Table Byte 2 (EHT<23:16>) 0000 0000 52 EHT3 Hash Table Byte 3 (EHT<31:24>) 0000 0000 52 EHT4 Hash Table Byte 4 (EHT<39:32>) 0000 0000 52 EHT5 Hash Table Byte 5 (EHT<47:40>) 0000 0000 52 EHT6 Hash Table Byte 6 (EHT<55:48>) 0000 0000 52 EHT7 Hash Table Byte 7 (EHT<63:56>) 0000 0000 52 EPMM0 Pattern Match Mask Byte 0 (EPMM<7:0>) 0000 0000 51 EPMM1 Pattern Match Mask Byte 1 (EPMM<15:8>) 0000 0000 51 EPMM2 Pattern Match Mask Byte 2 (EPMM<23:16>) 0000 0000 51 EPMM3 Pattern Match Mask Byte 3 (EPMM<31:24>) 0000 0000 51 EPMM4 Pattern Match Mask Byte 4 (EPMM<39:32>) 0000 0000 51 EPMM5 Pattern Match Mask Byte 5 (EPMM<47:40>) 0000 0000 51 EPMM6 Pattern Match Mask Byte 6 (EPMM<55:48>) 0000 0000 51 Pattern Match Mask Byte 7 (EPMM<63:56>) 0000 0000 51 EPMM7 Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: x = unknown, u = unchanged, — = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition, r = reserved, do not modify. CLKRDY resets to ‘0’ on Power-on Reset but is unaffected on all other Resets. EREVID is a read-only register. ECOCON resets to ‘---- -100’ on Power-on Reset and ‘---- -uuu’ on all other Resets. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 13
  • 16. ENC28J60 TABLE 3-2: ENC28J60 CONTROL REGISTER SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Register Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on Reset Details on Page EPMCSL Pattern Match Checksum Low Byte (EPMCS<7:0>) 0000 0000 51 EPMCSH Pattern Match Checksum High Byte (EPMCS<15:0>) 0000 0000 51 EPMOL Pattern Match Offset Low Byte (EPMO<7:0>) EPMOH ERXFCON EPKTCNT — — — UCEN ANDOR CRCEN 0000 0000 PMEN MPEN HTEN MCEN BCEN 51 ---0 0000 Pattern Match Offset High Byte (EPMO<12:8>) 51 1010 0001 48 0000 0000 Ethernet Packet Count 43 MACON1 — — — r TXPAUS RXPAUS PASSALL MARXEN ---0 0000 34 MACON3 PADCFG2 PADCFG1 PADCFG0 TXCRCEN PHDREN HFRMEN FRMLNEN FULDPX 0000 0000 35 MACON4 — DEFER BPEN NOBKOFF — — r r -000 --00 36 MABBIPG — Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap (BBIPG<6:0>) -000 0000 36 MAIPGL — Non-Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap Low Byte (MAIPGL<6:0>) -000 0000 34 MAIPGH — Non-Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap High Byte (MAIPGH<6:0>) -000 0000 34 MACLCON1 — — ---- 1111 34 — — --11 0111 34 MACLCON2 — — Retransmission Maximum (RETMAX<3:0>) Collision Window (COLWIN<5:0>) MAMXFLL Maximum Frame Length Low Byte (MAMXFL<7:0>) 0000 0000 34 MAMXFLH Maximum Frame Length High Byte (MAMXFL<15:8>) 0000 0110 34 MICMD — — — MIREGADR — — — — — — MIISCAN MIIRD ---- --00 21 ---0 0000 MII Register Address (MIREGADR<4:0>) 19 MIWRL MII Write Data Low Byte (MIWR<7:0>) 0000 0000 19 MIWRH MII Write Data High Byte (MIWR<15:8>) 0000 0000 19 MIRDL MII Read Data Low Byte (MIRD<7:0>) 0000 0000 19 MIRDH MII Read Data High Byte(MIRD<15:8>) 0000 0000 19 MAADR5 MAC Address Byte 5 (MAADR<15:8>) 0000 0000 34 MAADR6 MAC Address Byte 6 (MAADR<7:0>) 0000 0000 34 34 MAADR3 MAC Address Byte 3 (MAADR<31:24>), OUI Byte 3 0000 0000 MAADR4 MAC Address Byte 4 (MAADR<23:16>) 0000 0000 34 MAADR1 MAC Address Byte 1 (MAADR<47:40>), OUI Byte 1 0000 0000 34 MAADR2 MAC Address Byte 2 (MAADR<39:32>), OUI Byte 2 0000 0000 34 EBSTSD Built-in Self-Test Fill Seed (EBSTSD<7:0>) 0000 0000 76 EBSTCON PSV2 PSV1 PSV0 PSEL EBSTCSL EBSTCSH TMSEL1 TMSEL0 TME BISTST Built-in Self-Test Checksum High Byte (EBSTCS<15:8>) 75 76 0000 0000 MISTAT — — — EREVID(2) — — — ECOCON(3) — — — — — EFLOCON — — — — — — 0000 0000 0000 0000 Built-in Self-Test Checksum Low Byte (EBSTCS<7:0>) r 76 SCAN BUSY ---- 0000 21 ---q qqqq 22 COCON2 COCON1 COCON0 ---- -100 6 FULDPXS FCEN1 FCEN0 ---- -000 56 NVALID Ethernet Revision ID (EREVID<4:0>) EPAUSL Pause Timer Value Low Byte (EPAUS<7:0>) 0000 0000 57 EPAUSH Pause Timer Value High Byte (EPAUS<15:8>) 0001 0000 57 Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: x = unknown, u = unchanged, — = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition, r = reserved, do not modify. CLKRDY resets to ‘0’ on Power-on Reset but is unaffected on all other Resets. EREVID is a read-only register. ECOCON resets to ‘---- -100’ on Power-on Reset and ‘---- -uuu’ on all other Resets. DS39662B-page 14 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 17. ENC28J60 3.1.1 ECON1 REGISTER The ECON1 register, shown in Register 3-1, is used to control the main functions of the ENC28J60. Receive enable, transmit request, DMA control and bank select bits can all be found in ECON1. REGISTER 3-1: ECON1: ETHERNET CONTROL REGISTER 1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TXRST RXRST DMAST CSUMEN TXRTS RXEN BSEL1 BSEL0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 TXRST: Transmit Logic Reset bit 1 = Transmit logic is held in Reset 0 = Normal operation bit 6 RXRST: Receive Logic Reset bit 1 = Receive logic is held in Reset 0 = Normal operations bit 5 DMAST: DMA Start and Busy Status bit 1 = DMA copy or checksum operation is in progress 0 = DMA hardware is Idle bit 4 CSUMEN: DMA Checksum Enable bit 1 = DMA hardware calculates checksums 0 = DMA hardware copies buffer memory bit 3 TXRTS: Transmit Request to Send bit 1 = The transmit logic is attempting to transmit a packet 0 = The transmit logic is Idle bit 2 RXEN: Receive Enable bit 1 = Packets which pass the current filter configuration will be written into the receive buffer 0 = All packets received will be ignored bit 1-0 BSEL1:BSEL0: Bank Select bits 11 = SPI accesses registers in Bank 3 10 = SPI accesses registers in Bank 2 01 = SPI accesses registers in Bank 1 00 = SPI accesses registers in Bank 0 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 15
  • 18. ENC28J60 3.1.2 ECON2 REGISTER The ECON2 register, shown in Register 3-2, is used to control other main functions of the ENC28J60. REGISTER 3-2: ECON2: ETHERNET CONTROL REGISTER 2 R/W-0(1) R/W-1 AUTOINC PKTDEC R/W-0 PWRSV R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 VRPS r U-0 — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 AUTOINC: Automatic Buffer Pointer Increment Enable bit 1 = Automatically increment ERDPT or EWRPT on reading from or writing to EDATA 0 = Do not automatically change ERDPT and EWRPT after the buffer is accessed bit 6 PKTDEC: Packet Decrement bit 1 = Decrement the EPKTCNT register by one 0 = Leave EPKTCNT unchanged bit 5 PWRSV: Power Save Enable bit 1 = MAC, PHY and control logic are in Low-Power Sleep mode 0 = Normal operation bit 4 Reserved: Maintain as ‘0’ bit 3 VRPS: Voltage Regulator Power Save Enable bit When PWRSV = 1: 1 = Internal voltage regulator is in Low-Current mode 0 = Internal voltage regulator is in Normal Current mode When PWRSV = 0: The bit is ignored; the regulator always outputs as much current as the device requires. bit 2-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ Note 1: This bit is automatically cleared once it is set. DS39662B-page 16 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 19. ENC28J60 3.2 3.2.2 Ethernet Buffer The Ethernet buffer contains transmit and receive memory used by the Ethernet controller. The entire buffer is 8 Kbytes, divided into separate receive and transmit buffer spaces. The sizes and locations of transmit and receive memory are fully programmable by the host controller using the SPI interface. The relationship of the buffer spaces is shown in Figure 3-2. 3.2.1 RECEIVE BUFFER The receive buffer constitutes a circular FIFO buffer managed by hardware. The register pairs ERXSTH:ERXSTL and ERXNDH:ERXNDL serve as Pointers to define the buffer’s size and location within the memory. The byte pointed to by ERXST and the byte pointed to by ERXND are both included in the FIFO buffer. As bytes of data are received from the Ethernet interface, they are written into the receive buffer sequentially. However, after the memory pointed to by ERXND is written to, the hardware will automatically write the next byte of received data to the memory pointed to by ERXST. As a result, the receive hardware will never write outside the boundaries of the FIFO. The host controller may program the ERXST and ERXND Pointers when the receive logic is not enabled. The Pointers must not be modified while the receive logic is enabled (ECON1.RXEN is set). If desired, the Pointers may span the 1FFFh to 0000h memory boundary; the hardware will still operate as a FIFO. The ERXWRPTH:ERXWRPTL registers define a location within the FIFO where the hardware will write bytes that it receives. The Pointer is read-only and is automatically updated by the hardware whenever a new packet is successfully received. The Pointer is useful for determining how much free space is available within the FIFO. The ERXRDPT registers define a location within the FIFO where the receive hardware is forbidden to write to. In normal operation, the receive hardware will write data up to, but not including, the memory pointed to by ERXRDPT. If the FIFO fills up with data and new data continues to arrive, the hardware will not overwrite the previously received data. Instead, the new data will be thrown away and the old data will be preserved. In order to continuously receive new data, the host controller must periodically advance this Pointer whenever it finishes processing some, or all, of the old received data. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. TRANSMIT BUFFER Any space within the 8-Kbyte memory, which is not programmed as part of the receive FIFO buffer, is considered to be the transmit buffer. The responsibility of managing where packets are located in the transmit buffer belongs to the host controller. Whenever the host controller decides to transmit a packet, the ETXST and ETXND Pointers are programmed with addresses specifying where, within the transmit buffer, the particular packet to transmit is located. The hardware does not check that the start and end addresses do not overlap with the receive buffer. To prevent buffer corruption, the host controller must make sure to not transmit a packet while the ETXST and ETXND Pointers are overlapping the receive buffer, or while the ETXND Pointer is too close to the receive buffer. See Section 7.1 “Transmitting Packets” for more information. 3.2.3 READING AND WRITING TO THE BUFFER The Ethernet buffer contents are accessed from the host controller though separate Read and Write Pointers (ERDPT and EWRPT) combined with the read buffer memory and write buffer memory SPI commands. While sequentially reading from the receive buffer, a wrapping condition will occur at the end of the receive buffer. While sequentially writing to the buffer, no wrapping conditions will occur. See Section 4.2.2 “Read Buffer Memory Command” and Section 4.2.4 “Write Buffer Memory Command” for more information. 3.2.4 DMA ACCESS TO THE BUFFER The integrated DMA controller must read from the buffer when calculating a checksum and it must read and write to the buffer when copying memory. The DMA follows the same wrapping rules that SPI accesses do. While it sequentially reads, it will be subject to a wrapping condition at the end of the receive buffer. All writes it does will not be subject to any wrapping conditions. See Section 13.0 “Direct Memory Access Controller” for more information. Preliminary DS39662B-page 17
  • 20. ENC28J60 FIGURE 3-2: ETHERNET BUFFER ORGANIZATION Transmit Buffer Start (ETXSTH:ETXSTL) 0000h Buffer Write Pointer (EWRPTH:EWRPTL) Transmit Buffer Data AAh (WBM AAh) Transmit Transmit Buffer End (ETXNDH:ETXNDL) Buffer Receive Buffer Start (ERXSTH:ERXSTL) Receive Buffer (Circular FIFO) Buffer Read Pointer (ERDPTH:ERDPTL) Receive Buffer Data (RBM 55h) 55h Receive Buffer End 1FFFh (ERXNDH:ERXNDL) DS39662B-page 18 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 21. ENC28J60 3.3 PHY Registers To write to a PHY register: The PHY registers provide configuration and control of the PHY module, as well as status information about its operation. All PHY registers are 16 bits in width. There are a total of 32 PHY addresses; however, only 9 locations are implemented. Writes to unimplemented locations are ignored and any attempts to read these locations will return ‘0’. All reserved locations should be written as ‘0’; their contents should be ignored when read. 1. Unlike the ETH, MAC and MII control registers, or the buffer memory, the PHY registers are not directly accessible through the SPI control interface. Instead, access is accomplished through a special set of MAC control registers that implement Media Independent Interface Management (MIIM). These control registers are referred to as the MII registers. The registers that control access to the PHY registers are shown in Register 3-3 and Register 3-4. The PHY register will be written after the MIIM operation completes, which takes 10.24 μs. When the write operation has completed, the BUSY bit will clear itself. The host controller should not start any MIISCAN or MIIRD operations while busy. 3.3.1 READING PHY REGISTERS When a PHY register is read, the entire 16 bits are obtained. 2. 3. 3.3.3 2. 3. 4. 5. Write the address of the PHY register to read from into the MIREGADR register. Set the MICMD.MIIRD bit. The read operation begins and the MISTAT.BUSY bit is set. Wait 10.24 μs. Poll the MISTAT.BUSY bit to be certain that the operation is complete. While busy, the host controller should not start any MIISCAN operations or write to the MIWRH register. When the MAC has obtained the register contents, the BUSY bit will clear itself. Clear the MICMD.MIIRD bit. Read the desired data from the MIRDL and MIRDH registers. The order that these bytes are accessed is unimportant. 3.3.2 WRITING PHY REGISTERS When a PHY register is written to, the entire 16 bits is written at once; selective bit writes are not implemented. If it is necessary to reprogram only select bits in the register, the controller must first read the PHY register, modify the resulting data and then write the data back to the PHY register. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. SCANNING A PHY REGISTER The MAC can be configured to perform automatic back-to-back read operations on a PHY register. This can significantly reduce the host controller complexity when periodic status information updates are desired. To perform the scan operation: 1. To read from a PHY register: 1. Write the address of the PHY register to write to into the MIREGADR register. Write the lower 8 bits of data to write into the MIWRL register. Write the upper 8 bits of data to write into the MIWRH register. Writing to this register automatically begins the MIIM transaction, so it must be written to after MIWRL. The MISTAT.BUSY bit becomes set. 2. Write the address of the PHY register to read from into the MIREGADR register. Set the MICMD.MIISCAN bit. The scan operation begins and the MISTAT.BUSY bit is set. The first read operation will complete after 10.24 μs. Subsequent reads will be done at the same interval until the operation is cancelled. The MISTAT.NVALID bit may be polled to determine when the first read operation is complete. After setting the MIISCAN bit, the MIRDL and MIRDH registers will automatically be updated every 10.24 μs. There is no status information which can be used to determine when the MIRD registers are updated. Since the host controller can only read one MII register at a time through the SPI, it must not be assumed that the values of MIRDL and MIRDH were read from the PHY at exactly the same time. When the MIISCAN operation is in progress, the host controller must not attempt to write to MIWRH or start an MIIRD operation. The MIISCAN operation can be cancelled by clearing the MICMD.MIISCAN bit and then polling the MISTAT.BUSY bit. New operations may be started after the BUSY bit is cleared. Preliminary DS39662B-page 19
  • 22. DS39662B-page 20 PHID2 PHCON2 PHSTAT2 PHIE PHIR PHLCON 03h 10h 11h 12h 13h 14h Bit 14 — PLOOPBK PFDPX — — — Bit 12 Bit 13 FRCLNK r r r r r — r — — r r r TXSTAT TXDIS Bit 11 r PHDPX PPWRSV r r r r r LSTAT JABBER — r Bit 10 LACFG3:LACFG0 r r RXSTAT COLSTAT r PHY Identifier (OUI19:OUI24) = 000101 PHY Identifier (OUI3:OUI18) = 0083h — PRST Bit 15 ENC28J60 PHY REGISTER SUMMARY Bit 7 — HDLDIS r r r DPXSTAT(1) r — r r r — r — — Bit 6 LBCFG3:LBCFG0 r r — r — r Bit 8 PDPXMD(1) PHY P/N (PPN5:PPN0) = 00h — — Bit 9 r r PLRITY r — — Bit 5 PLNKIF PLNKIE — r — — Bit 4 — Bit 1 LLSTAT JBSTAT — Bit 2 — — Bit 0 PGIF r — r LFRQ1:LFRQ0 r r — r STRCH r PGEIE — r r r r — r PHY Revision (PREV3:PREV0) = 00h — — Bit 3 x = unknown, u = unchanged, — = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition, r = reserved, do not modify. Reset values of the Duplex mode/status bits depend on the connection of the LED to the LEDB pin (see Section 2.6 “LED Configuration” for additional details). PHID1 02h Legend: Note 1: PHSTAT1 01h Name PHCON1 00h Addr TABLE 3-3: Reset Values 0011 0100 0010 001x xxxx xxxx xx00 00x0 0000 0000 0000 0000 --00 00q- --0- ---- -000 0000 0000 0000 0001 0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0011 ---1 1--- ---- -00- 00-- 00-q 0--- ---- ENC28J60 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 23. ENC28J60 REGISTER 3-3: MICMD: MII COMMAND REGISTER U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — — — — MIISCAN MIIRD bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1 MIISCAN: MII Scan Enable bit 1 = PHY register at MIREGADR is continuously read and the data is placed in MIRD 0 = No MII Management scan operation is in progress bit 0 MIIRD: MII Read Enable bit 1 = PHY register at MIREGADR is read once and the data is placed in MIRD 0 = No MII Management read operation is in progress REGISTER 3-4: MISTAT: MII STATUS REGISTER U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 — — — — r NVALID SCAN BUSY bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3 Reserved: Maintain as ‘0’ bit 2 NVALID: MII Management Read Data Not Valid bit 1 = The contents of MIRD are not valid yet 0 = The MII Management read cycle has completed and MIRD has been updated bit 1 SCAN: MII Management Scan Operation bit 1 = MII Management scan operation is in progress 0 = No MII Management scan operation is in progress bit 0 BUSY: MII Management Busy bit 1 = A PHY register is currently being read or written to 0 = The MII Management interface is Idle © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 21
  • 24. ENC28J60 3.3.4 PHSTAT REGISTERS 3.3.5 PHID1 AND PHID2 REGISTERS The PHSTAT1 and PHSTAT2 registers contain readonly bits that show the current status of the PHY module’s operations, particularly the conditions of the communications link to the rest of the network. The PHID1 and PHID2 registers are read-only registers. They hold constant data that help identify the Ethernet controller and may be useful for debugging purposes. This includes: The PHSTAT1 register (Register 3-5) contains the LLSTAT bit; it clears and latches low if the physical layer link has gone down since the last read of the register. Periodic polling by the host controller can be used to determine exactly when the link fails. It may be particularly useful if the link change interrupt is not used. • The part number of the PHY module (PPN5:PPN0) • The revision level of the PHY module (PREV3:PREV0); and • The PHY Identifier, as part of Microchip’s corporate Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI) (OUI3:OUI24) The PHSTAT1 register also contains a jabber status bit. An Ethernet controller is said to be “jabbering” if it continuously transmits data without stopping and allowing other nodes to share the medium. Generally, the jabber condition indicates that the local controller may be grossly violating the maximum packet size defined by the IEEE specification. This bit latches high to indicate that a jabber condition has occurred since the last read of the register. The PHY part number and revision are part of PHID2. The upper two bytes of the PHY identifier are located in PHID1, with the remainder in PHID2. The exact locations within registers are shown in Table 3-3. The PHSTAT2 register (Register 3-6) contains status bits which report if the PHY module is linked to the network and whether or not it is transmitting or receiving. DS39662B-page 22 The 22 bits of the OUI contained in the PHY Identifier (OUI3:OUI24, corresponding to PHID1<15:0> and PHID2<15:10>) are concatenated with ‘00’ as the first two digits (OUI1 and OUI2) to generate the entire OUI. For convenience, this 24-bit string is usually interpreted in hexadecimal; the resulting OUI for Microchip Technology is 0004A3h. Revision information is also stored in EREVID. This is a read-only control register which contains a 5-bit identifier for the specific silicon revision level of the device. Details of this register are shown in Table 3-2. Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 25. ENC28J60 REGISTER 3-5: PHSTAT1: PHYSICAL LAYER STATUS REGISTER 1 U-0 U-0 U-0 R-1 R-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — PFDPX PHDPX — — — bit 15 bit 8 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/LL-0 R/LH-0 U-0 — — — — — LLSTAT JBSTAT — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: ‘1’ = Bit is set R = Read-only bit ‘0’ = Bit is cleared U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR R/L = Read-only latch bit LL = Bit latches low LH = Bit latches high bit 15-13 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 12 PFDPX: PHY Full-Duplex Capable bit 1 = PHY is capable of operating at 10 Mbps in Full-Duplex mode (this bit is always set) bit 11 PHDPX: PHY Half-Duplex Capable bit 1 = PHY is capable of operating at 10 Mbps in Half-Duplex mode (this bit is always set) bit 10-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2 LLSTAT: PHY Latching Link Status bit 1 = Link is up and has been up continously since PHSTAT1 was last read 0 = Link is down or was down for a period since PHSTAT1 was last read bit 1 JBSTAT: PHY Latching Jabber Status bit 1 = PHY has detected a transmission meeting the jabber criteria since PHSTAT1 was last read 0 = PHY has not detected any jabbering transmissions since PHSTAT1 was last read bit 0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 23
  • 26. ENC28J60 REGISTER 3-6: PHSTAT2: PHYSICAL LAYER STATUS REGISTER 2 U-0 U-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-x U-0 — — TXSTAT RXSTAT COLSTAT LSTAT DPXSTAT(1) — bit 15 bit 8 U-0 U-0 R-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — PLRITY — — — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15-14 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 13 TXSTAT: PHY Transmit Status bit 1 = PHY is transmitting data 0 = PHY is not transmitting data bit 12 RXSTAT: PHY Receive Status bit 1 = PHY is receiving data 0 = PHY is not receiving data bit 11 COLSTAT: PHY Collision Status bit 1 = A collision is occuring 0 = A collision is not occuring bit 10 LSTAT: PHY Link Status bit (non-latching) 1 = Link is up 0 = Link is down bit 9 DPXSTAT: PHY Duplex Status bit(1) 1 = PHY is configured for full-duplex operation (PHCON1<8> is set) 0 = PHY is configured for half-duplex operation (PHCON1<8> is clear) bit 8-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5 PLRITY: Polarity Status bit 1 = The polarity of the signal on TPIN+/TPIN- is reversed 0 = The polarity of the signal on TPIN+/TPIN- is correct bit 4-0 x = Bit is unknown Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ Note 1: Reset values of the Duplex mode/status bit depends on the connection of the LED to the LEDB pin (see Section 2.6 “LED Configuration” for additional details). DS39662B-page 24 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 27. ENC28J60 4.0 SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI) 4.1 Overview The ENC28J60 is designed to interface directly with the Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) port available on many microcontrollers. The implementation used on this device supports SPI mode 0,0 only. In addition, the SPI port requires that SCK be at Idle in a low state; selectable clock polarity is not supported. FIGURE 4-1: Commands and data are sent to the device via the SI pin, with data being clocked in on the rising edge of SCK. Data is driven out by the ENC28J60 on the SO line, on the falling edge of SCK. The CS pin must be held low while any operation is performed and returned high when finished. SPI INPUT TIMING CS SCK SI MSb In High-Impedance State SO FIGURE 4-2: LSb In SPI OUTPUT TIMING CS SCK SO MSb Out SI © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. LSb Out Don’t Care Preliminary DS39662B-page 25
  • 28. ENC28J60 4.2 SPI Instruction Set followed by a 5-bit argument that specifies either a register address or a data constant. Write and bit field instructions are also followed by one or more bytes of data. The operation of the ENC28J60 depends entirely on commands given by an external host controller over the SPI interface. These commands take the form of instructions, of one or more bytes, which are used to access the control memory and Ethernet buffer spaces. At the least, instructions consist of a 3-bit opcode, TABLE 4-1: A total of seven instructions are implemented on the ENC28J60. Table 4-1 shows the command codes for all operations. SPI INSTRUCTION SET FOR THE ENC28J60 Instruction Name and Mnemonic Byte 0 Opcode Byte 1 and Following Argument Data Read Control Register (RCR) 0 0 0 a a a a a N/A Read Buffer Memory (RBM) 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 N/A Write Control Register (WCR) 0 1 0 a a a a a d d d d d d d d Write Buffer Memory (WBM) 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 d d d d d d d d Bit Field Set (BFS) 1 0 0 a a a a a d d d d d d d d Bit Field Clear (BFC) 1 0 1 a a a a a d d d d d d d d System Reset Command (Soft Reset) (SRC) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 N/A Legend: a = control register address, d = data payload. DS39662B-page 26 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 29. ENC28J60 4.2.1 READ CONTROL REGISTER COMMAND registers in the current bank. If the 5-bit address is an ETH register, then data in the selected register will immediately start shifting out MSb first on the SO pin. Figure 4-3 shows the read sequence for these registers. The Read Control Register (RCR) command allows the host controller to read any of the ETH, MAC and MII registers in any order. The contents of the PHY registers are read via a special MII register interface (see Section 3.3.1 “Reading PHY Registers” for more information). If the address specifies one of the MAC or MII registers, a dummy byte will first be shifted out the SO pin. After the dummy byte, the data will be shifted out MSb first on the SO pin. The RCR operation is terminated by raising the CS pin. Figure 4-4 shows the read sequence for MAC and MII registers. The RCR command is started by pulling the CS pin low. The RCR opcode is then sent to the ENC28J60, followed by a 5-bit register address (A4 through A0). The 5-bit address identifies any of the 32 control FIGURE 4-3: READ CONTROL REGISTER COMMAND SEQUENCE (ETH REGISTERS) CS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 SCK Opcode SI 0 0 Address 4 0 3 2 1 0 Data Out High-Impedance State 7 SO FIGURE 4-4: 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 READ CONTROL REGISTER COMMAND SEQUENCE (MAC AND MII REGISTERS) CS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 SCK Opcode SI 0 0 0 Address 4 3 2 1 0 Dummy Byte High-Impedance State SO © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. 7 6 5 4 3 2 Preliminary Data Byte Out 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DS39662B-page 27
  • 30. ENC28J60 4.2.2 READ BUFFER MEMORY COMMAND 4.2.3 The Read Buffer Memory (RBM) command allows the host controller to read bytes from the integrated 8-Kbyte transmit and receive buffer memory. The Write Control Register (WCR) command allows the host controller to write to any of the ETH, MAC and MII Control registers in any order. The PHY registers are written to via a special MII register interface (see Section 3.3.2 “Writing PHY Registers” for more information). If the AUTOINC bit in the ECON2 register is set, the ERDPT Pointer will automatically increment to point to the next address after the last bit of each byte is read. The next address will normally be the current address incremented by one. However, if the last byte in the receive buffer is read (ERDPT = ERXND), the ERDPT Pointer will change to the beginning of the receive buffer (ERXST). This allows the host controller to read packets from the receive buffer in a continuous stream without keeping track of when a wraparound is needed. If AUTOINC is set when address 1FFFh is read and ERXND does not point to this address, the Read Pointer will increment and wrap around to 0000h. The WCR command is started by pulling the CS pin low. The WCR opcode is then sent to the ENC28J60, followed by a 5-bit address (A4 through A0). The 5-bit address identifies any of the 32 control registers in the current bank. After the WCR command and address are sent, actual data that is to be written is sent, MSb first. The data will be written to the addressed register on the rising edge of the SCK line. The WCR operation is terminated by raising the CS pin. If the CS line is allowed to go high before eight bits are loaded, the write will be aborted for that data byte. Refer to the timing diagram in Figure 4-5 for a more detailed illustration of the byte write sequence. The RBM command is started by pulling the CS pin low. The RBM opcode is then sent to the ENC28J60, followed by the 5-bit constant 1Ah. After the RBM command and constant are sent, the data stored in the memory pointed to by ERDPT will be shifted out MSb first on the SO pin. If the host controller continues to provide clocks on the SCK pin, without raising CS, the byte pointed to by ERDPT will again be shifted out MSb first on the SO pin. In this manner, with AUTOINC enabled, it is possible to continuously read sequential bytes from the buffer memory without any extra SPI command overhead. The RBM command is terminated by raising the CS pin. FIGURE 4-5: WRITE CONTROL REGISTER COMMAND WRITE CONTROL REGISTER COMMAND SEQUENCE CS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 SCK Address Opcode SI 0 1 0 A4 3 2 Data Byte 1 0 D7 6 5 4 3 2 1 D0 High-Impedance State SO DS39662B-page 28 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 31. ENC28J60 4.2.4 WRITE BUFFER MEMORY COMMAND any of the ETH registers in the current bank. After the BFS command and address are sent, the data byte containing the bit field set information should be sent, MSb first. The supplied data will be logically ORed to the content of the addressed register on the rising edge of the SCK line for the D0 bit. The Write Buffer Memory (WBM) command allows the host controller to write bytes to the integrated 8-Kbyte transmit and receive buffer memory. If the AUTOINC bit in the ECON2 register is set, after the last bit of each byte is written, the EWRPT Pointer will automatically be incremented to point to the next sequential address (current address + 1). If address 1FFFh is written with AUTOINC set, the Write Pointer will increment to 0000h. If the CS line is brought high before eight bits are loaded, the operation will be aborted for that data byte. The BFS operation is terminated by raising the CS pin. 4.2.6 The WBM command is started by lowering the CS pin. The WBM opcode should then be sent to the ENC28J60, followed by the 5-bit constant 1Ah. After the WBM command and constant are sent, the data to be stored in the memory pointed to by EWRPT should be shifted out MSb first to the ENC28J60. After 8 data bits are received, the Write Pointer will automatically increment if AUTOINC is set. The host controller can continue to provide clocks on the SCK pin and send data on the SI pin, without raising CS, to keep writing to the memory. In this manner, with AUTOINC enabled, it is possible to continuously write sequential bytes to the buffer memory without any extra SPI command overhead. The BFC command is started by lowering the CS pin. The BFC opcode should then be sent, followed by a 5-bit address (A4 through A0). The 5-bit address identifies any of the ETH registers in the current bank. After the BFC command and address are sent, a data byte containing the bit field clear information should be sent, MSb first. The supplied data will be logically inverted and subsequently ANDed to the contents of the addressed register on the rising edge of the SCK line for the D0 bit. The WBM command is terminated by bringing up the CS pin. Refer to Figure 4-6 for a detailed illustration of the write sequence. 4.2.5 BIT FIELD CLEAR COMMAND The Bit Field Clear (BFC) command is used to clear up to 8 bits in any of the ETH Control registers. Note that this command cannot be used on the MAC registers, MII registers, PHY registers or buffer memory. The BFC command uses the provided data byte to perform a bitwise NOTAND operation on the addressed register contents. As an example, if a register had the contents of F1h and the BFC command was executed with an operand of 17h, then the register would be changed to have the contents of E0h. BIT FIELD SET COMMAND The Bit Field Set (BFS) command is used to set up to 8 bits in any of the ETH Control registers. Note that this command cannot be used on the MAC registers, MII registers, PHY registers or buffer memory. The BFS command uses the provided data byte to perform a bit-wise OR operation on the addressed register contents. The BFC operation is terminated by bringing the CS pin high. If CS is brought high before eight bits are loaded, the operation will be aborted for that data byte. The BFS command is started by pulling the CS pin low. The BFS opcode is then sent, followed by a 5-bit address (A4 through A0). The 5-bit address identifies FIGURE 4-6: WRITE BUFFER MEMORY COMMAND SEQUENCE CS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 SCK Opcode SI 0 1 1 Address 1 1 SO © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. 0 1 Data Byte 0 0 7 6 5 4 3 Data Byte 1 2 1 D0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 High-Impedance State Preliminary DS39662B-page 29
  • 32. ENC28J60 4.2.7 SYSTEM RESET COMMAND The command is started by pulling the CS pin low. The SRC opcode is the sent, followed by a 5-bit Soft Reset command constant of 1Fh. The SRC operation is terminated by raising the CS pin. The System Reset Command (SRC) allows the host controller to issue a System Soft Reset command. Unlike other SPI commands, the SRC is only a singlebyte command and does not operate on any register. FIGURE 4-7: Figure 4-7 shows a detailed illustration of the System Reset Command sequence. For more information on SRC’s Soft Reset, refer to Section 11.2 “System Reset”. SYSTEM RESET COMMAND SEQUENCE CS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SCK Opcode SI SO DS39662B-page 30 1 1 Data Constant (1Fh) 1 1 1 1 1 1 High-Impedance State Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 33. ENC28J60 5.0 ETHERNET OVERVIEW 5.1.1 Before discussing the use of the ENC28J60 as an Ethernet interface, it may be helpful to review the structure of a typical data frame. Users requiring more information should refer to IEEE Standard 802.3 which is the basis for the Ethernet protocol. 5.1 Packet Format Normal IEEE 802.3 compliant Ethernet frames are between 64 and 1518 bytes long. They are made up of five or six different fields: a destination MAC address, a source MAC address, a type/length field, data payload, an optional padding field and a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC). Additionally, when transmitted on the Ethernet medium, a 7-byte preamble field and start-offrame delimiter byte are appended to the beginning of the Ethernet packet. Thus, traffic seen on the twisted pair cabling will appear as shown in Figure 5-1. FIGURE 5-1: PREAMBLE/START-OF-FRAME DELIMITER When transmitting and receiving data with the ENC28J60, the preamble and start of frame delimiter bytes will automatically be generated or stripped from the packets when they are transmitted or received. The host controller does not need to concern itself with them. Normally, the host controller will also not need to concern itself with padding and the CRC which the ENC28J60 will also be able to automatically generate when transmitting and verify when receiving. The padding and CRC fields will, however, be written into the receive buffer when packets arrive, so they may be evaluated by the host controller if needed. ETHERNET PACKET FORMAT Number of Bytes Field Comments 7 Preamble Filtered out by the Module 1 SFD Start-of-Frame Delimiter (filtered out by the module) 6 DA Destination Address, such as Multicast, Broadcast or Unicast 6 SA Source Address 2 Type/Length Type of Packet or the Length of the Packet Used in the Calculation of the FCS Data Packet Payload (with optional padding) 46-1500 Padding 4 Note 1: FCS(1) Frame Check Sequence – CRC The FCS is transmitted starting with bit 31 and ending with bit 0. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 31
  • 34. ENC28J60 5.1.2 DESTINATION ADDRESS 5.1.5 The destination address field is a 6-byte field filled with the MAC address of the device that the packet is directed to. If the Least Significant bit in the first byte of the MAC address is set, the address is a multicast destination. For example, 01-00-00-00-F0-00 and 33-45-67-89-AB-CD are multicast addresses, while 00-00-00-00-F0-00 and 32-45-67-89-AB-CD are not. Packets with multicast destination addresses are designed to arrive and be important to a selected group of Ethernet nodes. If the destination address field is the reserved multicast address, FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF, the packet is a broadcast packet and it will be directed to everyone sharing the network. If the Least Significant bit in the first byte of the MAC address is clear, the address is a unicast address and will be designed for usage by only the addressed node. The ENC28J60 incorporates receive filters which can be used to discard or accept packets with multicast, broadcast and/or unicast destination addresses. When transmitting packets, the host controller is responsible for writing the desired destination address into the transmit buffer. 5.1.3 SOURCE ADDRESS The source address field is a 6-byte field filled with the MAC address of the node which created the Ethernet packet. Users of the ENC28J60 must generate a unique MAC address for each controller used. MAC addresses consist of two portions. The first three bytes are known as the Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI). OUIs are distributed by the IEEE. The last three bytes are address bytes at the discretion of the company that purchased the OUI. When transmitting packets, the assigned source MAC address must be written into the transmit buffer by the host controller. The ENC28J60 will not automatically transmit the contents of the MAADR registers which are used for the unicast receive filter. 5.1.4 TYPE/LENGTH The type/length field is a 2-byte field which defines which protocol the following packet data belongs to. Alternately, if the field is filled with the contents of 05DCh (1500) or any smaller number, the field is considered a length field and it specifies the amount of non-padding data which follows in the data field. Users implementing proprietary networks may choose to treat this field as a length field, while applications implementing protocols such as the Internet Protocol (IP) or Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), should program this field with the appropriate type defined by the protocol’s specification when transmitting packets. DS39662B-page 32 DATA The data field is a variable length field anywhere from 0 to 1500 bytes. Larger data packets will violate Ethernet standards and will be dropped by most Ethernet nodes. The ENC28J60, however, is capable of transmitting and receiving larger packets when the Huge Frame Enable bit is set (MACON3.HFRMEN = 1). 5.1.6 PADDING The padding field is a variable length field added to meet IEEE 802.3 specification requirements when small data payloads are used. The destination, source, type, data and padding of an Ethernet packet must be no smaller than 60 bytes. Adding the required 4-byte CRC field, packets must be no smaller than 64 bytes. If the data field is less than 46 bytes long, a padding field is required. When transmitting packets, the ENC28J60 automatically generates zero padding if the MACON3.PADCFG<2:0> bits are configured to do so. Otherwise, the host controller should manually add padding to the packet before transmitting it. The ENC28J60 will not prevent the transmission of undersize packets should the host controller command such an action. When receiving packets, the ENC28J60 automatically rejects packets which are less than 18 bytes; it is assumed that a packet this small does not contain even the minimum of source and destination addresses, type information and FCS checksum required for all packets. All packets 18 bytes and larger will be subject to the standard receive filtering criteria and may be accepted as normal traffic. To conform with IEEE 802.3 requirements, the application itself will need to inspect all received packets and reject those smaller than 64 bytes. 5.1.7 CRC The CRC field is a 4-byte field which contains an industry standard 32-bit CRC calculated with the data from the destination, source, type, data and padding fields. When receiving packets, the ENC28J60 will check the CRC of each incoming packet. If ERXFCON.CRCEN is set, packets with invalid CRCs will automatically be discarded. If CRCEN is clear and the packet meets all other receive filtering criteria, the packet will be written into the receive buffer and the host controller will be able to determine if the CRC was valid by reading the receive status vector (see Section 7.2 “Receiving Packets”). When transmitting packets, the ENC28J60 will automatically generate a valid CRC and transmit it if the MACON3.PADCFG<2:0> bits are configured to cause this. Otherwise, the host controller must generate the CRC and place it in the transmit buffer. Given the complexity of calculating a CRC, it is highly recommended that the PADCFG bits be configured such that the ENC28J60 will automatically generate the CRC field. Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 35. ENC28J60 6.0 INITIALIZATION 6.2 Before the ENC28J60 can be used to transmit and receive packets, certain device settings must be initialized. Depending on the application, some configuration options may need to be changed. Normally, these tasks may be accomplished once after Reset and do not need to be changed thereafter. 6.1 Receive Buffer Before receiving any packets, the receive buffer must be initialized by programming the ERXST and ERXND Pointers. All memory between and including the ERXST and ERXND addresses will be dedicated to the receive hardware. It is recommended that the ERXST Pointer be programmed with an even address. Applications expecting large amounts of data and frequent packet delivery may wish to allocate most of the memory as the receive buffer. Applications that may need to save older packets or have several packets ready for transmission should allocate less memory. When programming the ERXST or ERXND Pointer, the internal hardware copy of the ERXWRPT registers will automatically be updated with the value of ERXST. This value will be used as the starting location when the receive hardware begins writing received data. The ERXWRPT registers are updated by the hardware only when a new packet is successfully received. Note: Transmission Buffer All memory which is not used by the receive buffer is considered the transmission buffer. Data which is to be transmitted should be written into any unused space. After a packet is transmitted, however, the hardware will write a seven-byte status vector into memory after the last byte in the packet. Therefore, the host controller should leave at least seven bytes between each packet and the beginning of the receive buffer. No explicit action is required to initialize the transmission buffer. 6.3 Receive Filters The appropriate receive filters should be enabled or disabled by writing to the ERXFCON register. See Section 8.0 “Receive Filters” for information on how to configure it. 6.4 Waiting For OST If the initialization procedure is being executed immediately following a Power-on Reset, the ESTAT.CLKRDY bit should be polled to make certain that enough time has elapsed before proceeding to modify the MAC and PHY registers. For more information on the OST, see Section 2.2 “Oscillator Start-up Timer”. After writing to ERXST or ERXND, the ERXWRPT registers are not updated immediately; only the internal hardware copy of the ERXWRPT registers is updated. Therefore, comparing if (ERXWRPT = = ERXST) is not practical in a firmware initialization routine. For tracking purposes, the ERXRDPT registers should additionally be programmed with the same value. To program ERXRDPT, the host controller must write to ERXRDPTL first, followed by ERXRDPTH. See Section 7.2.4 “Freeing Receive Buffer Space” for more information. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 33
  • 36. ENC28J60 6.5 MAC Initialization Settings 4. Several of the MAC registers require configuration during initialization. This only needs to be done once; the order of programming is unimportant. 1. 2. 3. Set the MARXEN bit in MACON1 to enable the MAC to receive frames. If using full duplex, most applications should also set TXPAUS and RXPAUS to allow IEEE defined flow control to function. Configure the PADCFG, TXCRCEN and FULDPX bits of MACON3. Most applications should enable automatic padding to at least 60 bytes and always append a valid CRC. For convenience, many applications may wish to set the FRMLNEN bit as well to enable frame length status reporting. The FULDPX bit should be set if the application will be connected to a full-duplex configured remote node; otherwise, it should be left clear. Configure the bits in MACON4. For conformance to the IEEE 802.3 standard, set the DEFER bit. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. REGISTER 6-1: Program the MAMXFL registers with the maximum frame length to be permitted to be received or transmitted. Normal network nodes are designed to handle packets that are 1518 bytes or less. Configure the Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap register, MABBIPG. Most applications will program this register with 15h when Full-Duplex mode is used and 12h when Half-Duplex mode is used. Configure the Non-Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap register low byte, MAIPGL. Most applications will program this register with 12h. If half duplex is used, the Non-Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap register high byte, MAIPGH, should be programmed. Most applications will program this register to 0Ch. If Half-Duplex mode is used, program the Retransmission and Collision Window registers, MACLCON1 and MACLCON2. Most applications will not need to change the default Reset values. If the network is spread over exceptionally long cables, the default value of MACLCON2 may need to be increased. Program the local MAC address into the MAADR1:MAADR6 registers. MACON1: MAC CONTROL REGISTER 1 U-0 U-0 U-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — r TXPAUS RXPAUS PASSALL MARXEN bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 Reserved: Maintain as ‘0’ bit 3 TXPAUS: Pause Control Frame Transmission Enable bit 1 = Allow the MAC to transmit pause control frames (needed for flow control in full duplex) 0 = Disallow pause frame transmissions bit 2 RXPAUS: Pause Control Frame Reception Enable bit 1 = Inhibit transmissions when pause control frames are received (normal operation) 0 = Ignore pause control frames which are received bit 1 PASSALL: Pass All Received Frames Enable bit 1 = Control frames received by the MAC will be written into the receive buffer if not filtered out 0 = Control frames will be discarded after being processed by the MAC (normal operation) bit 0 MARXEN: MAC Receive Enable bit 1 = Enable packets to be received by the MAC 0 = Disable packet reception DS39662B-page 34 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 37. ENC28J60 REGISTER 6-2: MACON3: MAC CONTROL REGISTER 3 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PADCFG2 PADCFG1 PADCFG0 TXCRCEN PHDREN HFRMEN FRMLNEN FULDPX bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 PADCFG2:PADCFG0: Automatic Pad and CRC Configuration bits 111 = All short frames will be zero padded to 64 bytes and a valid CRC will then be appended 110 = No automatic padding of short frames 101 = MAC will automatically detect VLAN Protocol frames which have a 8100h type field and automatically pad to 64 bytes. If the frame is not a VLAN frame, it will be padded to 60 bytes. After padding, a valid CRC will be appended. 100 = No automatic padding of short frames 011 = All short frames will be zero padded to 64 bytes and a valid CRC will then be appended 010 = No automatic padding of short frames 001 = All short frames will be zero padded to 60 bytes and a valid CRC will then be appended 000 = No automatic padding of short frames bit 4 TXCRCEN: Transmit CRC Enable bit 1 = MAC will apend a valid CRC to all frames transmitted regardless of PADCFG. TXCRCEN must be set if PADCFG specifies that a valid CRC will be appended. 0 = MAC will not append a CRC. The last 4 bytes will be checked and if it is an invalid CRC, it will be reported in the transmit status vector. bit 3 PHDREN: Proprietary Header Enable bit 1 = Frames presented to the MAC contain a 4-byte proprietary header which will not be used when calculating the CRC 0 = No proprietary header is present. The CRC will cover all data (normal operation). bit 2 HFRMEN: Huge Frame Enable bit 1 = Frames of any size will be allowed to be transmitted and receieved 0 = Frames bigger than MAMXFL will be aborted when transmitted or received bit 1 FRMLNEN: Frame Length Checking Enable bit 1 = The type/length field of transmitted and received frames will be checked. If it represents a length, the frame size will be compared and mismatches will be reported in the transmit/receive status vector. 0 = Frame lengths will not be compared with the type/length field bit 0 FULDPX: MAC Full-Duplex Enable bit 1 = MAC will operate in Full-Duplex mode. PDPXMD bit must also be set. 0 = MAC will operate in Half-Duplex mode. PDPXMD bit must also be clear. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 35
  • 38. ENC28J60 REGISTER 6-3: MACON4: MAC CONTROL REGISTER 4 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 R-0 R-0 — DEFER BPEN NOBKOFF — — r r bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6 DEFER: Defer Transmission Enable bit (applies to half duplex only) 1 = When the medium is occupied, the MAC will wait indefinitely for it to become free when attempting to transmit (use this setting for 802.3 compliance) 0 = When the medium is occupied, the MAC will abort the transmission after the excessive deferral limit is reached bit 5 BPEN: No Backoff During Backpressure Enable bit (applies to half duplex only) 1 = After incidentally causing a collision during backpressure, the MAC will immediately begin retransmitting 0 = After incidentally causing a collision during backpressure, the MAC will delay using the Binary Exponential Backoff algorithm before attempting to retransmit (normal operation) bit 4 NOBKOFF: No Backoff Enable bit (applies to half duplex only) 1 = After any collision, the MAC will immediately begin retransmitting 0 = After any collision, the MAC will delay using the Binary Exponential Backoff algorithm before attempting to retransmit (normal operation) bit 3-2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1-0 Reserved: Maintain as ‘0’ REGISTER 6-4: MABBIPG: MAC BACK-TO-BACK INTER-PACKET GAP REGISTER U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — BBIPG6 BBIPG5 BBIPG4 BBIPG3 BBIPG2 BBIPG1 BBIPG0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6-0 BBIPG6:BBIPG0: Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap Delay Time bits When FULDPX (MACON3<0>) = 1: Nibble time offset delay between the end of one transmission and the beginning of the next in a back-to-back sequence. The register value should be programmed to the desired period in nibble times minus 3. The recommended setting is 15h which represents the minimum IEEE specified Inter-Packet Gap (IPG) of 9.6 μs. When FULDPX (MACON3<0>) = 0: Nibble time offset delay between the end of one transmission and the beginning of the next in a back-to-back sequence. The register value should be programmed to the desired period in nibble times minus 6. The recommended setting is 12h which represents the minimum IEEE specified Inter-Packet Gap (IPG) of 9.6 μs. DS39662B-page 36 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 39. ENC28J60 6.6 PHY Initialization Settings Depending on the application, bits in three of the PHY module’s registers may also require configuration. The PHCON1.PDPXMD bit partially controls the device’s half/full-duplex configuration. Normally, this bit is initialized correctly by the external circuitry (see Section 2.6 “LED Configuration”). If the external circuitry is not present or incorrect, however, the host controller must program the bit properly. Alternatively, for an externally configurable system, the PDPXMD bit may be read and the FULDPX bit be programmed to match. If using half duplex, the host controller may wish to set the PHCON2.HDLDIS bit to prevent automatic loopback of the data which is transmitted. The PHY register, PHLCON, controls the outputs of LEDA and LEDB. If an application requires a LED configuration other than the default, PHLCON must be altered to match the new requirements. The settings for LED operation are discussed in Section 2.6 “LED Configuration”. The PHLCON register is shown in Register 2-2 (page 9). For proper duplex operation, the PHCON1.PDPXMD bit must also match the value of the MACON3.FULDPX bit. REGISTER 6-5: PHCON2: PHY CONTROL REGISTER 2 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — FRCLNK TXDIS r r JABBER r HDLDIS bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 r r r r r r r r bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 14 FRCLNK: PHY Force Linkup bit 1 = Force linkup even when no link partner is detected 0 = Normal operation bit 13 TXDIS: Twisted-Pair Transmitter Disable bit 1 = Disable twisted-pair transmitter 0 = Normal operation bit 12-11 Reserved: Write as ‘0’ bit 10 JABBER: Jabber Correction Disable bit 1 = Disable jabber correction 0 = Normal operation bit 9 Reserved: Write as ‘0’ bit 8 HDLDIS: PHY Half-Duplex Loopback Disable bit When PHCON1<8> = 1 or PHCON1<14> = 1: This bit is ignored. When PHCON1<8> = 0 and PHCON1<14> = 0: 1 = Transmitted data will only be sent out on the twisted-pair interface 0 = Transmitted data will be looped back to the MAC and sent out on the twisted-pair interface bit 7-0 Reserved: Write as ‘0’ © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 37
  • 41. ENC28J60 7.0 TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING PACKETS 7.1 Transmitting Packets The MAC inside the ENC28J60 will automatically generate the preamble and start-of-frame delimiter fields when transmitting. Additionally, the MAC can generate any padding (if needed) and the CRC if configured to do so. The host controller must generate and write all other frame fields into the buffer memory for transmission. FIGURE 7-1: Additionally, the ENC28J60 requires a single per packet control byte to precede the packet for transmission. The per packet control byte is organized as shown in Figure 7-1. Before transmitting packets, the MAC registers which alter the transmission characteristics should be initialized as documented in Section 6.0 “Initialization”. For an example of how the entire transmit packet and results will look in memory, see Figure 7-2. FORMAT FOR PER PACKET CONTROL BYTES — — — — PHUGEEN PPADEN PCRCEN bit 7 POVERRIDE bit 0 bit 7-4 Unused bit 3 PHUGEEN: Per Packet Huge Frame Enable bit When POVERRIDE = 1: 1 = The packet will be transmitted in whole 0 = The MAC will transmit up to the number of bytes specified by MAMXFL. If the packet is larger than MAMXFL, it will be aborted after MAMXFL is reached. When POVERRIDE = 0: This bit is ignored. bit 2 PPADEN: Per Packet Padding Enable bit When POVERRIDE = 1: 1 = The packet will be zero padded to 60 bytes if it is less than 60 bytes 0 = The packet will be trasmitted without adding any padding bytes When POVERRIDE = 0: This bit is ignored. bit 1 PCRCEN: Per Packet CRC Enable bit When POVERRIDE = 1: 1 = A valid CRC will be calculated and attached to the frame 0 = No CRC will be appended. The last 4 bytes of the frame will be checked for validity as a CRC. When POVERRIDE = 0: This bit is ignored. bit 0 POVERRIDE: Per Packet Override bit 1 = The values of PCRCEN, PPADEN and PHUGEEN will override the configuration defined by MACON3 0 = The values in MACON3 will be used to determine how the packet will be transmitted © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 39
  • 42. ENC28J60 FIGURE 7-2: SAMPLE TRANSMIT PACKET LAYOUT Buffer Pointers Address Memory ETXST = 0120h 0120h 0121h 0Eh data[1] 0122h data[2] Description Control PHUGEEN, PPADN, PCRCEN and POVERRIDE Data Packet ETXND = 0156h 0156h 0157h 0158h 0159h 016Ah 016Bh 016Ch 016Dh 016Eh Destination Address, Source Address, Type/Length and Data Status Vector Status Vector Written by the Hardware data[m] tsv[7:0] tsv[15:8] tsv[23:16] tsv[31:24] tsv[39:32] tsv[47:40] tsv[55:48] Start of the Next Packet To achieve the example layout shown in Figure 7-2 and to transmit a packet, the host controller should: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Appropriately program the ETXST Pointer to point to an unused location in memory. It will point to the per packet control byte. In the example, it would be programmed to 0120h. It is recommended that an even address be used for ETXST. Use the WBM SPI command to write the per packet control byte, the destination address, the source MAC address, the type/length and the data payload. Appropriately program the ETXND Pointer. It should point to the last byte in the data payload. In the example, it would be programmed to 0156h. Clear EIR.TXIF, set EIE.TXIE and set EIE.INTIE to enable an interrupt when done (if desired). Start the transmission process by setting ECON1.TXRTS. If a DMA operation was in progress while the TXRTS bit was set, the ENC28J60 will wait until the DMA operation is complete before attempting to transmit the packet. This possible delay is required because the DS39662B-page 40 DMA and transmission engine share the same memory access port. Similarly, if the DMAST bit in ECON1 is set after TXRTS is already set, the DMA will wait until the TXRTS bit becomes clear before doing anything. While the transmission is in progress, none of the unshaded bits (except for the EECON1 register’s bits) in Table 7-2 should be changed. Additionally, none of the bytes to be transmitted should be read or written to through the SPI. If the host controller wishes to cancel the transmission, it can clear the TXRTS bit. When the packet is finished transmitting or was aborted due to an error/cancellation, the ECON1.TXRTS bit will be cleared, a seven-byte transmit status vector will be written to the location pointed to by ETXND + 1, the EIR.TXIF will be set and an interrupt will be generated (if enabled). The ETXST and ETXND Pointers will not be modified. To check if the packet was successfully transmitted, the ESTAT.TXABRT bit should be read. If it was set, the host controller may interrogate the ESTAT.LATECOL bit in addition to the various fields in the transmit status vector to determine the cause. The transmit status vector is organized as shown in Table 7-1. Multi-byte fields are written in little-endian format. Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 43. ENC28J60 TABLE 7-1: Bit 55-52 TRANSMIT STATUS VECTORS Field Description Zero 0 51 Transmit VLAN Tagged Frame Frame’s length/type field contained 8100h which is the VLAN protocol identifier. 50 Backpressure Applied Carrier sense method backpressure was previously applied. 49 Transmit Pause Control Frame The frame transmitted was a control frame with a valid pause opcode. 48 Transmit Control Frame The frame transmitted was a control frame. Total Bytes Transmitted on Wire Total bytes transmitted on the wire for the current packet, including all bytes from collided attempts. 31 Transmit Underrun Reserved. This bit will always be ‘0’. 30 Transmit Giant Byte count for frame was greater than MAMXFL. 29 Transmit Late Collision Collision occurred beyond the collision window (MACLCON2). 28 Transmit Excessive Collision Packet was aborted after the number of collisions exceeded the retransmission maximum (MACLCON1). 27 Transmit Excessive Defer Packet was deferred in excess of 24,287 bit times (2.4287ms). 26 Transmit Packet Defer Packet was deferred for at least one attempt but less than an excessive defer. 47-32 25 Transmit Broadcast Packet’s destination address was a broadcast address. 24 Transmit Multicast Packet’s destination address was a multicast address. 23 Transmit Done Transmission of the packet was completed. 22 Transmit Length Out of Range Indicates that frame type/length field was larger than 1500 bytes (type field). 21 Transmit Length Check Error Indicates that frame length field value in the packet does not match the actual data byte length and is not a type field. MACON3.FRMLNEN must be set to get this error. 20 Transmit CRC Error The attached CRC in the packet did not match the internally generated CRC. 19-16 Transmit Collision Count Number of collisions the current packet incurred during transmission attempts. It applies to successfully transmitted packets and as such, will not show the possible maximum count of 16 collisions. 15-0 Transmit Byte Count Total bytes in frame not counting collided bytes. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 41
  • 44. ENC28J60 TABLE 7-2: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS USED FOR PACKET TRANSMISSION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page INTIE — PKTIE PKTIF DMAIE DMAIF LINKIE LINKIF TXIE TXIF r r TXERIE TXERIF RXERIE RXERIF 13 13 ESTAT INT BUFER r LATECOL — RXBUSY TXABRT CLKRDY 13 ECON1 TXRST RXRST DMAST CSUMEN TXRTS RXEN BSEL1 BSEL0 Register Name EIE EIR ETXSTL TX Start Low Byte (ETXST<7:0>) ETXSTH — ETXNDL — — TX Start High Byte (ETXST<12:8>) 13 TX End High Byte (ETXND<12:8>) 13 TX End Low Byte (ETXND<7:0>) ETXNDH — — — 13 13 13 MACON1 — — — r TXPAUS RXPAUS PASSALL MARXEN 14 MACON3 PADCFG2 PADCFG1 PADCFG0 TXCRCEN PHDREN HFRMEN FRMLNEN FULDPX 14 DEFER BPEN NOBKOFF — — r r 14 MACON4 — MABBIPG — Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap (BBIPG<6:0>) 14 MAIPGL — Non-Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap Low Byte (MAIPGL<6:0>) 14 MAIPGH — Non-Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap High Byte (MAIPGH<6:0>) MACLCON1 — — — — MACLCON2 — — 14 Retransmission Maximum (RETMAX<3:0>) Collision Window (COLWIN<5:0>) 14 14 MAMXFLL Maximum Frame Length Low Byte (MAMXFL<7:0>) 14 MAMXFLH Maximum Frame Length High Byte (MAMXFL<15:8>) 14 Legend: — = unimplemented, r = reserved bit. Shaded cells are not used. DS39662B-page 42 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 45. ENC28J60 7.2 Receiving Packets 7.2.1 ENABLING RECEPTION Assuming that the receive buffer has been initialized, the MAC has been properly configured and the receive filters have been configured to receive Ethernet packets, the host controller should: 1. 2. 3. If an interrupt is desired whenever a packet is received, set EIE.PKTIE and EIE.INTIE. If an interrupt is desired whenever a packet is dropped due to insufficient buffer space, clear EIR.RXERIF and set both EIE.RXERIE and EIE.INTIE Enable reception by setting ECON1.RXEN. After setting RXEN, the Duplex mode and the Receive Buffer Start and End Pointers should not be modified. Additionally, to prevent unexpected packets from arriving, it is recommended that RXEN be cleared before altering the receive filter configuration (ERXFCON) and MAC address. FIGURE 7-3: After reception is enabled, packets which are not filtered out will be written into the circular receive buffer. Any packet which does not meet the necessary filter criteria will be discarded and the host controller will not have any means of identifying that a packet was thrown away. When a packet is accepted and completely written into the buffer, the EPKTCNT register will increment, the EIR.PKTIF bit will be set, an interrupt will be generated (if enabled) and the Hardware Write Pointer, ERXWRPT, will automatically advance. 7.2.2 RECEIVE PACKET LAYOUT Figure 7-3 shows the layout of a received packet. The packets are preceded by a six-byte header which contains a Next Packet Pointer, in addition to a receive status vector which contains receive statistics, including the packet’s size. This receive status vector is shown in Table 7-3. If the last byte in the packet ends on an odd value address, the hardware will automatically add a padding byte when advancing the Hardware Write Pointer. As such, all packets will start on an even boundary. SAMPLE RECEIVE PACKET LAYOUT Address Memory Description Packet N – 1 End of the Previous Packet 101Fh 1020h 1021h 1022h 1023h 1024h 1025h 1026h 1027h 6Eh 10h rsv[7:0] rsv[15:8] rsv[23:16] rsv[30:24] data[1] data[2] Low Byte High Byte status[7:0] status[15:8] status[23:16] status[31:24] Next Packet Pointer Receive Status Vector Packet N 1059h 106Ah 106Bh 106Ch 106Dh 106Eh data[m-3] data[m-2] data[m-1] data[m] crc[31:24] crc[23:16] crc[15:8] crc[7:0] Byte Skipped to Ensure Even Buffer Address Packet N + 1 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Packet Data: Destination Address, Source Address, Type/Length, Data, Padding, CRC Start of the Next Packet Preliminary DS39662B-page 43
  • 46. ENC28J60 TABLE 7-3: RECEIVE STATUS VECTORS Bit Field 31 Zero Description 0 30 Receive VLAN Type Detected Current frame was recognized as a VLAN tagged frame. 29 Receive Unknown Opcode Current frame was recognized as a control frame but it contained an unknown opcode. 28 Receive Pause Control Frame Current frame was recognized as a control frame containing a valid pause frame opcode and a valid destination address. 27 Receive Control Frame Current frame was recognized as a control frame for having a valid type/length designating it as a control frame. 26 Dribble Nibble Indicates that after the end of this packet, an additional 1 to 7 bits were received. The extra bits were thrown away. 25 Receive Broadcast Packet Indicates packet received had a valid broadcast address. 24 Receive Multicast Packet Indicates packet received had a valid multicast address. 23 Received Ok Indicates that at the packet had a valid CRC and no symbol errors. 22 Length Out of Range Indicates that frame type/length field was larger than 1500 bytes (type field). 21 Length Check Error Indicates that frame length field value in the packet does not match the actual data byte length and specifies a valid length. 20 CRC Error Indicates that frame CRC field value does not match the CRC calculated by the MAC. 19 Reserved 18 Carrier Event Previously Seen 17 Reserved 16 Long Event/Drop Event Indicates a packet over 50,000 bit times occurred or that a packet was dropped since the last receive. Received Byte Count Indicates length of the received frame. This includes the destination address, source address, type/length, data, padding and CRC fields. This field is stored in little-endian format. 15-0 7.2.3 Indicates that at some time since the last receive, a carrier event was detected. The carrier event is not associated with this packet. A carrier event is activity on the receive channel that does not result in a packet receive attempt being made. READING RECEIVED PACKETS To process the packet, the host controller will normally use the RBM SPI command and start reading from the beginning of the next Packet Pointer. The host controller will save the next Packet Pointer, any necessary bytes from the receive status vector and then proceed to read the actual packet contents. If ECON2.AUTOINC is set, it will be able to sequentially read the entire packet without ever modifying the ERDPT registers. The Read Pointer would automatically wrap at the end of the circular receive buffer to the beginning. EXAMPLE 7-1: In the event that the application needed to do random access to the packet, it would be necessary to manually calculate the proper ERDPT, taking care to not exceed the end of the receive buffer if the packet spans the ERXND-to-ERXST buffer boundary. In other words, given the packet start address and a desired offset, the application should follow the logic shown in Example 7-1. RANDOM ACCESS ADDRESS CALCULATION if Packet Start Address + Offset > ERXND, then ERDPT = Packet Start Address + Offset – (ERXND – ERXST + 1) else ERDPT = Packet Start Address + Offset DS39662B-page 44 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 47. ENC28J60 7.2.4 FREEING RECEIVE BUFFER SPACE After the host controller has processed a packet (or part of the packet) and wishes to free the buffer space used by the processed data, the host controller must advance the Receive Buffer Read Pointer, ERXRDPT. The ENC28J60 will always write up to, but not including, the memory pointed to by the Receive Buffer Read Pointer. If the ENC28J60 ever attempts to overwrite the Receive Buffer Read Pointer location, the packet in progress will be aborted, the EIR.RXERIF will be set and an interrupt will be generated (if enabled). In this manner, the hardware will never overwrite unprocessed packets. Normally, the ERXRDPT will be advanced to the value pointed to by the next Packet Pointer which precedes the receive status vector for the current packet. Following such a procedure will not require any Pointer calculations to account for wrapping at the end of the circular receive buffer. The Receive Buffer Read Pointer Low Byte (ERXRDPTL register) is internally buffered to prevent the Pointer from moving when only one byte is updated through the SPI. To move ERXRDPT, the host controller must write to ERXRDPTL first. The write will update the internal buffer but will not affect the register. When the host controller writes to ERXRDPTH, the internally buffered low byte will be loaded into the ERXRDPTL register at the same time. The ERXRDPT bytes can be read in any order. When they are read, the actual value of the registers will be returned. As a result, the buffered low byte is not readable. In addition to advancing the Receive Buffer Read Pointer, after each packet is fully processed, the host controller must write a ‘1’ to the ECON2.PKTDEC bit. Doing so will cause the EPKTCNT register to decrement by 1. After decrementing, if EPKTCNT is ‘0’, the EIR.PKTIF flag will automatically be cleared. Otherwise, it will remain set, indicating that additional packets are in the receive buffer and are waiting to be processed. Attempts to decrement EPKTCNT below 0 are ignored. Additionally, if the EPKTCNT register ever maximizes at 255, all new packets which are received will be aborted, even if buffer space is available. To indicate the error, the EIR.RXERIF will be set and an interrupt will be generated (if enabled). To prevent this condition, the host controller must properly decrement the counter whenever a packet is processed. EXAMPLE 7-2: Because only one Pointer is available to control buffer area ownership, the host controller must process packets in the order they are received. If the host controller wishes to save a packet to be processed later, it should copy the packet to an unused location in memory. It may accomplish this efficiently using the integrated DMA controller (see Section 13.0 “Direct Memory Access Controller”). 7.2.5 RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE At any time the host controller wishes to know how much receive buffer space is remaining, it should read the Hardware Write Pointer (ERXWRPT registers) and compare it with the ERXRDPT registers. Combined with the known size of the receive buffer, the free space can be derived. Note: The ERXWRPT registers only update when a packet has been successfully received. If the host controller reads it just before another packet is to be successfully completed, the value returned could be stale and off by the maximum frame length permitted (MAMXFLN) plus 7. Furthermore, as the host controller reads one byte of ERXWRPT, a new packet may arrive and update the Pointer before the host controller has an opportunity to read the other byte of ERXWRPT. When reading the ERXWRPT register with the receive hardware enabled, special care must be taken to ensure the low and high bytes are read as a matching set. To be assured that a matching set is obtained: 1. 2. 3. 4. Read the EPKTCNT register and save its contents. Read ERXWRPTL and ERXWRPTH. Read the EPKTCNT register again. Compare the two packet counts. If they are not the same, go back to step 2. With the Hardware Write Pointer obtained, the free space can be calculated as shown in Example 7-2. The hardware prohibits moving the Write Pointer to the same value occupied by ERXRDPT (except when the Buffer Pointers are being configured), so at least one byte will always go unused in the buffer. The example calculation reflects the lost byte. RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE CALCULATION if ERXWRPT > ERXRDPT, then Free Space = (ERXND – ERXST) – (ERXWRPT – ERXRDPT) else if ERXWRPT = ERXRDPT, then Free Space = (ERXND – ERXST) else Free Space = ERXRDPT – ERXWRPT – 1 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 45
  • 48. ENC28J60 TABLE 7-4: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS USED FOR PACKET RECEPTION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page EIE INTIE PKTIE DMAIE LINKIE TXIE r TXERIE RXERIE 13 EIR — PKTIF DMAIF LINKIF TXIF r TXERIF RXERIF 13 ESTAT INT BUFER r LATECOL — RXBUSY TXABRT CLKRDY 13 ECON2 AUTOINC PKTDEC PWRSV r VRPS — — — 13 ECON1 TXRST RXRST DMAST CSUMEN TXRTS RXEN BSEL1 BSEL0 13 Register Name ERXSTL RX Start Low Byte (ERXST<7:0>) ERXSTH — ERXNDL — ERXRDPTL 13 RX Start High Byte (ERXST<12:8>) 13 — — RX End High Byte (ERXND<12:8>) 13 13 RX RD Pointer Low Byte (ERXRDPT<7:0>) ERXRDPTH EPKTCNT — RX End Low Byte (ERXND<7:0>) ERXNDH ERXFCON — — — — UCEN ANDOR CRCEN 13 RX RD Pointer High Byte (ERXRDPT<12:8>) PMEN MPEN HTEN MCEN 13 BCEN Ethernet Packet Count 14 14 MACON1 — — — r TXPAUS RXPAUS PASSALL MARXEN MACON3 PADCFG2 PADCFG1 PADCFG0 TXCRCEN PHDREN HFRMEN FRMLNEN FULDPX MAMXFLL Maximum Frame Length Low Byte (MAMXFL<7:0>) 14 Maximum Frame Length High Byte (MAMXFL<15:8>) 14 MAMXFLH Legend: 14 14 — = unimplemented, r = reserved bit. Shaded cells are not used. DS39662B-page 46 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 49. ENC28J60 8.0 RECEIVE FILTERS To minimize the processing requirements of the host controller, the ENC28J60 incorporates several different receive filters which can automatically reject packets which are not needed. Six different types of packet filters are implemented: • • • • • • Unicast Pattern Match Magic Packet™ Hash Table Multicast Broadcast © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. The individual filters are all configured by the ERXFCON register (Register 8-1). More than one filter can be active at any given time. Additionally, the filters can be configured by the ANDOR bit to either logically AND, or logically OR, the tests of several filters. In other words, the filters may be set so that only packets accepted by all active filters are accepted, or a packet accepted by any one filter is accepted. The flowcharts in Figure 8-1 and Figure 8-2 show the effect that each of the filters will have depending on the setting of ANDOR. The device can enter Promiscuous mode and receive all packets by clearing the ERXFCON register. The proper setting of the register will depend on the application requirements. Preliminary DS39662B-page 47
  • 50. ENC28J60 REGISTER 8-1: ERXFCON: ETHERNET RECEIVE FILTER CONTROL REGISTER R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 UCEN ANDOR CRCEN PMEN MPEN HTEN MCEN BCEN bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 UCEN: Unicast Filter Enable bit When ANDOR = 1: 1 = Packets not having a destination address matching the local MAC address will be discarded 0 = Filter disabled When ANDOR = 0: 1 = Packets with a destination address matching the local MAC address will be accepted 0 = Filter disabled bit 6 ANDOR: AND/OR Filter Select bit 1 = AND: Packets will be rejected unless all enabled filters accept the packet 0 = OR: Packets will be accepted unless all enabled filters reject the packet bit 5 CRCEN: Post-Filter CRC Check Enable bit 1 = All packets with an invalid CRC will be discarded 0 = The CRC validity will be ignored bit 4 PMEN: Pattern Match Filter Enable bit When ANDOR = 1: 1 = Packets must meet the Pattern Match criteria or they will be discarded 0 = Filter disabled When ANDOR = 0: 1 = Packets which meet the Pattern Match criteria will be accepted 0 = Filter disabled bit 3 MPEN: Magic Packet Filter Enable bit When ANDOR = 1: 1 = Packets must be Magic Packets for the local MAC address or they will be discarded 0 = Filter disabled When ANDOR = 0: 1 = Magic Packets for the local MAC address will be accepted 0 = Filter disabled bit 2 HTEN: Hash Table Filter Enable bit When ANDOR = 1: 1 = Packets must meet the Hash Table criteria or they will be discarded 0 = Filter disabled When ANDOR = 0: 1 = Packets which meet the Hash Table criteria will be accepted 0 = Filter disabled bit 1 MCEN: Multicast Filter Enable bit When ANDOR = 1: 1 = Packets must have the Least Significant bit set in the destination address or they will be discarded 0 = Filter disabled When ANDOR = 0: 1 = Packets which have the Least Significant bit set in the destination address will be accepted 0 = Filter disabled bit 0 BCEN: Broadcast Filter Enable bit When ANDOR = 1: 1 = Packets must have a destination address of FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF or they will be discarded 0 = Filter disabled When ANDOR = 0: 1 = Packets which have a destination address of FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF will be accepted 0 = Filter disabled DS39662B-page 48 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 51. ENC28J60 FIGURE 8-1: RECEIVE FILTERING USING OR LOGIC Packet Detected on Wire ANDOR = 0 (OR) UCEN set? Yes Yes Unicast packet? No No PMEN set? Yes Yes Pattern matches? No No MPEN set? Yes Magic Packet for us? No Yes No HTEN set? Yes Yes Hash table bit set? No No MCEN set? Yes Multicast destination? No Yes No BCEN set? Yes Broadcast destination? No Yes CRCEN set? Yes No No CRC valid? No Yes Reject Packet © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary Accept Packet DS39662B-page 49
  • 52. ENC28J60 FIGURE 8-2: RECEIVE FILTERING USING AND LOGIC Packet Detected on Wire ANDOR = 1 (AND) UCEN set? Yes No Unicast packet? No Yes PMEN set? Yes Pattern matches? No No Yes MPEN set? Yes Magic Packet for us? No No Yes HTEN set? Yes No Hash table bit set? No Yes MCEN set? Yes Multicast destination? No No Yes BCEN set? Yes Broadcast destination? No No Yes No CRCEN set? Yes CRC valid? No Yes Accept Packet DS39662B-page 50 Preliminary Reject Packet © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 53. ENC28J60 8.1 Unicast Filter the filter criteria will immediately not be met, even if the corresponding mask bits are all ‘0’. The pattern match checksum registers should be programmed to the checksum which is expected for the selected bytes. The checksum is calculated in the same manner that the DMA module calculates checksums (see Section 13.2 “Checksum Calculations”). Data bytes which have corresponding mask bits programmed to ‘0’ are completely removed for purposes of calculating the checksum, as opposed to treating the data bytes as zero. The unicast receive filter checks the destination address of all incoming packets. If the destination address exactly matches the contents of the MAADR registers, the packet will meet the unicast filter criteria. 8.2 Pattern Match Filter The pattern match filter selects up to 64 bytes from the incoming packet and calculates an IP checksum of the bytes. The checksum is then compared to the EPMCS registers. The packet meets the pattern match filter criteria if the calculated checksum matches the EPMCS registers. The pattern match filter may be useful for filtering packets which have expected data inside them. As an example, if the application wished to filter all packets having a particular source MAC address of 00-04-A3-FF-FF-FF, it could program the pattern match offset to 0000h and then set bits 6 and 7 of EPMM0 and bits 0, 1, 2 and 3 of EPMM1 (assuming all other mask bits are ‘0’). The proper checksum to program into the EPMCS registers would be 0x5BFC. As an alternative configuration, it could program the offset to 0006h and set bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 of EPMM0. The checksum would still be 5BFCh. However, the second case would be less desirable as packets less than 70 bytes long could never meet the pattern match criteria, even if they would generate the proper checksum given the mask configuration. To use the pattern match filter, the host controller must program the pattern match offset (EPMOH:EPMOL), all of the pattern match mask bytes (EPMM7:EPMM0) and the pattern match checksum register pair (EPMCSH:EPMCSL). The pattern match offset should be loaded with the offset from the beginning of the destination address field to the 64-byte window which will be used for the checksum computation. Within the 64-byte window, each individual byte can be selectively included or excluded from the checksum computation by setting or clearing the respective bit in the pattern match mask. If a packet is received which would cause the 64 byte window to extend past the end of the CRC, FIGURE 8-3: Another example of a pattern matching filter is illustrated in Figure 8-3. SAMPLE PATTERN MATCH FORMAT Input Configuration: EMPOH:EPMOL = 0006h EPMM7:EPMM0 = 0000000000001F0Ah EPMCSH:EPMCSL = 563Fh Field DA SA Type/Length Data FCS Received Data 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 AA BB CC 00 5A 09 0A 0B 0C 0D . . . 40 . . . FE 45 23 01 Byte # 0 1 2 3 4 5 14 15 16 17 18 . . . 70 . . . 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Bytes used for Checksum Computation 64-byte Window used for Pattern Match Values used for Checksum Computation = {88h, AAh, 09h, 0Ah, 0Bh, 0Ch, 0Dh, 00h} (00h padding byte added by hardware) Note: Received data is shown in hexadecimal. Byte numbers are shown in decimal format. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 51
  • 54. ENC28J60 8.3 Magic Packet™ Filter The Magic Packet filter checks the destination address and data fields of all incoming packets. If the destination address matches the MAADR registers and the data field holds a valid Magic Packet pattern someplace FIGURE 8-4: within it, then the packet will meet the Magic Packet filter criteria. The Magic Packet pattern consists of a sync pattern of six 0xFF bytes, followed by 16 repeats of the destination address. See Figure 8-4 for a sample Magic Packet. SAMPLE MAGIC PACKET™ FORMAT Received Data Field 11 22 33 44 55 66 Comments DA SA Type/Length 77 88 99 AA BB CC 00 FE 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E FF FF FF FF FF 00 Sync Pattern FF FF FF FF FF FF 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 Data 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 Sixteen Repeats of the Station Address 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 11 22 33 44 55 66 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E EF 54 32 10 8.4 FCS Hash Table Filter 8.5 The hash table receive filter performs a CRC over the six destination address bytes in the packet. The CRC is then used as a Pointer into the bits of the EHT registers. If the Pointer points to a bit which is set, the packet meets the hash table filter criteria. For example, if the CRC is calculated to be 0x5, bit 5 in the hash table will be checked. If it is set, the hash table filter criteria will be met. If every bit is clear in the hash table, the filter criteria will never be met. Similarly, if every bit is set in the hash table, the filter criteria will always be met. DS39662B-page 52 Multicast Filter The multicast receive filter checks the destination address of all incoming packets. If the Least Significant bit of the first byte of the destination address is set, the packet will meet the multicast filter criteria. 8.6 Broadcast Filter The broadcast receive filter checks the destination address of all incoming packets. If the destination address is FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF, the packet will meet the broadcast filter criteria. Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 55. ENC28J60 9.0 DUPLEX MODE CONFIGURATION AND NEGOTIATION 2. The ENC28J60 does not support automatic duplex negotiation. If it is connected to an automatic duplex negotiation enabled network switch or Ethernet controller, the ENC28J60 will be detected as a half-duplex device. To communicate in Full-Duplex mode, the ENC28J60 and the remote node (switch, router or Ethernet controller) must be manually configured for full-duplex operation. 9.1 Half-Duplex Operation The ENC28J60 operates in Half-Duplex mode when MACON3.FULDPX = 0 and PHCON1.PDPXMD = 0. If only one of these two bits is set, the ENC28J60 will be in an indeterminate state and not function correctly. Since switching between Full and Half-Duplex modes may result in this indeterminate state, the host controller should not transmit any packets (maintain ECON1.TXRTS clear) and packet reception should be disabled (ECON1.RXEN and ESTAT.RXBUSY should be clear) during this period. In Half-Duplex mode, only one Ethernet controller may be transmitting on the physical medium at any time. If the host controller sets the ECON1.TXRTS bit, requesting that a packet be transmitted while another Ethernet controller is already transmitting, the ENC28J60 will delay, waiting for the remote transmitter to stop. After the transmission stops, the ENC28J60 will attempt to transmit its packet. If another Ethernet controller starts transmitting at approximately the same time that the ENC28J60 starts transmitting, the data on the wire will become corrupt and a collision will occur. The hardware will handle this condition in one of two ways: 1. If the collision occurs before the number of bytes specified by the “Collision Window” in MACLCON2 were transmitted, the ECON1.TXRTS bit will remain set, a random exponential back off delay will elapse as defined by the IEEE 802.3 specification and then a new attempt to transmit the packet from the beginning will occur. The host controller will not need to intervene. If the number of retransmission attempts already matches the “Retransmission Maximum” (RETMAX) defined in MACLCON1, the packet will be aborted and ECON1.TXRTS will be cleared. The host controller will then be responsible for taking appropriate action. The host controller will be able to determine that the packet was aborted instead of being successfully transmitted by reading the ESTAT.TXABRT flag. For more information, see Section 7.1 “Transmitting Packets”. A transmit abort will cause the transmit error interrupt. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. If the collision occurs after the number of bytes specified by the “Collision Window” in MACLCON2 were transmitted, the packet will be immediately aborted without any retransmission attempts. Ordinarily, in 802.3 compliant networks which are properly configured, this late collision will not occur. User intervention may be required to correct the issue. This problem may occur as a result of a full-duplex node attempting to transmit on the half-duplex medium. Alternately, the ENC28J60 may be attempting to operate in Half-Duplex mode while it may be connected to a full-duplex network. Excessively long cabling and network size may also be a possible cause of late collisions. When set in Half-Duplex mode, the Reset default configuration will loop transmitted packets back to itself. Unless the receive filter configuration filters these packets out, they will be written into the circular receive buffer, just as any other network traffic. To stop this behavior, the host controller should set the PHCON2.HDLDIS bit. 9.2 Full-Duplex Operation The ENC28J60 operates in Full-Duplex mode when MACON3.FULDPX = 1 and PHCON1.PDPXMD = 1. If only one of these two bits is clear, the ENC28J60 will be in an indeterminate state and not function correctly. Since switching between Full and Half-Duplex modes may result in this indeterminate state, the host controller should not transmit any packets (maintain ECON1.TXRTS clear) and packet reception should be disabled (ECON1.RXEN and ESTAT.RXBUSY should be clear) during this period. In Full-Duplex mode, packets will be transmitted simultaneously while packets may be received. Given this, it is impossible to cause any collisions when transmitting packets. Several configuration fields, such as “Retransmission Maximum” (RETMAX) in MACLCON1 and “Collision Window” (COLWIN) in MACLCON2, will not be used. When set in Full-Duplex mode, the Reset default configuration will not loop transmitted packets back to itself. If loopback is desired for diagnostic purposes, the PHCON1.PLOOPBK bit should be set by the host controller. Enabling loopback in Full-Duplex mode will disable the twisted pair output driver and ignore all incoming data, thus dropping any link (if established). All packets received as a result of the loopback configuration will be subject to all enabled receive filters, just as ordinary network traffic would be. Preliminary DS39662B-page 53
  • 57. ENC28J60 10.0 FLOW CONTROL The ENC28J60 implements hardware flow control for both Full and Half-Duplex modes. The operation of this feature differs depending on which mode is being used. 10.1 Half-Duplex Mode In Half-Duplex mode, setting the EFLOCON.FCEN0 bit causes flow control to be enabled. When FCEN0 is set, a continuous preamble pattern of alternating ‘1’s and ‘0’s (55h) will automatically be transmitted on the Ethernet medium. Any connected nodes will see the transmission and either not transmit anything, waiting for the ENC28J60’s transmission to end, or will attempt to transmit and immediately cause a collision. Because a collision will always occur, no nodes on the network will be able to communicate with each other and no new packets will arrive. When the host controller tells the ENC28J60 to transmit a packet by setting ECON1.TXRTS, the preamble pattern will stop being transmitted. An InterPacket Gap delay will pass as configured by register MABBIPG and then the ENC28J60 will attempt to transmit its packet. During the Inter-Packet Gap delay, other nodes may begin to transmit. Because all traffic was jammed previously, several nodes may begin transmitting and a series of collisions may occur. When the ENC28J60 successfully finishes transmitting its packet or aborts it, the transmission of the preamble pattern will automatically restart. When the host controller wishes to no longer jam the network, it should clear the FCEN0 bit. The preamble transmission will cease and normal network operation will resume. matically decrement every 512 bit times or 51.2 μs. While the timer is counting down, reception of packets is still enabled. If new pause frames arrive, the timer will be reinitialized with the new pause timer value. When the timer reaches zero or was sent a frame with a zero pause timer value, the MAC that received the pause frame will resume transmitting any pending packets. To prevent a pause frame from stopping all traffic on the entire network, Ethernet switches and routers do not propagate pause control frames in Full-Duplex mode. The pause operation only applies to the recipient. A sample network is shown in Figure 10-1. If Computer A were to be transmitting too much data to the ENC28J60 in Full-Duplex mode, the ENC28J60 could transmit a pause control frame to stop the data which is being sent to it. The Ethernet switch would take the pause frame and stop sending data to the ENC28J60. If Computer A continues to send data, the Ethernet switch will buffer the data so it can be transmitted later when its pause timer expires. If the Ethernet switch begins to run out of buffer space, it will likely transmit a pause control frame of its own to Computer A. If, for some reason, the Ethernet switch does not generate a pause control frame of its own, or one of the nodes does not properly handle the pause frame it receives, then packets will inevitably be dropped. In any event, any communication between Computer A and Computer B will always be completely unaffected. FIGURE 10-1: SAMPLE FULL-DUPLEX NETWORK Given the detrimental network effects that are possible and lack of effectiveness, it is not recommend that halfduplex flow control be used unless the application will be in a closed network environment with proper testing. Computer A 10.2 Computer B Full-Duplex Mode In Full-Duplex mode (MACON3.FULDPX = 1), hardware flow control is implemented by means of transmitting pause control frames as defined by the IEEE 802.3 specification. Pause control frames are 64-byte frames consisting of the reserved multicast destination address of 01-80-C2-00-00-01, the source address of the sender, a special pause opcode, a two-byte pause timer value and padding/CRC. Normally, when a pause control frame is received by a MAC, the MAC will finish the packet it is transmitting and then stop transmitting any new frames. The pause timer value will be extracted from the control frame and used to initialize an internal timer. The timer will auto- © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary Ethernet Switch MCP22S80 E N C 28 J 6 0 DS39662B-page 55
  • 58. ENC28J60 To enable flow control on the ENC28J60 in Full-Duplex mode, the host controller must set the TXPAUS and RXPAUS bits in the MACON1 register. Then, at any time that the receiver buffer is running out of space, the host controller should turn flow control on by writing the value 02h to the EFLOCON register. The hardware will periodically transmit pause frames loaded with the pause timer value specified in the EPAUS registers. The host controller can continue to transmit its own packets without interfering with the flow control hardware. When space has been made available for more packets in the receive buffer, the host controller should turn flow control off by writing the value 03h to the EFLOCON register. The hardware will send one last pause frame loaded with a pause timer value of 0000h. When the pause frame is received by the remote node, it will resume normal network operations. REGISTER 10-1: When RXPAUS is set in the MACON1 register and a valid pause frame arrives with a non-zero pause timer value, the ENC28J60 will automatically inhibit transmissions. If the host controller sets the ECON1.TXRTS bit to send a packet, the hardware will simply wait until the pause timer expires before attempting to send the packet and subsequently clearing the TXRTS bit. Normally, the host controller will never know that a pause frame has been received. However, if it is desirable to the host controller to know when the MAC is paused or not, it should set the PASSALL bit in MACON1 and then manually interpret the pause control frames which may arrive. EFLOCON: ETHERNET FLOW CONTROL REGISTER U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — — — FULDPXS FCEN1 FCEN0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2 FULDPXS: Read-Only MAC Full-Duplex Shadow bit 1 = MAC is configured for Full-Duplex mode, FULDPX (MACON3<0>) is set 0 = MAC is configured for Half-Duplex mode, FULDPX (MACON3<0>) is clear bit 1-0 FCEN1:FCEN0: Flow Control Enable bits When FULDPXS = 1: 11 = Send one pause frame with a ‘0’ timer value and then turn flow control off 10 = Send pause frames periodically 01 = Send one pause frame then turn flow control off 00 = Flow control off When FULDPXS = 0: 11 = Flow control on 10 = Flow control off 01 = Flow control on 00 = Flow control off DS39662B-page 56 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 59. ENC28J60 TABLE 10-1: Name ECON1 SUMMARY OF REGISTERS USED WITH FLOW CONTROL Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 TXRST RXRST DMAST CSUMEN TXRTS RXEN MACON1 — — — r TXPAUS RXPAUS MABBIPG — EFLOCON — Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page BSEL1 BSEL0 13 PASSALL MARXEN Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap (BBIPG<6:0>) — — — — 14 14 FULDPXS FCEN1 FCEN0 14 EPAUSL Pause Timer Value Low Byte (EPAUS<7:0>) 14 EPAUSH Pause Timer Value High Byte (EPAUS<15:8>) 14 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 57
  • 61. ENC28J60 11.0 RESET The ENC28J60 differentiates between various kinds of Reset: • • • • • Power-on Reset (POR) System Reset Transmit Only Reset Receive Only Reset Miscellaneous MAC and PHY Subsystem Resets A simplified block diagram of the On-Chip Reset Circuit is shown in Figure 11-1. FIGURE 11-1: ON-CHIP RESET CIRCUIT Soft Reset Command Hardware Reset System Reset POR Reset Host Interface Reset Transmit Transmit Reset Reset Receive Receive Reset © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 59
  • 62. ENC28J60 11.1 Power-on Reset (POR) A Power-on Reset pulse is generated on-chip whenever VDD rises above a certain threshold. This allows the device to start in the initialized state when VDD is adequate for operation. The POR circuitry is always enabled. As a result, most applications do not need to attach any external circuitry to the RESET pin to ensure a proper Reset at powerup. The RESET pin’s internal weak pull-up will maintain a logical high level on the pin during normal device operation. To ensure proper POR operation, a minimum rise rate for VDD is specified (parameter D003). The application circuit must meet this requirement to allow the Oscillator Start-up Timer and CLKOUT functions to reset properly. After a Power-on Reset, the contents of the dual port buffer memory will be unknown. However, all registers will be loaded with their specified Reset values. Certain portions of the ENC28J60 must not be accessed immediately after a POR. See Section 2.2 “Oscillator Start-up Timer” for more information. 11.2 System Reset The System Reset of ENC28J60 can be accomplished by either the RESET pin, or through the SPI interface. The RESET pin provides an asynchronous method for triggering an external Reset of the device. A Reset is generated by holding the RESET pin low. The ENC28J60 has a noise filter in the RESET path which detects and ignores small pulses of time tRSTLOW or less. When the RESET pin is held high, the ENC28J60 will operate normally. After a System Reset, all PHY registers should not be read or written to until at least 50 μs have passed since the Reset has ended. All registers will revert to their Reset default values. The dual port buffer memory will maintain state throughout the System Reset. 11.3 Transmit Only Reset The Transmit Only Reset is performed by writing a ‘1’ to the TXRST bit in the ECON1 register using the SPI interface. If a packet was being transmitted when the TXRST bit was set, the hardware will automatically clear the TXRTS bit and abort the transmission. This action resets the transmit logic only. The System Reset automatically performs the Transmit Only Reset. Other register and control blocks, such as buffer management and host interface, are not affected by a Transmit Only Reset event. When the host controller wishes to return to normal operation, it should clear the TXRST bit. 11.4 Receive Only Reset The Receive Only Reset is performed by writing a ‘1’ to the RXRST bit in the ECON1 register using the SPI interface. If packet reception was enabled (the RXEN bit was set) when RXRST was set, the hardware will automatically clear the RXEN bit. If a packet was being received, it would be immediately aborted. This action resets receive logic only. The System Reset automatically performs Receive Only Reset. Other register and control blocks, such as the buffer management and host interface blocks, are not affected by a Receive Only Reset event. When the host controller wishes to return to normal operation, it should clear the RXRST bit. The ENC28J60 can also be reset via the SPI using the System Reset Command. See Section 4.0 “Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)”. The RESET pin will not be driven low by any internal Resets, including a System Reset Command via the SPI interface. DS39662B-page 60 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 63. ENC28J60 11.5 PHY Subsystem Reset The PHY module may be reset by writing a ‘1’ to the PRST bit in the PHCON1 register (Register 11-1). All the PHY register contents will revert to their Reset defaults. REGISTER 11-1: Unlike other Resets, the PHY cannot be removed from Reset immediately after setting PRST. The PHY requires a delay, after which the hardware automatically clears the PRST bit. After a Reset is issued, the host controller should poll PRST and wait for it to become clear before using the PHY. PHCON1: PHY CONTROL REGISTER 1 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 PRST PLOOPBK — — PPWRSV r — PDPXMD bit 15 bit 8 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 r — — — — — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15 PRST: PHY Software Reset bit 1 = PHY is processing a Software Reset (automatically resets to ‘0’ when done) 0 = Normal operation bit 14 PLOOPBK: PHY Loopback bit 1 = All data transmitted will be returned to the MAC. The twisted-pair interface will be disabled. 0 = Normal operation bit 13-12 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 11 PPWRSV: PHY Power-Down bit 1 = PHY is shut down 0 = Normal operation bit 10 Reserved: Maintain as ‘0’ bit 9 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 8 PDPXMD: PHY Duplex Mode bit 1 = PHY operates in Full-Duplex mode 0 = PHY operates in Half-Duplex mode bit 7 Reserved: Maintain as ‘0’ bit 6-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 61
  • 65. ENC28J60 12.0 INTERRUPTS The ENC28J60 has multiple interrupt sources and an interrupt output pin to signal the occurrence of events to the host controller. The interrupt pin is designed for use by a host controller that is capable of detecting falling edges. Interrupts are managed with two registers. The EIE register contains the individual interrupt enable bits for each interrupt source, while the EIR register contains the corresponding interrupt flag bits. When an interrupt occurs, the interrupt flag is set. If the interrupt is enabled in the EIE register and the INTIE global interrupt enable bit is set, the INT pin will be driven low (see Figure 12-1). Note: Except for the LINKIF interrupt flag, interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the associated global enable bit. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. This feature allows for software polling. FIGURE 12-1: When an enabled interrupt occurs, the interrupt pin will remain low until all flags which are causing the interrupt are cleared or masked off (enable bit is cleared) by the host controller. If more than one interrupt source is enabled, the host controller must poll each flag in the EIR register to determine the source(s) of the interrupt. It is recommended that the Bit Field Clear (BFC) SPI command be used to reset the flag bits in the EIR register rather than the normal Write Control Register (WCR) command. This is necessary to prevent unintentionally altering a flag that changes during the write command. The BFC and WCR commands are discussed in detail in Section 4.0 “Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)”. After an interrupt occurs, the host controller should clear the global enable bit for the interrupt pin before servicing the interrupt. Clearing the enable bit will cause the interrupt pin to return to the non-asserted state (high). Doing so will prevent the host controller from missing a falling edge should another interrupt occur while the immediate interrupt is being serviced. After the interrupt has been serviced, the global enable bit may be restored. If an interrupt event occurred while the previous interrupt was being processed, the act of resetting the global enable bit will cause a new falling edge on the interrupt pin to occur. ENC28J60 INTERRUPT LOGIC PKTIF PKTIE DMAIF PLNKIF PGIF PLNKIE PGEIE DMAIE LINKIF INT LINKIE INT TXIF TXIE INTIE TXERIF TXERIE RXERIF RXERIE © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 63
  • 66. ENC28J60 12.1 INT Interrupt Enable (INTIE) The INT Interrupt Enable bit (INTIE) is a global enable bit which allows the following interrupts to drive the INT pin: • • • • • • 12.1.1 Receive Error Interrupt (RXERIF) Transmit Error Interrupt (TXERIF) Transmit Interrupt (TXIF) Link Change Interrupt (LINKIF) DMA Interrupt (DMAIF) Receive Packet Pending Interrupt (PKTIF) REGISTER 12-1: When any of the above interrupts are enabled and generated, the virtual bit, INT in the ESTAT register (Register 12-1), will be set to ‘1’. If EIE.INTIE is ‘1’, the INT pin will be driven low. INT INTERRUPT REGISTERS The registers associated with the INT interrupts are shown in Register 12-2, Register 12-3, Register 12-4 and Register 12-5. ESTAT: ETHERNET STATUS REGISTER R-0 R/C-0 R-0 R/C-0 U-0 R-0 R/C-0 R/W-0 INT BUFER r LATECOL — RXBUSY TXABRT CLKRDY bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit C = Clearable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 INT: INT Interrupt Flag bit 1 = INT interrupt is pending 0 = No INT interrupt is pending bit 6 BUFER: Ethernet Buffer Error Status bit 1 = An Ethernet read or write has generated a buffer error (overrun or underrun) 0 = No buffer error has occurred bit 5 Reserved: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 LATECOL: Late Collision Error bit 1 = A collision occurred after 64 bytes had been transmitted 0 = No collisions after 64 bytes have occurred bit 3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2 RXBUSY: Receive Busy bit 1 = Receive logic is receiving a data packet 0 = Receive logic is Idle bit 1 TXABRT: Transmit Abort Error bit 1 = The transmit request was aborted 0 = No transmit abort error bit 0 CLKRDY: Clock Ready bit 1 = OST has expired; PHY is ready 0 = OST is still counting; PHY is not ready DS39662B-page 64 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 67. ENC28J60 REGISTER 12-2: EIE: ETHERNET INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 INTIE PKTIE DMAIE LINKIE TXIE r TXERIE RXERIE bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 INTIE: Global INT Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Allow interrupt events to drive the INT pin 0 = Disable all INT pin activity (pin is continuously driven high) bit 6 PKTIE: Receive Packet Pending Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enable receive packet pending interrupt 0 = Disable receive packet pending interrupt bit 5 DMAIE: DMA Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enable DMA interrupt 0 = Disable DMA interrupt bit 4 LINKIE: Link Status Change Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enable link change interrupt from the PHY 0 = Disable link change interrupt bit 3 TXIE: Transmit Enable bit 1 = Enable transmit interrupt 0 = Disable transmit interrupt bit 2 Reserved: Maintain as ‘0’ bit 1 TXERIE: Transmit Error Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enable transmit error interrupt 0 = Disable transmit error interrupt bit 0 x = Bit is unknown RXERIE: Receive Error Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enable receive error interrupt 0 = Disable receive error interrupt © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 65
  • 68. ENC28J60 REGISTER 12-3: EIR: ETHERNET INTERRUPT REQUEST (FLAG) REGISTER U-0 R-0 R/C-0 R-0 R/C-0 R-0 R/C-0 R/C-0 — PKTIF DMAIF LINKIF TXIF r TXERIF RXERIF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit C = Clearable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6 PKTIF: Receive Packet Pending Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Receive buffer contains one or more unprocessed packets; cleared when PKTDEC is set 0 = Receive buffer is empty bit 5 DMAIF: DMA Interrupt Flag bit 1 = DMA copy or checksum calculation has completed 0 = No DMA interrupt is pending bit 4 LINKIF: Link Change Interrupt Flag bit 1 = PHY reports that the link status has changed; read PHIR register to clear 0 = Link status has not changed bit 3 TXIF: Transmit Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Transmit request has ended 0 = No transmit interrupt is pending bit 2 Reserved: Maintain as ‘0’ bit 1 TXERIF: Transmit Error Interrupt Flag bit 1 = A transmit error has occurred 0 = No transmit error has occurred bit 0 RXERIF: Receive Error Interrupt Flag bit 1 = A packet was aborted because there is insufficient buffer space or the packet count is 255 0 = No receive error interrupt is pending DS39662B-page 66 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 69. ENC28J60 REGISTER 12-4: PHIE: PHY INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 r r r r r r r r bit 15 bit 8 R-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 r r r PLNKIE r r PGEIE r bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 15-6 Reserved: Write as ‘0’, ignore on read bit 5 Reserved: Maintain as ‘0’ bit 4 PLNKIE: PHY Link Change Interrupt Enable bit 1 = PHY link change interrupt is enabled 0 = PHY link change interrupt is disabled bit 3-2 Reserved: Write as ‘0’, ignore on read bit 1 PGEIE: PHY Global Interrupt Enable bit 1 = PHY interrupts are enabled 0 = PHY interrupts are disabled bit 0 x = Bit is unknown Reserved: Maintain as ‘0’ REGISTER 12-5: PHIR: PHY INTERRUPT REQUEST (FLAG) REGISTER R-x R-x R-x R-x R-x R-x R-x R-x r r r r r r r r bit 15 bit 8 R-x R-x R-0 R/SC-0 R-0 R/SC-0 R-x R-0 r r r PLNKIF r PGIF r r bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit SC = Self-clearing bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 15-6 Reserved: Do not modify bit 5 Reserved: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 PLNKIF: PHY Link Change Interrupt Flag bit 1 = PHY link status has changed since PHIR was last read; resets to ‘0’ when read 0 = PHY link status has not changed since PHIR was last read bit 3 Reserved: Read as ‘0’ bit 2 PGIF: PHY Global Interrupt Flag bit 1 = One or more enabled PHY interrupts have occurred since PHIR was last read; resets to ‘0’ when read 0 = No PHY interrupts have occurred bit 1 Reserved: Do not modify bit 0 Reserved: Read as ‘0’ © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 67
  • 70. ENC28J60 12.1.2 RECEIVE ERROR INTERRUPT FLAG (RXERIF) The Receive Error Interrupt Flag (RXERIF) is used to indicate a receive buffer overflow condition. Alternately, this interrupt may indicate that too many packets are in the receive buffer and more cannot be stored without overflowing the EPKTCNT register. When a packet is being received and the receive buffer runs completely out of space, or EPKTCNT is 255 and cannot be incremented, the packet being received will be aborted (permanently lost) and the EIR.RXERIF bit will be set to ‘1’. Once set, RXERIF can only be cleared by the host controller or by a Reset condition. If the receive error interrupt and INT interrupt are enabled (EIE.RXERIE = 1 and EIE.INTIE = 1), an interrupt is generated by driving the INT pin low. If the receive error interrupt is not enabled (EIE.RXERIE = 0 or EIE.INTIE = 0), the host controller may poll the ENC28J60 for the RXERIF and take appropriate action. Normally, upon the receive error condition, the host controller would process any packets pending from the receive buffer and then make additional room for future packets by advancing the ERXRDPT registers (low byte first) and decrementing the EPKTCNT register. See Section 7.2.4 “Freeing Receive Buffer Space” for more information on processing packets. Once processed, the host controller should use the BFC command to clear the EIR.RXERIF bit. 12.1.3 2. 3. 4. 5. Excessive collisions occurred as defined by the Retransmission Maximum (RETMAX) bits in the MACLCON1 register. A late collision occurred as defined by the Collision Window (COLWIN) bits in the MACLCON2 register. A collision after transmitting 64 bytes occurred (ESTAT.LATECOL set). The transmission was unable to gain an opportunity to transmit the packet because the medium was constantly occupied for too long. The deferral limit (2.4287 ms) was reached and the MACON4.DEFER bit was clear. An attempt to transmit a packet larger than the maximum frame length defined by the MAMXFL registers was made without setting the MACON3.HFRMEN bit or per packet POVERRIDE and PHUGEEN bits. DS39662B-page 68 After a transmit abort, the TXRTS bit will be cleared, the ESTAT.TXABRT bit will be set and the transmit status vector will be written at ETXND + 1. The MAC will not automatically attempt to retransmit the packet. The host controller may wish to read the transmit status vector and LATECOL bit to determine the cause of the abort. After determining the problem and solution, the host controller should clear the LATECOL (if set) and TXABRT bits so that future aborts can be detected accurately. In Full-Duplex mode, condition 5 is the only one that should cause this interrupt. Collisions and other problems related to sharing the network are not possible on full-duplex networks. The conditions which cause the transmit error interrupt meet the requirements of the transmit interrupt. As a result, when this interrupt occurs, TXIF will also be simultaneously set. 12.1.4 TRANSMIT ERROR INTERRUPT FLAG (TXERIF) The Transmit Error Interrupt Flag (TXERIF) is used to indicate that a transmit abort has occurred. An abort can occur because of any of the following: 1. Upon any of these conditions, the EIR.TXERIF flag is set to ‘1’. Once set, it can only be cleared by the host controller or by a Reset condition. If the transmit error interrupt is enabled (EIE.TXERIE = 1 and EIE.INTIE = 1), an interrupt is generated by driving the INT pin low for one OSC1 period. If the transmit error interrupt is not enabled (EIE.TXERIE = 0 or EIE.INTIE = 0), the host controller may poll the ENC28J60 for the TXERIF and take appropriate action. Once the interrupt is processed, the host controller should use the BFC command to clear the EIR.TXERIF bit. TRANSMIT INTERRUPT FLAG (TXIF) The Transmit Interrupt Flag (TXIF) is used to indicate that the requested packet transmission has ended (ECON1.TXRTS has transitioned from ‘1’ to ‘0’). Upon transmission completion, abort or transmission cancellation by the host controller, the EIR.TXIF flag will be set to ‘1’. If the host controller did not clear the TXRTS bit and the ESTAT.TXABRT bit is not set, then the packet was successfully transmitted. Once TXIF is set, it can only be cleared by the host controller or by a Reset condition. If the transmit interrupt is enabled (EIE.TXIE = 1 and EIE.INTIE = 1), an interrupt is generated by driving the INT pin low. If the transmit interrupt is not enabled (EIE.TXIE = 0 or EIE.INTIE = 0), the host controller may poll the ENC28J60 for the TXIF bit and take appropriate action. Once processed, the host controller should use the BFC command to clear the EIR.TXIF bit. Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 71. ENC28J60 12.1.5 LINK CHANGE INTERRUPT FLAG (LINKIF) 12.1.6 The LINKIF indicates that the link status has changed. The actual current link status can be obtained from the PHSTAT1.LLSTAT or PHSTAT2.LSTAT (see Register 3-5 and Register 3-6). Unlike other interrupt sources, the link status change interrupt is created in the integrated PHY module; additional steps must be taken to enable it. By Reset default, LINKIF is never set for any reason. To receive it, the host controller must set the PHIE.PLNKIE and PGEIE bits. After setting the two PHY interrupt enable bits, the LINKIF bit will then shadow the contents of the PHIR.PGIF bit. The PHY only supports one interrupt, so the PGIF bit will always be the same as the PHIR.PLNKIF bit (when both PHY enable bits are set). Once LINKIF is set, it can only be cleared by the host controller or by a Reset. If the link change interrupt is enabled (EIE.LINKIE = 1, EIE.INTIE = 1, PHIE.PLNKIE = 1 and PHIE.PGEIE = 1), an interrupt will be generated by driving the INT pin low. If the link change interrupt is not enabled (EIE.LINKIE = 0, EIE.INTIE = 0, PHIE.PLNKIE = 0 or PHIE.PGEIE = 0), the host controller may poll the ENC28J60 for the PHIR.PLNKIF bit and take appropriate action. The LINKIF bit is read-only. Because reading from PHY registers requires non-negligible time, the host controller may instead set PHIE.PLNKIE and PHIE.PGEIE and then poll the EIR.LINKIF bit. Performing an MII read on the PHIR register will clear the LINKIF, PGIF and PLNKIF bits automatically and allow for future link status change interrupts. See Section 3.3 “PHY Registers” for information on accessing the PHY registers. DMA INTERRUPT FLAG (DMAIF) The DMA interrupt indicates that the DMA module has completed its memory copy or checksum calculation (ECON1.DMAST has transitioned from ‘1’ to ‘0’). Additionally, this interrupt will be caused if the host controller cancels a DMA operation by manually clearing the DMAST bit. Once set, DMAIF can only be cleared by the host controller or by a Reset condition. If the DMA interrupt is enabled (EIE.DMAIE = 1 and EIE.INTIE = 1), an interrupt is generated by driving the INT pin low. If the DMA interrupt is not enabled (EIE.DMAIE = 0 or EIE.INTIE = 0), the host controller may poll the ENC28J60 for the DMAIF and take appropriate action. Once processed, the host controller should use the BFC command to clear the EIR.DMAIF bit. 12.1.7 RECEIVE PACKET PENDING INTERRUPT FLAG (PKTIF) The Receive Packet Pending Interrupt Flag (PKTIF) is used to indicate the presence of one or more data packets in the receive buffer and to provide a notification means for the arrival of new packets. When the receive buffer has at least one packet in it, EIR.PKTIF will be set. In other words, this interrupt flag will be set anytime the Ethernet Packet Count register (EPKTCNT) is non-zero. If the receive packet pending interrupt is enabled (EIE.PKTIE = 1 and EIE.INTIE = 1), an interrupt will be generated by driving the INT pin low whenever a new packet is successfully received and written into the receive buffer. If the receive packet pending interrupt is not enabled (EIE.PKTIE = 0 or EIE.INTIE = 0), the host controller will not be notified when new packets arrive. However, it may poll the PKTIF bit and take appropriate action. The PKTIF bit can only be cleared by the host controller or by a Reset condition. In order to clear PKTIF, the EPKTCNT register must be decremented to ‘0’. See Section 7.2 “Receiving Packets” for more information about clearing the EPKTCNT register. If the last data packet in the receive buffer is processed, EPKTCNT will become zero and the PKTIF bit will automatically be cleared. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 69
  • 72. ENC28J60 12.2 12.2.1 Wake-On-LAN/Remote Wake-up Wake-On-LAN or Remote Wake-up is useful in conserving system power. The host controller and other subsystems can be put in Low-Power mode and be woken up by the ENC28J60 when a wake-up packet is received from a remote station. The ENC28J60 must not be in Power-Save mode and the transmit and receive modules must be enabled in order to receive a wake-up packet. The ENC28J60 wakes up the host controller via the INT signal when the Interrupt Mask registers are properly configured. The receive filter can also be set up to only receive a specific wake-up packet (see Register 8-1 for available options). Section 12.2.1 “Setup Steps for Waking Up on a Magic Packet” shows the steps necessary in configuring the ENC28J60 to send an interrupt signal to the host controller upon the reception of a Magic packet. DS39662B-page 70 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. SETUP STEPS FOR WAKING UP ON A MAGIC PACKET Set ERXFCON.CRCEN and ERXFCON.MPEN. Service all pending packets. Set EIE.PKTIE and EIE.INTIE. Set up the host controller to wake-up on an external interrupt INT signal. Put the host controller and other subsystems to Sleep to save power. Once a Magic packet is received, the EPKTCNT is incremented to ‘1’, which causes the EIR.PKTIF bit to set. In turn, the ESTAT.INT bit is set and the INT signal is driven low, causing the host to wake-up. Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 73. ENC28J60 13.0 DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS CONTROLLER 13.1 To copy memory within the buffer: The ENC28J60 incorporates a dual purpose DMA controller which can be used to copy data between locations within the 8-Kbyte memory buffer. It can also be used to calculate a 16-bit checksum which is compatible with various industry standard protocols, including TCP and IP. When a DMA operation begins, the EDMAST register pair is copied into an Internal Source Pointer. The DMA will execute on one byte at a time and then increment the Internal Source Pointer. However, if a byte is processed and the Internal Source Pointer is equal to the Receive Buffer End Pointer, ERXND, the Source Pointer will not be incremented. Instead, the Internal Source Pointer will be loaded with the Receive Buffer Start Pointer, ERXST. In this way, the DMA will follow the circular FIFO structure of the receive buffer and received packets can be processed using one operation. The DMA operation will end when the Internal Source Pointer matches the EDMAND Pointer. While any DMA operation is in progress, the DMA Pointers and the ECON1.CSUMEN bit should not be modified. The DMA operation can be canceled at any time by clearing the ECON1.DMAST bit. No registers will change; however, some memory bytes may already have been copied if a DMA copy was in progress. Note 1: If the EDMAND Pointer cannot be reached because of the receive buffer wrapping behavior, the DMA operation will never end. 2: By design, the DMA module cannot be used to copy only one byte (EDMAST = EDMAND). An attempt to do so will overwrite all memory in the buffer and may never end. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Copying Memory 1. 2. 3. 4. Appropriately program the EDMAST, EDMAND and EDMADST register pairs. The EDMAST registers should point to the first byte to copy from, the EDMAND registers should point to the last byte to copy and the EDMADST registers should point to the first byte in the destination range. The destination range will always be linear, never wrapping at any values except from 8191 to 0 (the 8-Kbyte memory boundary). Extreme care should be taken when programming the Start and End Pointers to prevent a never ending DMA operation which would overwrite the entire 8-Kbyte buffer. If an interrupt at the end of the copy process is desired, set EIE.DMAIE and EIE.INTIE and clear EIR.DMAIF. Verify that ECON1.CSUMEN is clear. Start the DMA copy by setting ECON1.DMAST. If a transmit operation is in progress (TXRTS set) while the DMAST bit is set, the ENC28J60 will wait until the transmit operation is complete before attempting to do the DMA copy. This possible delay is required because the DMA and transmission engine share the same memory access port. When the copy is complete, the DMA hardware will clear the DMAST bit, set the DMAIF bit and generate an interrupt (if enabled). The Pointers and the EDMACS registers will not be modified. After the DMA module has been initialized and has begun its copy, two main clock cycles will be required for each byte copied. As a result, if a maximum size 1518-byte packet was copied, the DMA module would require slightly more than 121.44 μs to complete. The time required to copy a minimum size packet of 64 bytes would be dominated by the time required to configure the DMA. Preliminary DS39662B-page 71
  • 74. ENC28J60 13.2 Checksum Calculations The checksum calculation logic treats the source data as a series of 16-bit big-endian integers. If the source range contains an odd number of bytes, a padding byte of 00h is effectively added to the end of the series for purposes of calculating the checksum. The calculated checksum is the 16-bit one’s complement of the one’s complement sum of all 16-bit integers. For example, if the bytes included in the checksum were {89h, ABh, CDh}, the checksum would begin by computing 89ABh + CD00h. A carry out of the 16th bit would occur in the example, so in 16-bit one’s complement arithmetic, it would be added back to the first bit. The resulting value of 56ACh would finally be complemented to achieve a checksum of A953h. Pointers will not be modified and no memory will be written to. The EDMACSH and EDMACSL registers will contain the calculated checksum. The host controller may write this value into a packet, compare this value with a received checksum, or use it for other purposes. Various protocols, such as TCP and IP, have a checksum field inside a range of data which the checksum covers. If such a packet is received and the host controller needs to validate the checksum, it can do the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. To calculate a checksum: 1. Program the EDMAST and EDMAND register pairs to point to the first and last bytes of buffer data to be included in the checksum. Care should be taken when programming these Pointers to prevent a never ending checksum calculation due to receive buffer wrapping. To generate an optional interrupt when the checksum calculation is done, clear EIR.DMAIF, set EIE.DMAIE and set EIE.INTIE. Start the calculation by setting ECON1.CSUMEN and ECON1.DMAST. 2. 3. Writing to the receive buffer is permitted when the write address is protected by means of the ERXRDPT Pointers. See Section 7.2 “Receiving Packets” for additional information. The IP checksum has unique mathematical properties which may be used in some cases to reduce the processing requirements further. Writing to the receive buffer may be unnecessary in some applications. When the checksum is finished being calculated, the hardware will clear the DMAST bit, set the DMAIF bit and an interrupt will be generated if enabled. The DMA TABLE 13-1: Read the checksum from the packet and save it to a temporary location Write zeros to the checksum field. Calculate a new checksum using the DMA controller. Compare the results with the saved checksum from step 1. When operating the DMA in Checksum mode, it will take one main clock cycle for every byte included in the checksum. As a result, if a checksum over 1446 bytes were performed, the DMA module would require slightly more than 57.84 μs to complete the operation. SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH THE DMA CONTROLLER Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page EIE INTIE PKTIE DMAIE LINKIE TXIE r TXERIE RXERIE 13 EIR — PKTIF DMAIF LINKIF TXIF r TXERIF RXERIF 13 TXRST RXRST DMAST CSUMEN TXRTS RXEN BSEL1 BSEL0 13 Register Name ECON1 ERXNDL RX End Low Byte (ERXND<7:0>) — ERXNDH — — 13 RX End High Byte (ERXND<12:8>) 13 EDMASTL EDMASTH EDMANDL EDMANDH EDMADSTL EDMADSTH EDMACSL DMA Start Low Byte (EDMAST<7:0>) — — — DMA Start High Byte (EDMAST<12:8>) DMA End Low Byte (EDMAND<7:0>) — — — DMA End High Byte (EDMAND<12:8>) DMA Destination Low Byte (EDMADST<7:0>) — — — DMA Destination High Byte (EDMADST<12:8>) DMA Checksum Low Byte (EDMACS<7:0>) 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 EDMACSH DMA Checksum High Byte (EDMACS<15:8>) 13 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used with the DMA controller. DS39662B-page 72 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 75. ENC28J60 14.0 POWER-DOWN When normal operation is desired, the host controller must perform a slightly modified procedure: The ENC28J60 may be commanded to power-down via the SPI interface. When powered down, it will no longer be able to transmit and receive any packets. 1. 2. Wake-up by clearing ECON2.PWRSV. Wait at least 300 μs for the PHY to stabilize. To accomplish the delay, the host controller may poll ESTAT.CLKRDY and wait for it to become set. Restore receive capability by setting ECON1.RXEN. To maximize power savings: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn off packet reception by clearing ECON1.RXEN. Wait for any in-progress packets to finish being received by polling ESTAT.RXBUSY. This bit should be clear before proceeding. Wait for any current transmissions to end by confirming ECON1.TXRTS is clear. Set ECON2.VRPS (if not already set). Enter Sleep by setting ECON2.PWRSV. All MAC, MII and PHY registers become inaccessible as a result. Setting PWRSV also clears ESTAT.CLKRDY automatically. 3. After leaving Sleep mode, there is a delay of many milliseconds before a new link is established (assuming an appropriate link partner is present). The host controller may wish to wait until the link is established before attempting to transmit any packets. The link status can be determined by polling the PHSTAT2.LSTAT bit. Alternatively, the link change interrupt may be used if it is enabled. See Section 12.1.5 “Link Change Interrupt Flag (LINKIF)” for additional details. In Sleep mode, all registers and buffer memory will maintain their states. The ETH registers and buffer memory will still be accessible by the host controller. Additionally, the clock driver will continue to operate. The CLKOUT function will be unaffected (see Section 2.3 “CLKOUT Pin”). TABLE 14-1: Name ESTAT ECON2 ECON1 SUMMARY OF REGISTERS USED WITH POWER-DOWN Bit 7 Bit 6 INT BUFER AUTOINC PKTDEC TXRST RXRST Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page r LATECOL — RXBUSY TXABRT CLKRDY 13 PWRSV r VRPS — — — 13 DMAST CSUMEN TXRTS RXEN BSEL1 BSEL0 13 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’, r = reserved bit. Shaded cells are not used for power-down. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 73
  • 77. ENC28J60 15.0 BUILT-IN SELF-TEST CONTROLLER The BIST controller is operated through four registers: The ENC28J60 features a Built-in Self-Test (BIST) module which is designed to confirm proper operation of each bit in the 8-Kbyte memory buffer. Although it is primarily useful for testing during manufacturing, it remains present and available for diagnostic purposes by the user. The controller writes to all locations in the buffer memory and requires several pieces of hardware shared by normal Ethernet operations. Thus, the BIST should only be used on Reset or after necessary hardware is freed. When the BIST is used, the ECON1 register’s DMAST, RXEN and TXRTS bits should all be clear. REGISTER 15-1: • EBSTCON register (control and status register) • EBSTSD register (fill seed/initial shift value) • EBSTCSH and EBSTCSL registers (high and low bytes of generated checksum) The EBSTCON register (Register 15-1) controls the module’s overall operation, selecting the testing modes and starting the self-test process. The bit pattern for memory tests is provided by the EBSTSD seed register; its content is either used directly, or as the seed for a pseudo-random number generator, depending on the Test mode. EBSTCON: ETHERNET SELF-TEST CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PSV2 PSV1 PSV0 PSEL TMSEL1 TMSEL0 TME BISTST bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 PSV2:PSV0: Pattern Shift Value bits When TMSEL<1:0> = 10: The bits in EBSTSD will shift left by this amount after writing to each memory location. When TMSEL<1:0> = 00, 01 or 11: This value is ignored. bit 4 PSEL: Port Select bit 1 = DMA and BIST modules will swap ports when accessing the memory 0 = Normal configuration bit 3-2 TMSEL1:TMSEL0: Test Mode Select bits 11 = Reserved 10 = Pattern shift fill 01 = Address fill 00 = Random data fill bit 1 TME: Test Mode Enable bit 1 = Enable Test mode 0 = Disable Test mode bit 0 BISTST: Built-in Self-Test Start/Busy bit 1 = Test in progress; cleared automatically when test is done 0 = No test running © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 75
  • 78. ENC28J60 15.1 Using the BIST When the BIST controller is started, it will fill the entire buffer with the data generated for the current test configuration and it will also calculate a checksum of the data as it is written. When the BIST is complete, the EBSTCS registers will be updated with the checksum. The host controller will be able to determine if the test passed or failed by using the DMA module to calculate a checksum of all memory. The resulting checksum generated by the DMA should match the BIST checksum. If after any properly executed test, the checksums differ, a hardware fault may be suspected. The BIST controller supports 3 different operations: The ports through which the BIST and DMA modules access the dual port SRAM can be swapped for each of the four Test modes to ensure proper read/write capability from both ports. To use the BIST: 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Program the EDMAST register pair to 0000h. Program EDMAND and ERXND register pairs to 1FFFh. Configure the DMA for checksum generation by setting CSUMEN in ECON1. Write the seed/initial shift value byte to the EBSTSD register (this is not necessary if Address Fill mode is used). Enable Test mode, select the desired test, select the desired port configuration for the test. Start the BIST by setting EBSTCON.BISTST. Start the DMA checksum by setting DMAST in ECON1. The DMA controller will read the memory at the same rate the BIST controller will write to it, so the DMA can be started any time after the BIST is started. Wait for the DMA to complete by polling the DMAST bit or receiving the DMA interrupt (if enabled). Compare the EDMACS registers with the EBSTCS registers. To ensure full testing, the test should be redone with the Port Select bit, PSEL, altered. When not using Address Fill mode, additional tests may be done with different seed values to gain greater confidence that the memory is working as expected. DS39662B-page 76 The BIST module requires one main clock cycle for each byte that it writes into the RAM. The DMA module’s checksum implementation requires the same time but it can be started immediately after the BIST is started. As a result, the minimum time required to do one test pass is slightly greater than 327.68 μs. 15.2 • Random Data Fill • Address Fill • Pattern Shift Fill 1. 2. At any time during a test, the test can be canceled by clearing the BISTST, DMAST and TME bits. While the BIST is filling memory, the EBSTSD register should not be accessed, nor should any configuration changes occur. When the BIST completes its memory fill and checksum generation, the BISTST bit will automatically be cleared. Random Data Fill Mode In Random Data Fill mode, the BIST controller will write pseudo-random data into the buffer. The random data is generated by a Linear Feedback Shift Register (LFSR) implementation. The random number generator is seeded by the initial contents of the EBSTSD register and the register will have new contents when the BIST is finished. Because of the LFSR implementation, an initial seed of zero will generate a continuous pattern of zeros. As a result, a non-zero seed value will likely perform a more extensive memory test. Selecting the same seed for two separate trials will allow a repeat of the same test. 15.3 Address Fill Mode In Address Fill mode, the BIST controller will write the low byte of each memory address into the associated buffer location. As an example, after the BIST is operated, the location 0000h should have 00h in it, location 0001h should have 01h in it, location 0E2Ah should have 2Ah in it and so on. With this fixed memory pattern, the BIST and DMA modules should always generate a checksum of F807h. The host controller may use Address Fill mode to confirm that the BIST and DMA modules themselves are both operating as intended. 15.4 Pattern Shift Fill Mode In Pattern Shift Fill mode, the BIST controller writes the value of EBSTSD into memory location 0000h. Before writing to location 0001h, it shifts the contents of EBSTSD to the left by the value specified by the PSV2:PSV0 bits in EBSTCON. Bits that leave the most significant end of EBSTSD are wrapped around to the least significant side. This shift is repeated for each new address. As a result of shifting the data, a checkerboard pattern can be written into the buffer memory to confirm that adjacent memory elements do not affect each other when accessed. Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 79. ENC28J60 TABLE 15-1: Name ECON1 ERXNDL ERXNDH EDMASTL EDMASTH EDMANDL EDMANDH SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH THE SELF-TEST CONTROLLER Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Values on page TXRST RXRST DMAST CSUMEN TXRTS RXEN BSEL1 BSEL0 13 RX End Low Byte (ERXND<7:0>) — — — RX End High Byte (ERXND<12:8>) DMA Start Low Byte (EDMAST<7:0>) — — — 13 13 13 DMA Start High Byte (EDMAST<12:8>) 13 DMA End Low Byte (EDMAND<7:0>) — — — 13 DMA End High Byte (EDMAND<12:8>) 13 EDMACSL DMA Checksum Low Byte (EDMACS<7:0>) 13 EDMACSH DMA Checksum High Byte (EDMACS<15:8>) 13 EBSTSD Built-in Self-Test Fill Seed (EBSTSD<7:0>) EBSTCON PSV2 PSV1 PSV0 PSEL 14 TMSEL1 TMSEL0 TME BISTST 14 EBSTCSL Built-in Self-Test Checksum Low Byte (EBSTCS<7:0>) 14 EBSTCSH Built-in Self-Test Checksum High Byte (EBSTCS<15:8>) 14 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 77
  • 81. ENC28J60 16.0 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Absolute Maximum Ratings Storage temperature ...............................................................................................................................-65°C to +150°C Ambient temperature under bias............................................................................................. -40°C to +85°C (Industrial) 0°C to +70°C (Commercial) Voltage on VDD, VDDOSC, VDDPLL, VDDRX, and VDDTX, with respect to VSS ................................................ -0.3V to 3.6V Voltage on RESET, CS, SCK and SI, with respect to VSS ........................................................................... -0.3V to 6.0V Voltage on CLKOUT, SO, OSC1, OSC2, LEDA and LEDB, with respect to VSS ...............................-0.3V to VDD + 0.3V Voltage on TPIN+/- and TPOUT+/- with respect to VSS ............................................................................... -0.3V to 5.0V VCAP with respect to VSS (Note 1) ............................................................................................................. -0.3V to 2.75V ESD protection on all pins.......................................................................................................................................... 2 kV Current sourced or sunk by LEDA, LEDB ...............................................................................................................12 mA Current sourced or sunk by CLKOUT .......................................................................................................................8 mA Current sourced or sunk by INT and SO...................................................................................................................4 mA Note 1: VCAP is not designed to supply an external load. No external voltage should be applied to this pin. † Notice: Stresses above those listed under “Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at those or any other conditions above those indicated in the operational listings of this specification is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 79
  • 82. ENC28J60 16.1 DC Characteristics: ENC28J60 (Industrial and Commercial) DC CHARACTERISTICS Param. No. Sym Characteristic D001 VDD Supply Voltage D002 VPOR VDD Power-on Reset Voltage D003 SVDD VDD Rise Rate to ensure internal Power-on Reset signal VIH Standard Operating Conditions -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C, 3.10V ≤ VDD ≤ 3.60V (Industrial) 0°C ≤ TA ≤ +70°C, 3.10V ≤ VDD ≤ 3.60V (Commercial) Min Typ Max Units Conditions 3.10 3.30 3.60 V — — 0.7 V See section on Power-on Reset for details 0.05 — — V/ms See section on Power-on Reset for details 2.25 — 5.5 V 0.7 VDD — VDD V Input High Voltage D004 SCK, CS, SI, RESET D005 OSC1 VIL Input Low Voltage D006 SCK, CS, SI, RESET VSS — 1.0 V D007 OSC1 VSS — 0.3 VDD V VDD – 0.7 VDD – 0.7 VDD – 0.7 — — — — — — V V V IOH = -12.0 mA (Note 1) IOH = -8.0 mA (Note 1) IOH = -4.0 mA (Note 1) — — — — — — 0.4 0.4 0.4 V V V IOL = 12.0 mA IOL = 8.0 mA IOL = 4.0 mA 74K — 173K Ω All input pins except OSC1 — — ±1 μA CS = RESET = VDD, VSS ≤ VPIN ≤ VDD, pins in high-impedance state (Note 1) OSC1 pin — — ±200 μA OSC1 = VDD (Note 1) Transmitting Ethernet packets — 160 180 mA VDD = 3.30V, FSCK = 10 MHz, SO = Open, LEDA and LEDB open, ECON2<PWRSV> = 0 Active, not transmitting Ethernet packets — 120 — mA VDD = 3.30V, LEDA and LEDB open, ECON2<PWRSV> = 0 Standby Current (Sleep mode) — 1.2 2.0 mA CS = VDD, Inputs tied to VDD or VSS, VDD = 3.3V, TA = 25°C, ECON2<PWRSV> = 1 VOH Output High Voltage LEDA, LEDB CLKOUT INT, SO VOL Output Low Voltage LEDA, LEDB CLKOUT INT, SO RPU Weak Pull-up Resistance IIL Input Leakage Current IDD IDDS Note 1: Operating Current Negative current is defined as current sourced by the pin. DS39662B-page 80 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 83. ENC28J60 TABLE 16-1: AC CHARACTERISTICS: ENC28J60 (INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL) Standard Operating Conditions -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C, 3.10V ≤ VDD ≤ 3.60V (Industrial) 0°C ≤ TA ≤ +70°C, 3.10V ≤ VDD ≤ 3.60V (Commercial) AC CHARACTERISTICS TABLE 16-2: Param. No. OSCILLATOR TIMING CHARACTERISTICS Sym Characteristic Min Max Units FOSC Clock In Frequency 25 25 MHz TOSC Clock In Period 40 40 ns TDUTY Duty Cycle (external clock input) 40 60 % Δf Clock Tolerance — ±50 ppm Min Max Conditions Units TABLE 16-3: Param. No. RESET AC CHARACTERISTICS Sym Characteristic trl RESET Pin High Time (between Reset events) 2 — μs tRSTLOW RESET Pin Low Time to trigger Reset 400 — ns Min Max Units ns Conditions TABLE 16-4: Param. No. CLKOUT PIN AC CHARACTERISTICS Sym Characteristic Conditions thCLKOUT 16.5 — tlCLKOUT CLKOUT Pin Low Time 16.5 — ns TDUTY = 50% (Note 1) trCLKOUT CLKOUT Pin Rise Time — 3 ns Measured from 0.1 VDD to 0.9 VDD, Load = 10 pF (Note 1) tfCLKOUT Note 1: CLKOUT Pin High Time TDUTY = 50% (Note 1) CLKOUT Pin Fall Time — 4 ns Measured from 0.9 VDD to 0.1 VDD, Load = 10 pF (Note 1) CLKOUT prescaler is set to divide by one. TABLE 16-5: REQUIREMENTS FOR EXTERNAL MAGNETICS Parameter Min Norm Max Units RX Transformer Turns Ratio — 1:1 — — TX Transformer Turns Ratio — 1:1 — — Insertion Loss 0.0 0.6 1.1 dB Primary Inductance 350 — — μH Transformer Isolation — 1.5 — kV Differential to Common Mode Rejection 40 — — dB Return Loss -16 — — Conditions dB © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary Transformer Center Tap = 3.3V 8 mA bias 0.1 to 10 MHz DS39662B-page 81
  • 84. ENC28J60 FIGURE 16-1: SPI INPUT TIMING TCSS TCSH TCSD CS SCK TSU THD MSb In SI LSb In 1/FSCK SO High-Impedance FIGURE 16-2: SPI OUTPUT TIMING CS SCK TV SO TDIS TV MSb Out LSb Out 1/FSCK SI LSb In Don’t Care TABLE 16-6: Param. No. Sym SPI INTERFACE AC CHARACTERISTICS Characteristic FSCK 1 Clock Frequency TCSS CS Setup Time Min Max Units DC 20 Conditions MHz 50 — ns 10 — ns ETH registers and memory buffer 210 — ns MAC and MII registers 2 TCSH CS Hold Time 3 TCSD CS Disable Time 50 — ns 4 TSU Data Setup Time 10 — ns 5 THD Data Hold Time 10 — ns 6 TV Output Valid from Clock Low — 10 ns SO Load = 30 pF 7 TDIS Output Disable Time — 10 ns SO Load = 30 pF DS39662B-page 82 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 85. ENC28J60 17.0 PACKAGING INFORMATION 17.1 Package Marking Information 28-Lead SPDIP Example ENC28J60-I/SP e3 0610017 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX YYWWNNN 28-Lead SOIC Example ENC28J60-I/SO e3 0610017 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX YYWWNNN 28-Lead SSOP Example XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX YYWWNNN 28-Lead QFN ENC28J60 -C/SS e3 0610017 Example XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX YYWWNNN ENC28J60 -I/ML e3 0610017 Legend: XX...X Y YY WW NNN e3 * Note: Customer-specific information Year code (last digit of calendar year) Year code (last 2 digits of calendar year) Week code (week of January 1 is week ‘01’) Alphanumeric traceability code Pb-free JEDEC designator for Matte Tin (Sn) This package is Pb-free. The Pb-free JEDEC designator ( e3 ) can be found on the outer packaging for this package. In the event the full Microchip part number cannot be marked on one line, it will be carried over to the next line, thus limiting the number of available characters for customer-specific information. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 83
  • 86. ENC28J60 17.2 Package Details The following sections give the technical details of the packages. 28-Lead Skinny Plastic Dual In-line (SP) – 300 mil Body (PDIP) E1 D 2 n 1 α E A2 A L c β B1 A1 eB Units Number of Pins Pitch p B Dimension Limits n p INCHES* MIN NOM MILLIMETERS MAX MIN NOM 28 MAX 28 .100 2.54 Top to Seating Plane A .140 .150 .160 3.56 3.81 4.06 Molded Package Thickness A2 .125 .130 .135 3.18 3.30 3.43 Base to Seating Plane A1 .015 8.26 0.38 Shoulder to Shoulder Width E .300 .310 .325 7.62 7.87 Molded Package Width E1 .275 .285 .295 6.99 7.24 7.49 Overall Length D 1.345 1.365 1.385 34.16 34.67 35.18 Tip to Seating Plane L c .125 .130 .135 3.18 3.30 3.43 .008 .012 .015 0.20 0.29 0.38 B1 .040 .053 .065 1.02 1.33 1.65 Lead Thickness Upper Lead Width Lower Lead Width Overall Row Spacing Mold Draft Angle Top B § .016 .019 .022 0.41 0.48 0.56 eB α .320 .350 .430 8.13 8.89 10.92 5 10 15 5 10 15 β Mold Draft Angle Bottom 5 10 15 5 10 15 * Controlling Parameter § Significant Characteristic Notes: Dimension D and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed .010” (0.254mm) per side. JEDEC Equivalent: MO-095 Drawing No. C04-070 DS39662B-page 84 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 87. ENC28J60 28-Lead Plastic Small Outline (SO) – Wide, 300 mil Body (SOIC) E E1 p D B 2 1 n h α 45° c A2 A φ β L Units Dimension Limits n p A1 INCHES* NOM 28 .050 .099 .091 .008 .407 .295 .704 .020 .033 4 .011 .017 12 12 Preliminary MAX MILLIMETERS NOM 28 1.27 2.36 2.50 2.24 2.31 0.10 0.20 10.01 10.34 7.32 7.49 17.65 17.87 0.25 0.50 0.41 0.84 0 4 0.23 0.28 0.36 0.42 0 12 0 12 MAX Number of Pins Pitch Overall Height A .093 .104 2.64 Molded Package Thickness A2 .088 .094 2.39 Standoff § A1 .004 .012 0.30 Overall Width E .394 .420 10.67 Molded Package Width E1 .288 .299 7.59 Overall Length D .695 .712 18.08 Chamfer Distance h .010 .029 0.74 Foot Length L .016 .050 1.27 φ Foot Angle Top 0 8 8 c Lead Thickness .009 .013 0.33 Lead Width B .014 .020 0.51 α Mold Draft Angle Top 0 15 15 β Mold Draft Angle Bottom 0 15 15 * Controlling Parameter § Significant Characteristic Notes: Dimensions D and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed .010” (0.254mm) per side. JEDEC Equivalent: MS-013 Drawing No. C04-052 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. MIN MIN DS39662B-page 85
  • 88. ENC28J60 28-Lead Plastic Shrink Small Outline (SS) – 209 mil Body, 5.30 mm (SSOP) E E1 p D B 2 1 n A c φ A2 A1 L Units Number of Pins Dimension Limits n p Pitch Overall Height Molded Package Thickness Standoff Overall Width Molded Package Width Overall Length Foot Length Lead Thickness Foot Angle Lead Width A A2 A1 E E1 D L c φ B INCHES MIN .065 .002 .295 .197 .390 .022 .004 0° .009 NOM 28 .026 .069 .307 .209 .402 .030 4° - MILLIMETERS * MAX .079 .073 .323 .220 .413 .037 .010 8° .015 MIN 1.65 0.05 7.49 5.00 9.90 0.55 0.09 0° 0.22 NOM 28 0.65 1.75 7.80 5.30 10.20 0.75 4° - MAX 2.0 1.85 8.20 5.60 10.50 0.95 0.25 8° 0.38 * Controlling Parameter Notes: Dimensions D and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed .010" (0.254mm) per side. Drawing No. C04-073 DS39662B-page 86 Revised 1-12-06 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 89. ENC28J60 28-Lead Plastic Quad Flat No Lead Package (ML) 6x6 mm Body (QFN) – With 0.55 mm Contact Length (Saw Singulated) E2 E EXPOSED METAL PAD (NOTE 2) e D b D2 2 1 K n OPTIONAL INDEX TOP VIEW AREA SEE DETAIL ALTERNATE INDEX INDICATORS L BOTTOM VIEW (NOTE 1) A1 A Units Dimension Limits MILLIMETERS* INCHES MIN Number of Pins DETAIL ALTERNATE PAD OUTLINE MAX NOM n MIN NOM 28 MAX 28 Pitch e Overall Height A .031 .035 .039 0.80 0.90 1.00 Standoff A1 .000 .001 .002 0.00 0.02 0.05 Contact Thickness A3 0.65 BSC .026 BSC 0.20 REF .008 REF E Exposed Pad Length .240 5.90 6.00 6.10 .167 .169 3.89 4.24 4.29 .232 .236 .240 5.90 6.00 6.10 D2 Overall Length .236 .153 D Exposed Pad Width .232 E2 Overall Width .153 .167 .169 3.89 4.24 4.29 Contact Width β .009 .011 .013 0.23 0.28 0.33 Contact Length § L .018 .022 .024 0.45 0.55 0.65 K .008 – – 0.20 – – Contact-to-Exposed Pad § * Controlling Parameter § Significant Characteristic Notes: 1. Pin 1 visual index feature may vary, but must be located within the hatched area. 2. Exposed pad varies according to die attach paddle size. BSC: Basic Dimension. Theoretically exact value shown without tolerances. See ASME Y14.5M REF: Reference Dimension, usually without tolerance, for information purposes only. See ASME Y14.5M JEDEC equivalent: MO-220 Drawing No. C04-105 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary Revised 09-12-05 DS39662B-page 87
  • 91. ENC28J60 INDEX B Block Diagrams Crystal Oscillator Operation .......................................... 5 ENC28J60 Architecture ................................................ 3 Ethernet Buffer Organization ...................................... 18 External Clock Source .................................................. 5 External Connections.................................................... 7 I/O Level Shifting 3-State Buffers ...................................................... 8 AND Gate ............................................................. 8 Interrupt Logic ............................................................. 63 LEDB Polarity Configuration ......................................... 8 Memory Organization.................................................. 11 On-Chip Reset Circuit ................................................. 59 Typical Interface............................................................ 4 Broadcast Filter ................................................................... 52 Built-in Self-Test Controller ................................................. 75 Address Fill Mode ....................................................... 76 Associated Registers .................................................. 77 EBSTCS registers....................................................... 76 EBSTSD Register ....................................................... 76 Pattern Shift Fill Mode................................................. 76 Random Data Fill Mode .............................................. 76 Use.............................................................................. 76 C Checksum Calculations ...................................................... 72 CLKOUT Pin ......................................................................... 6 Control Register Map .......................................................... 12 Control Register Summary............................................ 13–14 Control Registers ................................................................ 12 Customer Change Notification Service ............................... 91 Customer Notification Service............................................. 91 Customer Support ............................................................... 91 D DMA Controller ................................................................... 71 Access to Buffers ........................................................ 17 Associated Registers .................................................. 72 Checksum Calculations .............................................. 72 Copying Memory......................................................... 71 Duplex-Mode Configuration and Negotiation .................................... 53 F Filtering Using AND Logic ........................................................ 50 Using OR Logic .......................................................... 49 Flow Control........................................................................ 55 Associated Registers.................................................. 57 Full-Duplex Mode ....................................................... 55 Half-Duplex Mode....................................................... 55 Sample Full-Duplex Network (Diagram) ..................... 55 Full-Duplex-Mode Operation.................................................................... 53 H Half-Duplex-Mode Operation.................................................................... 53 Hash Table Filter ................................................................ 52 I I/O Level Shifting .................................................................. 8 Using 3-State Buffers ................................................... 8 Using AND Gates ......................................................... 8 Initialization ......................................................................... 33 MAC Settings.............................................................. 34 PHY Settings .............................................................. 37 Receive Buffer ............................................................ 33 Receive Filters............................................................ 33 Transmit Buffer ........................................................... 33 Waiting for OST .......................................................... 33 Interrupts ............................................................................ 63 DMA Flag (DMAIF) ..................................................... 69 INT Enable (INTIE) ..................................................... 64 Link Change Flag (LINKIF)......................................... 69 Receive Error Flag (RXERIF) ..................................... 68 Receive Packet Pending Flag (PKTIF) ....................... 69 Transmit Error Flag (TXERIF) .................................... 68 Transmit Interrupt Flag (TXIF) .................................... 68 L LED Configuration ................................................................ 8 LEDB Polarity and Reset Configuration................................ 8 M E Electrical Characteristics..................................................... 79 Absolute Maximum Ratings ........................................ 79 AC Characteristics ...................................................... 81 CLKOUT Pin AC ......................................................... 81 DC Characteristics ...................................................... 80 Oscillator Timing ......................................................... 81 Requirements for External Magnetics......................... 81 Reset AC..................................................................... 81 SPI Interface AC ......................................................... 82 ENC28J60 Block Diagram .................................................... 3 EREVID Register ................................................................ 22 Errata .................................................................................... 2 Ethernet Buffer .................................................................... 17 Organization (Diagram)............................................... 18 Ethernet Module Transmitting and Receiving Data Receive Packet Layout ....................................... 43 Transmit Packet Layout ...................................... 40 © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Ethernet Overview .............................................................. 31 External Connections (Diagram)........................................... 7 Magic Packet Filter ............................................................. 52 Magnetics and External Components................................... 7 Memory Organization ......................................................... 11 Multicast Filter..................................................................... 52 O Oscillator............................................................................... 5 CLKOUT Transition ...................................................... 6 Crystal Oscillator .......................................................... 5 External Clock Source .................................................. 5 Start-up Timer............................................................... 5 P Packaging Information ........................................................ 83 Details......................................................................... 84 Marking....................................................................... 83 Preliminary DS39662B-page 89
  • 92. ENC28J60 Packet Format..................................................................... 31 CRC Field ................................................................... 32 Data Field.................................................................... 32 Destination Address .................................................... 32 Padding Field .............................................................. 32 Preamble/Start-of-Frame Delimiter ............................. 31 Source Address .......................................................... 32 Type/Length Field ....................................................... 32 Pattern Match Filter............................................................. 51 Per Packet Control Byte Format ......................................... 39 PHID Registers ................................................................... 22 PHSTAT Registers.............................................................. 22 PHY Register Summary ...................................................... 20 PHY Registers..................................................................... 19 Reading....................................................................... 19 Scanning ..................................................................... 19 Writing ......................................................................... 19 Pinout Diagrams.................................................................... 1 Pinout I/O Descriptions ......................................................... 4 Power-Down........................................................................ 73 Associated Registers .................................................. 73 Power-on Reset (POR) ....................................................... 60 R Read Control Register (RCR) ............................................. 27 Reader Response ............................................................... 92 Reading and Writing to the Buffer ....................................... 17 Receive Buffer..................................................................... 17 Receive Filters .................................................................... 47 Broadcast .................................................................... 52 Hash Table.................................................................. 52 Magic Packet .............................................................. 52 Magic Packet Format .................................................. 52 Multicast ...................................................................... 52 Pattern Match.............................................................. 51 Pattern Match Filter Format ........................................ 51 Unicast ........................................................................ 51 Using AND Logic......................................................... 50 Using OR Logic ........................................................... 49 Receive Only Reset ............................................................ 60 Receiving Packets............................................................... 43 Associated Registers .................................................. 46 Calculating Buffer Free Space .................................... 45 Calculating Free Receive Buffer Space ...................... 45 Calculating Random Access Address ......................... 44 Freeing Buffer Space .................................................. 45 Reading....................................................................... 44 Status Vectors............................................................. 44 Registers EBSTCON (Ethernet Self-Test Control)...................... 75 ECOCON (Clock Output Control) ................................. 6 ECON1 (Ethernet Control 1) ....................................... 15 ECON2 (Ethernet Control 2) ....................................... 16 EFLOCON (Ethernet Flow Control) ............................ 56 EIE (Ethernet Interrupt Enable)................................... 65 EIR (Ethernet Interrupt Request, Flag) ....................... 66 ERXFCON (Ethernet Receive Filter Control) .............. 48 ESTAT (Ethernet Status) ............................................ 64 MABBIPG (MAC Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap)................................................ 36 MACON1 (MAC Control 1).......................................... 34 MACON3 (MAC Control 3).......................................... 35 MACON4 (MAC Control 4).......................................... 36 MICMD (MII Command) .............................................. 21 MISTAT (MII Status) ................................................... 21 PHCON1 (PHY Control 1)........................................... 61 DS39662B-page 90 PHCON2 (PHY Control 2) .......................................... 37 PHID (PHY Device ID)................................................ 22 PHIE (PHY Interrupt Enable) ...................................... 67 PHIR (PHY Interrupt Request, Flag)........................... 67 PHLCON (PHY Module LED Control)........................... 9 PHSTAT1 (Physical Layer Status 1)........................... 23 PHSTAT2 (Physical Layer Status 2)........................... 24 Reset .................................................................................. 59 MAC and PHY Subsystem Resets ............................. 61 Power-on Reset .......................................................... 60 Receive Only Reset .................................................... 60 System Reset ............................................................. 60 Transmit Only Reset ................................................... 60 S Serial Peripheral Interface. See SPI. SPI Bit Field Clear Command............................................ 29 Bit Field Set Command............................................... 29 Instruction Set............................................................. 26 Overview..................................................................... 25 Read Buffer Memory Command ................................. 28 Read Control Register Command............................... 27 System Reset Command............................................ 30 Write Buffer Memory Command ................................. 29 Write Control Register Command............................... 28 System Reset ..................................................................... 60 T Termination Requirement ..................................................... 7 Timing Diagrams CLKOUT Transition ...................................................... 6 Read Control Register Command (ETH) .................... 27 Read Control Register Command (MAC/MII) ............. 27 SPI Input ..................................................................... 82 SPI Input Timing ......................................................... 25 SPI Output .................................................................. 82 SPI Output Timing ...................................................... 25 System Reset Command Sequence........................... 30 Write Buffer Memory Command Sequence ................ 29 Write Control Register Command Sequence.............. 28 Transmit Buffer ................................................................... 17 Transmit Only Reset ........................................................... 60 Transmitting Packets .......................................................... 39 Associated Registers .................................................. 42 Status Vectors ............................................................ 41 Typical ENC28J60-Based Interface...................................... 4 U Unicast Filter....................................................................... 51 W WWW, On-Line Support ....................................................... 2 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 93. ENC28J60 THE MICROCHIP WEB SITE CUSTOMER SUPPORT Microchip provides online support via our WWW site at www.microchip.com. This web site is used as a means to make files and information easily available to customers. Accessible by using your favorite Internet browser, the web site contains the following information: Users of Microchip products can receive assistance through several channels: • Product Support – Data sheets and errata, application notes and sample programs, design resources, user’s guides and hardware support documents, latest software releases and archived software • General Technical Support – Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), technical support requests, online discussion groups, Microchip consultant program member listing • Business of Microchip – Product selector and ordering guides, latest Microchip press releases, listing of seminars and events, listings of Microchip sales offices, distributors and factory representatives • • • • • Distributor or Representative Local Sales Office Field Application Engineer (FAE) Technical Support Development Systems Information Line Customers should contact their distributor, representative or field application engineer (FAE) for support. Local sales offices are also available to help customers. A listing of sales offices and locations is included in the back of this document. Technical support is available through the web site at: http://support.microchip.com CUSTOMER CHANGE NOTIFICATION SERVICE Microchip’s customer notification service helps keep customers current on Microchip products. Subscribers will receive e-mail notification whenever there are changes, updates, revisions or errata related to a specified product family or development tool of interest. To register, access the Microchip web site at www.microchip.com, click on Customer Change Notification and follow the registration instructions. © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 91
  • 94. ENC28J60 READER RESPONSE It is our intention to provide you with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip product. If you wish to provide your comments on organization, clarity, subject matter, and ways in which our documentation can better serve you, please FAX your comments to the Technical Publications Manager at (480) 792-4150. Please list the following information, and use this outline to provide us with your comments about this document. To: Technical Publications Manager RE: Reader Response Total Pages Sent ________ From: Name Company Address City / State / ZIP / Country Telephone: (_______) _________ - _________ FAX: (______) _________ - _________ Application (optional): Would you like a reply? Device: ENC28J60 Y N Literature Number: DS39662B Questions: 1. What are the best features of this document? 2. How does this document meet your hardware and software development needs? 3. Do you find the organization of this document easy to follow? If not, why? 4. What additions to the document do you think would enhance the structure and subject? 5. What deletions from the document could be made without affecting the overall usefulness? 6. Is there any incorrect or misleading information (what and where)? 7. How would you improve this document? DS39662B-page 92 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
  • 95. ENC28J60 PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM To order or obtain information, e.g., on pricing or delivery, refer to the factory or the listed sales office. PART NO. -X Device Temperature Range Examples: /XX Package Device a) b) ENC28J60: Ethernet Controller w/SPI Interface ENC28J60T: Ethernet Controller w/SPI Interface (Tape and Reel) c) d) e) Temperature Range I = -40°C to +85°C (Industrial) (SPDIP, SOIC and QFN packages only) C = 0°C to +70°C (Commercial) (SSOP packages only) Package SP SO SS ML = = = = f) ENC28J60-I/SP: Industrial temperature, SPDIP package. ENC28J60-I/SO: Industrial temperature, SOIC package. ENC28J60T-I/SO: Tape and Reel, Industrial temperature, SOIC package. ENC28J60-C/SS: Commercial temperature, SSOP package. ENC28J60T-C/SS: Tape and Reel, Comercial temperature, SSOP package. ENC28J60-I/ML: Industrial temperature, QFN package. SPDIP (Skinny Plastic DIP) SOIC (Plastic Small Outline) SSOP (Plastic Shrink Small Outline) QFN (Quad Flat No Lead) © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39662B-page 93
  • 96. WORLDWIDE SALES AND SERVICE AMERICAS ASIA/PACIFIC ASIA/PACIFIC EUROPE Corporate Office 2355 West Chandler Blvd. Chandler, AZ 85224-6199 Tel: 480-792-7200 Fax: 480-792-7277 Technical Support: http://support.microchip.com Web Address: www.microchip.com Australia - Sydney Tel: 61-2-9868-6733 Fax: 61-2-9868-6755 India - Bangalore Tel: 91-80-4182-8400 Fax: 91-80-4182-8422 China - Beijing Tel: 86-10-8528-2100 Fax: 86-10-8528-2104 India - New Delhi Tel: 91-11-5160-8631 Fax: 91-11-5160-8632 Austria - Wels Tel: 43-7242-2244-3910 Fax: 43-7242-2244-393 Denmark - Copenhagen Tel: 45-4450-2828 Fax: 45-4485-2829 China - Chengdu Tel: 86-28-8676-6200 Fax: 86-28-8676-6599 India - Pune Tel: 91-20-2566-1512 Fax: 91-20-2566-1513 France - Paris Tel: 33-1-69-53-63-20 Fax: 33-1-69-30-90-79 China - Fuzhou Tel: 86-591-8750-3506 Fax: 86-591-8750-3521 Japan - Yokohama Tel: 81-45-471- 6166 Fax: 81-45-471-6122 Germany - Munich Tel: 49-89-627-144-0 Fax: 49-89-627-144-44 China - Hong Kong SAR Tel: 852-2401-1200 Fax: 852-2401-3431 Korea - Gumi Tel: 82-54-473-4301 Fax: 82-54-473-4302 China - Qingdao Tel: 86-532-8502-7355 Fax: 86-532-8502-7205 Korea - Seoul Tel: 82-2-554-7200 Fax: 82-2-558-5932 or 82-2-558-5934 Asia Pacific Office Suites 3707-14, 37th Floor Tower 6, The Gateway Habour City, Kowloon Hong Kong Tel: 852-2401-1200 Fax: 852-2401-3431 Atlanta Alpharetta, GA Tel: 770-640-0034 Fax: 770-640-0307 Boston Westborough, MA Tel: 774-760-0087 Fax: 774-760-0088 Chicago Itasca, IL Tel: 630-285-0071 Fax: 630-285-0075 Dallas Addison, TX Tel: 972-818-7423 Fax: 972-818-2924 Detroit Farmington Hills, MI Tel: 248-538-2250 Fax: 248-538-2260 Kokomo Kokomo, IN Tel: 765-864-8360 Fax: 765-864-8387 Los Angeles Mission Viejo, CA Tel: 949-462-9523 Fax: 949-462-9608 China - Shanghai Tel: 86-21-5407-5533 Fax: 86-21-5407-5066 Malaysia - Penang Tel: 60-4-646-8870 Fax: 60-4-646-5086 China - Shenyang Tel: 86-24-2334-2829 Fax: 86-24-2334-2393 China - Shenzhen Tel: 86-755-8203-2660 Fax: 86-755-8203-1760 China - Shunde Tel: 86-757-2839-5507 Fax: 86-757-2839-5571 China - Wuhan Tel: 86-27-5980-5300 Fax: 86-27-5980-5118 China - Xian Tel: 86-29-8833-7250 Fax: 86-29-8833-7256 Philippines - Manila Tel: 63-2-634-9065 Fax: 63-2-634-9069 Italy - Milan Tel: 39-0331-742611 Fax: 39-0331-466781 Netherlands - Drunen Tel: 31-416-690399 Fax: 31-416-690340 Spain - Madrid Tel: 34-91-708-08-90 Fax: 34-91-708-08-91 UK - Wokingham Tel: 44-118-921-5869 Fax: 44-118-921-5820 Singapore Tel: 65-6334-8870 Fax: 65-6334-8850 Taiwan - Hsin Chu Tel: 886-3-572-9526 Fax: 886-3-572-6459 Taiwan - Kaohsiung Tel: 886-7-536-4818 Fax: 886-7-536-4803 Taiwan - Taipei Tel: 886-2-2500-6610 Fax: 886-2-2508-0102 Thailand - Bangkok Tel: 66-2-694-1351 Fax: 66-2-694-1350 San Jose Mountain View, CA Tel: 650-215-1444 Fax: 650-961-0286 Toronto Mississauga, Ontario, Canada Tel: 905-673-0699 Fax: 905-673-6509 06/08/06 DS39662B-page 94 Preliminary © 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.